AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON JULY 18, 1997
REGISTRATION NO. 333-
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
---------------
FORM S-1
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
Under
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
DELAWARE 5641 31-1241495
(State or other (Primary standard (I.R.S. employer
jurisdiction of industrial classification identification
incorporation or code number) number)
organization)
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
ONE DODGE DRIVE
WEST CALDWELL, NEW JERSEY 07006
(973) 227-8900
(Address, including zip code, and telephone number,
including area code, of registrant's principal executive offices)
STEVEN BALASIANO, ESQ.
VICE PRESIDENT AND GENERAL COUNSEL
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
ONE DODGE DRIVE
WEST CALDWELL, NEW JERSEY 07006
(973) 227-8900
(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number,
including area code, of agent for service)
Copies of Communications to:
STROOCK & STROOCK & LAVAN LLP HALE AND DORR LLP
180 Maiden Lane 60 State Street
New York, New York 10038 Boston, Massachusetts 02109
Attn.: Jeffrey S. Lowenthal, Esq. Attn.: Patrick J. Rondeau, Esq.
(212) 806-5400 (617) 526-6000
Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to public:
As soon as practicable after this Registration Statement becomes effective.
If any of the securities being registered on this form are to be
offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the
Securities Act of 1933, check the following box. |_|
If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an
offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following
box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier
effective registration statement for the same offering. |_|
If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule
462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities
Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration
statement for the same offering. |_|
If delivery of the prospectus is expected to be made pursuant to Rule
434, please check the following box. |_|
CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Title of Each Class Proposed Maximum Amount of
of Securities to Aggregate Offering Registration
be Registered Price (1) Fee
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Common Stock, $.10 par value $70,000,000 $21,212
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the registration fee in
accordance with Rule 457 under the Securities Act of 1933.
--------------------------------
THE REGISTRANT HEREBY AMENDS THIS REGISTRATION STATEMENT ON SUCH DATE
OR DATES AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO DELAY ITS EFFECTIVE DATE UNTIL THE REGISTRANT
SHALL FILE A FURTHER AMENDMENT WHICH SPECIFICALLY STATES THAT THIS REGISTRATION
STATEMENT SHALL THEREAFTER BECOME EFFECTIVE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 8(A) OF
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933 OR UNTIL THE REGISTRATION STATEMENT SHALL BECOME
EFFECTIVE ON SUCH DATE AS THE COMMISSION, ACTING PURSUANT TO SAID SECTION 8(A),
MAY DETERMINE.
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO COMPLETION OR AMENDMENT. A
REGISTRATION STATEMENT RELATING TO THESE SECURITIES HAS BEEN FILED WITH THE
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION. THESE SECURITIES MAY NOT BE SOLD NOR MAY
OFFERS TO BUY BE ACCEPTED PRIOR TO THE TIME THE REGISTRATION STATEMENT BECOMES
EFFECTIVE. THIS PROSPECTUS SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE AN OFFER TO SELL OR THE
SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER TO BUY NOR SHALL THERE BE ANY SALE OF THESE SECURITIES
IN ANY STATE IN WHICH SUCH OFFER, SOLICITATION OR SALE WOULD BE UNLAWFUL PRIOR
TO REGISTRATION OR QUALIFICATION UNDER THE SECURITIES LAWS OF ANY SUCH STATE.
SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED JULY 18, 1997
______________ SHARES
THE CHILDREN'S
PLACE
COMMON STOCK
All of the shares of Common Stock offered hereby are being sold by The
Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc. (the "Company").
Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for the Common
Stock of the Company. It is currently estimated that the initial public offering
price will be between $___ and $_____ per share. See "Underwriting" for a
discussion of factors to be considered in determining the initial public
offering price. The Company intends to apply for listing of the Common Stock on
the ______________ under the symbol "______."
SEE "RISK FACTORS" BEGINNING ON PAGE 9 OF THIS PROSPECTUS FOR A
DISCUSSION OF CERTAIN FACTORS THAT SHOULD BE CONSIDERED BY PROSPECTIVE
PURCHASERS OF THE COMMON STOCK OFFERED HEREBY.
-----------------------
THESE SECURITIES HAVE NOT BEEN APPROVED OR DISAPPROVED BY THE SECURITIES AND
EXCHANGE COMMISSION OR ANY STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION NOR HAS THE
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION OR ANY STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION
PASSED UPON THE ACCURACY OR ADEQUACY OF THIS PROSPECTUS. ANY
REPRESENTATION TO THE CONTRARY IS A CRIMINAL OFFENSE.
==============================================================================
Price to Underwriting Proceeds to
Public Discount (1) Company (2)
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Per Share....... $ $ $
Total (3)....... $ $ $
==============================================================================
(1) See "Underwriting" for information concerning indemnification of the
Underwriters and other matters.
(2) Before deducting offering expenses payable by the Company, estimated at
$_______.
(3) Certain stockholders of the Company have granted to the
Underwriters a 30-day option to purchase up to ____________ additional shares of
Common Stock solely to cover over-allotments, if any. If the Underwriters
exercise this option in full, the total Proceeds to the Company will remain
unchanged, and the total Price to Public, Underwriting Discount and Proceeds to
the Selling Stockholders will be $________, $________ and $________,
respectively. See "Underwriting."
The shares of Common Stock are offered by the several
Underwriters named herein, when, as and if delivered to and accepted by the
Underwriters and subject to their right to reject any orders in whole or in
part. It is expected that delivery of the certificates representing such shares
will be made against payment therefor at the office of Montgomery Securities on
or about ___________, 1997.
---------------
MONTGOMERY SECURITIES
DONALDSON, LUFKIN & JENRETTE
SECURITIES CORPORATION
SMITH BARNEY INC.
LEGG MASON WOOD WALKER
INCORPORATED
____________, 1997
The Company intends to distribute to its stockholders annual reports
containing financial statements audited by its independent certified public
accountants and quarterly reports containing unaudited financial information for
the first three quarters of each fiscal year.
CERTAIN PERSONS PARTICIPATING IN THIS OFFERING MAY ENGAGE IN
TRANSACTIONS THAT STABILIZE, MAINTAIN, OR OTHERWISE AFFECT THE PRICE OF THE
COMMON STOCK. SUCH TRANSACTIONS MAY INCLUDE STABILIZING TRANSACTIONS AND THE
PURCHASE OF COMMON STOCK TO COVER SYNDICATE SHORT POSITIONS. FOR A DESCRIPTION
OF THESE ACTIVITIES, SEE "UNDERWRITING."
[ARTWORK TO BE INSERTED]
PROSPECTUS SUMMARY
The following summary is qualified in its entirety by the more
detailed information and financial statements, including the notes thereto,
contained elsewhere in this Prospectus. Except as otherwise indicated, all
information in this Prospectus, gives effect to a 120-for-one stock split of the
Common Stock (the "Stock Split") and the conversion of all outstanding shares of
the Company's Series B Common Stock into a total of 7,659,889 shares of Common
Stock (the "Series B Conversion"), both of which will be effected prior to
consummation of the offering made by this Prospectus. All references to the
Company's fiscal years refer to the fiscal years ended on the Saturday nearest
to January 31 of the following year. For example, references to fiscal 1996
shall mean the fiscal year ended February 1, 1997.
THE COMPANY
The Company is a leading specialty retailer of high quality,
value-priced apparel and accessories for newborn to twelve year old children.
The Company designs, contracts to manufacture and sells its products under "The
Children's Place" brand name. As of July 17, 1997, the Company operated 130
stores, primarily located in regional shopping malls in the eastern half of the
United States. The Company's net sales have increased from $96.6 million in
fiscal 1993 to $143.8 million in fiscal 1996 and operating income has increased
from $1.1 million in fiscal 1993 to $13.3 million in fiscal 1996. In the first
quarter of fiscal 1997, net sales totaled $39.2 million as compared to $30.4
million in the first quarter of fiscal 1996. The Company has achieved comparable
store sales increases over prior years of 13.0%, 10.0% and 8.6% during fiscal
1994, 1995 and 1996, respectively, and 5.0% in the first quarter of fiscal 1997.
Net sales per gross square foot have increased from $226 in fiscal 1993 to $335
in fiscal 1996. These increases are primarily the result of a merchandising and
operational repositioning of the Company over the last five fiscal years under
the direction of the Company's current management team.
In fiscal 1996, new stores for which fiscal 1996 was the first full
year of operations had average net sales of $1,250,000. The average investment
for these new stores, including capital expenditures (net of landlord
contribution), initial inventory (net of merchandise payables) and pre-opening
costs, was $371,000. New stores have generally achieved profitability within the
first full quarter of operations, with average fiscal 1996 store level operating
cash flow of $288,000 (23.0% of net sales) for stores for which fiscal 1996 was
the first full year of operations. In fiscal 1996, these stores yielded a cash
return on investment of 77.6%.
In July 1996, following a private financing in which the Company
raised $37.4 million of net proceeds, the Company began to implement an
aggressive growth strategy designed to capitalize on its business strengths and
its strong store economics. From July 1, 1996 through the end of fiscal 1996,
the Company opened a total of 16 new stores, growing to 108 stores. During
fiscal 1997 through July 17, 1997, the Company has opened 22 stores. The Company
intends to continue its expansion program and currently plans to open
approximately 25 additional stores during the remainder of fiscal 1997 and at
least 60 stores in fiscal 1998.
BUSINESS STRENGTHS AND STRATEGY
The Company believes that its value-based, proprietary brand business
strategy has been and will continue to be the key to its success as a specialty
retailer. The following strengths have contributed to the success of the
Company's merchandising and operating strategies:
UNIQUE PRICE-VALUE POSITIONING. By offering quality clothing and
accessories under "The Children's Place" brand name at prices 20% to 30% below
most of its direct mall-based competitors, the Company believes that it has
built a loyal base of customers who regularly purchase from the Company as their
children grow. The Company believes that the value created by the price and
quality of its merchandise has enabled it to establish a unique market position.
MERCHANDISING STRATEGY. The Company's merchandising strategy is built
on the offering of key basic items at exceptional values, complemented by
fashion items and accessories to create a fully coordinated look. The Company
designs its merchandise to present a fresh and youthful image that management
believes is unique to "The Children's Place" brand.
STRONG BRAND IMAGE. The Company believes that it has built a strong
brand image for "The Children's Place" by (i) selling its products exclusively
in its own stores, (ii) creating a uniform appearance in merchandise
presentation, (iii) providing a consistent selection of coordinated separates
and accessories for children, and (iv) offering high quality products at value
prices. The Company believes that these factors foster consumer loyalty to "The
Children's Place" brand name.
BROAD CONSUMER APPEAL. The Company believes that its merchandise
assortment and high quality at everyday value pricing appeal to a broad range of
consumers across all socioeconomic groups, enabling it to compete successfully
in a wide range of regional shopping malls, outlet centers and other locations.
VERTICALLY INTEGRATED OPERATIONS. The Company controls the design,
sourcing and sale of its private label children's apparel and accessories. The
Company believes that the vertical integration of its operations, from in-house
design to in-store presentation, enables the Company to identify and respond to
market trends, uphold rigorous product quality standards and control the cost of
its merchandise.
EXPERT SOURCING. The Company combines management's extensive sourcing
experience with a cost-based buying strategy. Management has established close,
long-standing and mutually beneficial relationships with numerous manufacturers.
Through these relationships and its extensive knowledge of component costs of
apparel, the Company believes that it has been able to purchase high quality
products at low costs.
PROVEN MANAGEMENT TEAM. The Company has a seasoned, highly experienced
management team, with its twelve most senior members having an average of 17
years in the retail and/or apparel business and an average of eight years with
the Company. The Company believes that management's substantial experience
favorably positions the Company for future expansion.
The Company's principal executive offices are located at One Dodge
Drive, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006. Its telephone number is (973) 227-8900.
THE OFFERING
Common Stock offered by the Company:................ _______________ shares
Common Stock to be outstanding
after the offering:................................ _______________ shares (1)
Use of proceeds:................................... To repay the Company's 12%
Senior Subordinated Notes,
to repurchase a portion of
the Company's outstanding
warrants, to reduce
outstanding borrowings
under the Company's
revolving credit facility,
and for working capital
and other general corporate
purposes.
Proposed Symbol:................................. ________
- --------
(1) Excludes __________ shares of Common Stock issuable under outstanding
options, of which __________ are currently exercisable.
SUMMARY HISTORICAL AND PRO FORMA FINANCIAL AND OPERATING DATA
(DOLLARS IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE AMOUNTS AND AVERAGE NET
SALES PER GROSS SQUARE FOOT)
The following information is qualified in its entirety by the financial
statements appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus.
Fiscal Year Ended(1) Three Months Ended
------------------------------------------------------- --------------------
January 29, January 28, February 3, February 1, May 4, May 3,
1994 1995 1996 1997 1996 1997
------------ ------------ ---------- ------------ --------- ---------
Statement of Operations Data:
Net sales....................................... $96,649 $107,953 $122,060 $143,838 $30,438 $39,203
Gross profit.................................... 28,874 33,724 38,626 54,052 10,238 14,018
Operating income................................ 1,125 2,810 4,412 13,285 1,568 2,618
Interest expense, net........................... 1,150 1,303 1,925 2,884 518 828
Income before income taxes, extraordinary items and
the cumulative effect of accounting change.. 214 1,026 1,690 9,522 647 1,690
Provision (benefit) for income taxes(2)........ 53 54 36 (20,919) 10 679
Extraordinary gains(3).......................... 15,169 490 0 0 0 0
Net income(4)................................... 14,780 1,462 1,654 30,441 637 1,011
======= ======== ======== ======== ======== =======
Pro forma net income per common share(5) $1.27 $0.04
Pro forma weighted average common shares
outstanding (5).............................. 23,903,392 23,903,392
Pro forma supplemental net income per common
share(6)......................................
Fiscal Year Ended Three Months Ended
------------------------------------------------------ --------------------
January 29, January 28, February 3, February 1, May 4, May 3,
1994 1995 1996 1997 1996 1997
----------- ---------- ---------- ----------- --------- ---------
Selected Operating Data:
Number of stores open at end of period.......... 87 87 91 108 93 119
Comparable store sales increase (decrease)(7)(8) (2.7%) 13.0% 10.0% 8.6% 9.8% 5.0%
Average net sales per store (8)(9).............. $1,124 $1,264 $1,362 $1,479 $331 $343
Average square footage per store (10)........... 4,954 4,786 4,528 4,284 4,496 4,232
Average net sales per gross square foot (8)(11). $226 $259 $292 $335 $73 $80
At At May 3, 1997
------------------------------------------------ ----------------------------
January 29, January 28, February 3, February 1, Actual As Adjusted
1994 1995 1996 1997 (12)
----------- ---------- ---------- ----------- --------- ---------
Balance Sheet Data:
Working capital (deficit).......................... ($11,621) ($10,398) ($17,630) $11,951 $10,250
Total assets....................................... 26,600 26,556 32,073 64,479 65,934
Long-term debt..................................... 23,719 21,626 15,735 20,504 20,248
Stockholders' equity (deficit)..................... (15,338) (13,388) (11,735) 27,298 28,309
- -----------------------
(1) All references to the Company's fiscal years refer to the 52- or 53-week
year ended on the Saturday nearest to January 31 of the following year.
For example, references to fiscal 1996 mean the fiscal year ended February
1, 1997. Fiscal 1995 was a 53- week year.
(2) The provision (benefit) for income taxes for fiscal 1996 reflected the
reversal of a valuation allowance of $21.0 million on a net deferred tax
asset. See Note 9 of the Notes to Financial Statements.
(3) Extraordinary gains during fiscal 1993 and fiscal 1994 represented
forgiveness of debt in connection with a debt restructuring undertaken
with the consent of the Company's creditors.
(4) Net income for fiscal 1993 included a $550,000 charge relating to the
cumulative effect of a change in accounting for inventory capitalization.
(5) Pro forma net income per common share is calculated by dividing net income
by the pro forma weighted average common shares outstanding. The pro forma
weighted average common shares outstanding used in computing pro forma net
income per common share for fiscal 1996 and the first quarter of fiscal
1997 are based on the number of common shares and common share equivalents
outstanding after giving effect to (i) the 1996 Private Placement described
elsewhere in this Prospectus, (ii) the cancellation of the
preferred stock discussed in Note 10 of the Notes to Financial Statements,
(iii) the granting of management options in conjunction with the 1996
Private Placement as discussed in Note 11 of the Notes to Financial
Statements and (iv) the Stock Split and the Series B Conversion described
elsewhere in this Prospectus, as if all such events had occurred on the
first day of fiscal 1996.
(6) The pro forma supplemental net income per common share gives effect to (i)
the elimination of interest expense on the $20 million of Senior
Subordinated Notes to be repaid with a portion of the net proceeds from
this offering and (ii) the issuance of _____________ shares of Common Stock
in this offering, as if all such events had occurred on the first day of
the period indicated. The pro forma weighted average common shares
outstanding used in computing pro forma supplemental net income per common
share are based upon the events described in footnote (5) and the issuance
of shares in this offering.
(7) The Company defines comparable store sales as net sales from stores that
have been open for more than fourteen months and have not been
substantially remodeled during that time.
(8) For purposes of determining comparable store sales increase (decrease),
average net sales per store and average net sales per gross square foot,
fiscal 1995 results were calculated based on a 52-week year.
(9) Represents net sales from stores open throughout the full period divided by
the number of such stores.
(10 Average square footage per store represents the square footage of stores
open on the last day of the period divided by the number of such stores.
(11) Represents net sales from stores open throughout the full period divided
by the gross square footage of such stores.
(12) Adjusted to give effect to the sale of __________________ shares of Common
Stock offered by the Company in this offering at an assumed initial public
offering price of $__________ and the application of the estimated net
proceeds therefrom, as described in "Use of Proceeds."
RISK FACTORS
Before purchasing the shares of Common Stock offered hereby, a
prospective investor should consider the specific factors set forth below as
well as the other information set forth elsewhere in this Prospectus. See
"Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations" and "Business" for a description of other factors affecting the
business of the Company generally.
AGGRESSIVE GROWTH STRATEGY
The Company intends to pursue an aggressive growth strategy over the
next several years. From July 1, 1996 through the end of fiscal 1996, the
Company opened 16 new stores, growing to 108 stores. The Company has opened 22
stores during fiscal 1997 through July 17, 1997 and expects to open
approximately 25 additional stores during the remainder of fiscal 1997 (of which
19 have fully executed leases). The Company anticipates that it will spend a
total of approximately $14.0 million in fiscal 1997 for capital expenditures and
inventory relating to new store openings. The Company currently plans to spend
at least $19.0 million to open at least 60 new stores in fiscal 1998. The
Company reviews its expansion plans on a regular basis, in light of
opportunities that may arise, and may determine to open a larger number of
stores in fiscal 1998 than currently planned.
The Company's future operating results will depend largely upon its
ability to open and operate new stores successfully and to manage a growing
business profitably. This will depend upon a number of factors, including (i)
the availability of suitable store locations, (ii) the ability to negotiate
acceptable lease terms, (iii) the ability to timely complete necessary
construction or remodeling, (iv) the ability to obtain an adequate supply of
finished products, (v) the ability to hire and train qualified managers and
other employees, (vi) the ability to continue to upgrade its management
information and distribution systems, (vii) the ability to manage increased
distribution, including the ability to relocate the Company's distribution
center to a larger facility, (viii) the ability to successfully integrate new
stores into the Company's existing operations, and (ix) the ability to recognize
and respond to regional differences in customer preferences (such as
climate-related preferences).
There can be no assurance that the Company will be able to achieve its
planned expansion on a timely and profitable basis or that it will be able to
achieve results similar to those achieved in existing locations in prior
periods. Operating margins may also be adversely affected during periods in
which expenses have been incurred in anticipation of new store openings. Any
failure to successfully and profitably execute its expansion plans could have a
material adverse effect on the Company.
The Company believes that cash generated from operations and funds
available under the Company's revolving line of credit will be sufficient to
fund its capital requirements at least through fiscal 1998. However, there can
be no assurance that the Company will not be required to seek additional funds
for its capital needs. The inability to secure such funds or to obtain such
funds on acceptable terms could have a material adverse effect on the Company.
See "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations-- Liquidity and Capital Resources" and "Business--Store Expansion
Program."
CHANGES IN COMPARABLE STORE SALES RESULTS FROM PERIOD TO PERIOD
Numerous factors affect comparable store sales results, including
among others, weather conditions, fashion trends, the retail sales environment,
economic conditions and the Company's success in executing its business
strategy. The Company's quarterly comparable store sales results have fluctuated
significantly in the past. The Company does not expect its comparable store
sales to continue to increase at rates similar to those achieved in recent
periods. Moreover, there can be no assurance that comparable store sales for any
particular period will not decrease in the future. Fluctuations in the Company's
comparable store sales results could cause the price of the Common Stock to
fluctuate significantly and could have a material adverse effect on the Company.
See "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations."
MERCHANDISE TRENDS
The Company's continued success will depend in part on its ability to
anticipate and respond to fashion trends and consumer preferences. The Company's
design, manufacturing and distribution process generally requires up to nine
months, during which time fashion trends and consumer preferences may change.
Any failure by the Company to anticipate, identify or respond to future fashion
trends may adversely affect customer acceptance of its products or require
substantial markdowns, which could have a material adverse effect on the
Company. See "Business--Merchandising."
DISRUPTIONS IN RECEIVING AND DISTRIBUTION
All of the Company's merchandise is currently shipped directly from
manufacturers through freight consolidators to the Company's distribution center
in West Caldwell, New Jersey. The Company's operating results depend in large
part on the orderly operation of this receiving and distribution process, which
depends on manufacturers' adherence to shipping schedules and the Company's
effective management of the distribution center. In addition, there can be no
assurance that the Company has anticipated, or will be able to anticipate, all
of the changing demands which its expanding operations will impose on its
receiving and distribution system, nor can there be any assurance that events
beyond the control of the Company, such as a strike or other disruption
affecting the parcel service that delivers substantially all of the Company's
merchandise to its stores, will not result in delays in delivery of merchandise
to stores.
The Company intends to relocate its distribution facility during
fiscal 1998 to accommodate future growth and is in the process of selecting a
suitable site. There can be no assurance that delays, cost overruns or other
complications in the relocation to a new distribution facility will not result
in a significant interruption in the receipt and distribution of merchandise.
Any such event could have a material adverse effect on the Company. See
"Business-- Distribution."
RELIANCE ON INFORMATION SYSTEMS
The Company relies on various information systems to manage its
operations and regularly makes investments to upgrade, enhance or replace such
systems. During fiscal 1998, the Company intends to install a warehouse
management system to facilitate more efficient receiving and distribution of
inventory and intends to replace its current point-of-sale ("POS") software with
an upgraded system. Any delays or difficulties in executing transitions to these
or other new systems, or any other disruptions affecting the Company's
information systems, could have a material adverse effect on the Company. See
"Business--Management Information Systems."
DEPENDENCE ON UNAFFILIATED MANUFACTURERS
The Company does not own or operate any manufacturing facilities and
is therefore dependent upon independent third parties for the manufacture of all
of its products. The Company's products are currently manufactured to its
specifications by more than 50 independent manufacturers located primarily in
Asia, principally in Taiwan, Hong Kong, Turkey, China, Thailand, the Philippines
and Sri Lanka. In fiscal 1996, approximately 38% of the Company's merchandise
was manufactured in Taiwan, 25% in Hong Kong, 8% in Turkey and 7% in China.
Substantially all merchandise that the Company purchases from Hong Kong, China
and the Philippines, representing approximately 35% of the Company's total
purchases in fiscal 1996, is purchased through a single trading company which
acts as the Company's independent agent. Excluding the approximately 20
manufacturers represented by this trading company, the Company's ten largest
manufacturers accounted for 44% of the Company's total purchases during fiscal
1996, with the top four such manufacturers each accounting for between 5% and
8%. The Company has no long-term contracts with its manufacturers and competes
with other companies for manufacturing facilities and import quota capacity.
Although management believes that it has established close relationships with
the Company's principal manufacturers and independent agents, the inability to
maintain such relationships or to find additional sources to cover future growth
could have a material adverse effect on the Company. See "Business-- Sourcing
and Procurement."
RISKS OF USING FOREIGN MANUFACTURERS; POSSIBLE ADVERSE IMPACT OF
UNAFFILIATED MANUFACTURERS' FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ACCEPTABLE LABOR PRACTICES
The Company's business is subject to the risks generally associated
with purchasing products from foreign countries, such as foreign governmental
regulations, political instability (including uncertainty concerning the future
of Hong Kong following the transfer of Hong Kong to China on July 1, 1997),
currency and exchange risks, import quotas, disruptions or delays in shipments
and changes in economic conditions in countries in which the Company's
manufacturing sources are located. The Company cannot predict the effect that
such factors will have on its business arrangements with foreign manufacturing
sources. If any such factors were to render the conduct of business in a
particular country undesirable or impractical, or if the Company's current
foreign manufacturing sources were to cease doing business with the Company for
any reason, the Company's business and operating results could be adversely
affected. The Company's business is also subject to the risks associated with
changes in United States legislation and regulations relating to imported
apparel products, including quotas, duties, taxes and other charges or
restrictions on imported apparel. The Company cannot predict whether such
changes or other charges or restrictions will be imposed upon the importation of
its products in the future, whether China will continue to retain its Most
Favored Nation trading status, or the effect any such event would have on the
Company. See "Business--Sourcing and Procurement."
The Company conducts its business in United States dollars. However,
because the Company purchases substantially all of its products overseas, the
cost of these products may be affected by changes in the value of the relevant
currencies. There can be no assurance that foreign currency fluctuations will
not have a material adverse impact on the Company.
The Company requires its independent manufacturers to operate in
compliance with applicable laws and regulations. While the Company's purchasing
guidelines promote ethical business practices, the Company does not control such
manufacturers or their labor practices. The violation of labor or other laws by
an independent manufacturer of the Company, or the divergence of an independent
manufacturer's labor practices from those generally accepted as ethical in the
United States, could have a material adverse effect on the Company. See
"Business--Sourcing and Procurement."
DEPENDENCE ON KEY PERSONNEL
The leadership of Ezra Dabah, the Company's Chief Executive Officer
and Chairman of the Board, and of Stanley B. Silver, the Company's President and
Chief Operating Officer, has been instrumental in the Company's success. The
loss of the services of either Mr. Dabah or Mr. Silver could have a material
adverse effect on the Company. The Company has entered into employment
agreements with Messrs. Dabah and Silver, but there can be no assurance that the
Company will be able to retain their services. In addition, other members of
management have substantial experience and expertise in the Company's business
and have made significant contributions to its growth and success. The loss of
services of one or more of these individuals, or the inability to attract
additional qualified managers or other personnel as the Company grows, could
have a material adverse effect on the Company. The Company is not protected by
any key-man or similar life insurance for any of its executive officers. See
"Management."
COMPETITION
The children's apparel retail business is highly competitive. The
Company competes in substantially all of its markets with GapKids, BabyGap and
Old Navy (each of which is a division of The Gap, Inc.), The Gymboree
Corporation, Limited Too (a division of The Limited, Inc.), J.C. Penney Company,
Inc., Sears, Roebuck and Co. and other department stores that sell children's
apparel and accessories, as well as certain discount stores such as Wal-Mart
Stores, Inc. and Kids "R" Us (a division of Toys "R" Us, Inc.). The Company also
competes with a wide variety of local and regional specialty stores and with
other national retail chains and catalog companies. One or more of its
competitors are present in substantially all of the malls in which the Company
has stores. Many of the Company's competitors are larger than the Company and
have access to significantly greater financial, marketing and other resources
than the Company. There can be no assurance that the Company will be able to
compete successfully against existing or future competition. See
"Business--Competition."
PROPRIETARY CREDIT CARD
Sales under "The Children's Place" credit card program represented
approximately 15% of the Company's net sales in fiscal 1996. The private label
credit card program is operated by a third party on terms that currently do not
provide for recourse against the Company. In connection with its efforts to
increase the number of cardholders and encourage use of its proprietary credit
card, the Company is considering changing these arrangements to provide for
either full or partial recourse as early as fiscal 1997. Such changes may
subject the Company to losses from unpaid charges and could have a material
adverse effect on the Company. See "Business--Marketing."
FLUCTUATIONS IN QUARTERLY RESULTS AND SEASONALITY
As is the case with many apparel retailers, the Company experiences
seasonal fluctuations in its net sales and net income, with the greater amount
of the Company's net sales and net income typically realized during the third
and fourth quarters of the fiscal year, which include the back-to-school and
holiday seasons. Net sales and net income are generally weakest during the first
two fiscal quarters. The Company has experienced first and second quarter losses
in prior years and expects to experience second quarter losses, and may
experience first quarter losses, in the future.
The Company's quarterly results of operations may also fluctuate
significantly from quarter to quarter as a result of a variety of other factors,
including the timing of new store openings and related pre-opening and other
start-up expenses, net sales contributed by new stores, increases or decreases
in comparable store sales, adverse weather conditions, shifts in timing of
certain holidays, changes in the Company's merchandise mix and overall economic
conditions. Any failure by the Company to meet its business plans for the third
and fourth quarter of any fiscal year would have a material adverse effect on
the Company's earnings, which in all likelihood would not be offset by
satisfactory results achieved in other quarters of the same fiscal year. In
addition, because the Company's expense levels are based in part on expectations
of future sales levels, a shortfall in expected sales could result in a
disproportionate decrease in the Company's net income. See "Management's
Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations--Quarterly Results and Seasonality."
IMPACT OF ECONOMIC, REGIONAL AND OTHER BUSINESS CONDITIONS
The Company's business is sensitive to customers' spending patterns,
which in turn are subject to prevailing regional and national economic
conditions such as interest rates, taxation and consumer confidence. All of the
Company's stores are located in the eastern half of the United States and the
Company anticipates that substantially all stores to be opened in fiscal 1997
and fiscal 1998 will be in states where the Company presently has operations or
in contiguous states. Therefore, the Company is, and will continue to be,
susceptible to changes in regional economic conditions, weather conditions,
demographic and population characteristics, consumer preferences and other
regional factors. The Company is also dependent upon the continued popularity of
malls as shopping destinations and the ability of mall anchor tenants and other
attractions to generate customer traffic in the malls where the Company's stores
are located. Any economic or other conditions decreasing the retail demand for
apparel or the level of mall traffic could have a material adverse effect on the
Company. See "Business--Company Stores."
NET OPERATING LOSS CARRYFORWARDS
The Company reported net operating loss carryforwards ("NOLs") of
$57.3 million on its fiscal 1995 income tax return. The Company expects that
$11.4 million of these NOLs will be utilized to offset taxable income earned by
the Company in its 1996 taxable year, leaving $45.9 million to be utilized in
subsequent taxable years. Because the amount and availability of these NOLs are
subject to review by the Internal Revenue Service, there can be no assurance
that the NOLs would not be reduced or their use limited as the result of an
audit of the Company's tax returns. In addition, future events, including
transactions involving the Company's Common Stock, could affect the Company's
ability to utilize its NOLs. If the amount of these NOLs were reduced or their
availability limited, the Company could be liable for additional taxes with
respect to its 1996 taxable year, and its tax liability could be increased for
its current and subsequent taxable years. See Note 9 of the Notes to Financial
Statements.
CONTROL BY CERTAIN STOCKHOLDERS
After the sale of the shares of Common Stock offered hereby, Ezra
Dabah and certain members of his family will own beneficially 11,860,680 shares
of the Company's Common Stock, constituting approximately _________% of the
outstanding Common Stock. Two funds managed by Saunders Karp & Megrue, L.P.
("SKM"), The SK Equity Fund, L.P. and SK Investment Fund, L.P. (collectively,
the "SK Funds"), together with a former consultant to SKM (collectively with the
SK Funds, the "SKM Investors"), will own approximately 7,659,889 shares or
________% of the outstanding Common Stock (assuming that the underwriters' over-
allotment option is not exercised). Pursuant to a stockholders agreement, the
SKM Investors and all the Company's other current stockholders, who will own in
the aggregate ___% of the outstanding Common Stock after this offering, have
agreed to vote for the election of two nominees of the SKM Investors and three
nominees of Ezra Dabah to the Company's Board of Directors. As a result, the SKM
Investors and Ezra Dabah will be able to control the election of five of the
Company's seven directors. In addition, if the SKM Investors and Mr. Dabah were
to vote together, they would be able to determine the outcome of any matter
submitted to a vote of the Company's stockholders for approval, including the
election of the remaining two directors. See "Security Ownership of Certain
Beneficial Owners and Management" and "Description of Capital Stock--Certain
Certificate of Incorporation Provisions."
POTENTIAL IMPACT OF SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE; REGISTRATION RIGHTS
Sales of substantial amounts of Common Stock in the public market
following this offering could have an adverse effect on the market price of the
Common Stock. Approximately ___________ shares (including the ___________ shares
offered hereby) will become eligible for sale in the public market, subject to
compliance with the volume and manner of sale requirements of Rule 144
promulgated under the Securities Act, upon the expiration of "lock-up"
agreements with the Underwriters not to sell such shares until 180 days after
the date of this Prospectus. Holders of __________ such shares have contractual
rights to have those shares registered with the Securities and Exchange
Commission for resale to the public. In addition, following the effective date
of the Registration Statement, the Company intends to file a registration
statement covering shares of Common Stock issued or reserved for issuance under
the 1996 Stock Option Plan, the Company's 1997 Stock Option Plan and the
Company's 1997 Employee Stock Purchase Plan and, upon filing, any shares
subsequently issued under such plans will be eligible for sale in the
public market, except to the extent restricted by lock-up agreements and subject
to compliance with Rule 144 in the case of affiliates of the Company. See
"Shares Eligible for Future Sale."
LACK OF PRIOR PUBLIC MARKET AND VOLATILITY OF STOCK PRICE
Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for the Common
Stock. Although the Company intends to apply for listing on ______________,
there can be no assurance that an active trading market for the Common Stock
will develop or, if one does develop, that it will be sustained following this
offering or that the market price of the Common Stock will not decline below the
initial public offering price. The initial public offering price will be
determined by negotiations between the Company and the Representatives. For a
description of the factors to be considered in determining the initial public
offering price, see "Underwriting." In addition, the Company believes that
factors such as quarterly fluctuations in its financial results, its comparable
store sales results, trading prices for common stock of other retailers, the
overall economy and the condition of the financial markets could cause the price
of the Common Stock to fluctuate substantially.
DILUTION
Purchasers of Common Stock in this offering will incur immediate and
substantial dilution in net tangible book value per share. See "Dilution."
ANTI-TAKEOVER EFFECT OF CERTAIN PROVISIONS OF THE COMPANY'S CERTIFICATE OF
INCORPORATION AND BYLAWS
Certain provisions of the Company's Amended and Restated Certificate
of Incorporation (the "Certificate of Incorporation") and Amended and Restated
ByLaws (the "ByLaws") may be deemed to have anti-takeover effects and may
discourage, delay or prevent a takeover attempt that a stockholder might
consider in its best interest. These provisions, among other things, (i)
classify the Company's Board of Directors into three classes, each of which will
serve for different three year periods, (ii) provide that only the chairman of
the Board of Directors may call special meetings of the stockholders, (iii)
provide that a director may be removed by stockholders only for cause by a vote
of the holders of more than two-thirds of the shares entitled to vote, (iv)
provide that all vacancies on the Company's Board of Directors, including any
vacancies resulting from an increase in the number of directors, may be filled
by a majority of the remaining directors, even if the number is less than a
quorum, (v) establish certain advance notice procedures for nominations of
candidates for election as directors and for stockholder proposals to be
considered at stockholders' meetings, and (vi) require a vote of the holders of
more than two-thirds of the shares entitled to vote in order to amend the
foregoing provisions and certain other provisions of the Certificate of
Incorporation and ByLaws. In addition, the Board of Directors, without further
action of the stockholders, is permitted to issue and fix the terms of preferred
stock which may have rights senior to those of the Common Stock. Moreover, the
Company is subject to the provisions of Section 203 of the Delaware General
Corporation Law (the "DGCL") which would require a two-thirds vote of
stockholders for any business combination (such as a merger or sale of all or
substantially all of the Company's assets) between the Company and an
"interested stockholder," unless such transaction is approved by a majority of
the disinterested directors or meets certain other requirements. In certain
circumstances, the existence of these provisions which inhibit or discourage
takeover attempts could reduce the market value of the Common Stock. See
"Description of Capital Stock--Certain Certificate of Incorporation and ByLaw
Provisions" and "Delaware Law and Certain Charter Provisions."
COMPANY HISTORY
The Company was founded in 1969 as a children's retailer. In 1989, the
Company was purchased by D.G. Acquisition Corp. ("DG Acquisition"), a company
owned by Ezra Dabah and certain members of his family, from Federated Department
Stores. During fiscal 1990 and 1991, the Company experienced substantial losses
due to, among other things, the legacy of its outmoded merchandising strategy of
selling brands at discount prices and a poor real estate portfolio, including
many stores in need of remodeling. Consequently, in 1991, Mr. Dabah, who was
serving as Chairman of the Board of Directors, assumed the position of Chief
Executive Officer and became involved in the Company's day-to-day operations.
Mr. Dabah also recruited Stanley B. Silver, a seasoned retail executive, as
Chief Operating Officer.
Under the leadership of Messrs. Dabah and Silver, the Company's
management team recognized that a strategy of selling branded merchandise at
discount prices was not sustainable given the high occupancy costs associated
with the Company's large, mall-based locations. Accordingly, the Company
repositioned its merchandise strategy to one in which it would design, contract
to manufacture and sell its own line of private label apparel and accessories
under "The Children's Place" brand name at everyday value prices. At the same
time, the new management team took steps to stabilize the Company's operations
by closing approximately half of the Company's 170 stores and focusing the
Company's operations in the eastern half of the United States. The Company also
developed a new store prototype that reflected a reduction in average store size
from 5,500 square feet to 3,500 square feet. In addition, in July 1992,
management commenced negotiations with the Company's creditors, which resulted
in a consensual restructuring of the Company's indebtedness by the end of 1993.
By 1993, the Company had fully implemented its merchandising strategy
and was exclusively selling its internally designed apparel and accessories
under "The Children's Place" brand name at everyday value prices. As a result of
the Company's successful implementation of its new merchandising strategy and
its restructured real estate portfolio, the Company generated net income in
fiscal 1993 and improved its operational performance in each succeeding year as
it continued to refine its merchandising and operating strategies. However, debt
repayment obligations prevented the Company from investing capital into the
expansion of its store base. Accordingly, in late fiscal 1995, the Company began
to look for new financing.
In July 1996, the Company consummated private placement transactions
with the SKM Investors and Nomura Holding America Inc. (the "Noteholder") (such
transactions, collectively, the "1996 Private Placement"), which resulted in net
proceeds to the Company of $37.4 million. These proceeds enabled the Company to
repay a substantial portion of its outstanding indebtedness, redeem certain
outstanding shares of Common Stock and begin to implement an aggressive program
of opening new stores. From July 1, 1996 to July 17, 1997, the Company has
increased the number of its stores from 93 to 130. For a full description of the
1996 Private Placement, see "Certain Relationships and Related Transactions."
USE OF PROCEEDS
The net proceeds to be received by the Company from the sale of the
shares of Common Stock offered hereby, after deducting the estimated
underwriting discount and estimated expenses of the offering, are estimated to
be $____ million, assuming an offering price of $_____ per share (the midpoint
of the range shown on the cover page of this Prospectus). Of such net proceeds,
the Company will use $20.5 million to pay the principal amount of, and accrued
interest on, the Company's 12% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2002 (the "Senior
Subordinated Notes") held by the Noteholder. In addition, the Company will use
$_____ million of the net proceeds from the offering to repurchase a warrant
(the "Noteholder Warrant") held by the Noteholder and two-thirds of a warrant
(the "Legg Mason Warrant") held by Legg Mason Wood Walker, Incorporated ("Legg
Mason"). The amount to be used to repurchase the Noteholder Warrant and such
portion of the Legg Mason Warrant will be adjusted proportionately with any
change in the initial public offering price from $_____ per share. The balance
of the net proceeds will be used (i) to reduce borrowings outstanding under the
Company's senior revolving credit facility (the "Foothill Credit Facility") with
Foothill Capital Corporation ("Foothill Capital") and (ii) for working capital
and general corporate purposes. Pending such uses, the Company intends to invest
the net proceeds of this offering in investment-grade, interest-bearing
securities. See "Certain Relationships and Related Transactions" and
"Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations-Liquidity and Capital Resources."
In the event that the underwriters' over-allotment option is
exercised, the Company will not receive any proceeds from the sale of shares
pursuant to such option.
DIVIDEND POLICY
The Company has never paid dividends on its Common Stock and does not
anticipate paying dividends on its Common Stock in the foreseeable future. It is
the present intention of the Company's Board of Directors to retain any future
earnings of the Company to finance its operations and the expansion of its
business. The Foothill Credit Facility prohibits any payment of dividends. Any
determination in the future to pay dividends will depend upon the Company's
earnings, financial condition, cash requirements, future prospects, covenants in
the Company's credit facility and any future debt instruments and such other
factors as the Board of Directors deems appropriate at the time.
CAPITALIZATION
The following table sets forth the capitalization of the Company as of
May 3, 1997 (i) as adjusted to give pro forma effect to the Stock Split and to
the Series B Conversion and (ii) as further adjusted to give effect to the sale
of the __________ shares of Common Stock offered by the Company hereby at an
assumed initial public offering price of $_____ per share and the application of
the estimated net proceeds therefrom as described under "Use of Proceeds." The
table should be read in conjunction with the historical financial statements of
the Company and the notes thereto and the other financial information appearing
elsewhere in this Prospectus.
AS OF MAY 3, 1997
PRO FORMA AS ADJUSTED
(DOLLARS IN THOUSANDS)
Senior Subordinated Notes................... $20,000 $_____
Less: Unamortized discount.............. ($ 1,640)(1) $_____
Other Long-term debt and capital lease
obligations (less current portion)........ $ 628(2) $_____
Total Long-term debt and capital
lease obligations (less current portion)... $18,988 $_____
Stockholders' equity:
Preferred Stock, $1.00 par value:
Shares authorized - 1,000,000
Shares outstanding - none
Common Stock, $.10 par value:
Shares authorized - 100,000,000
Shares outstanding - pro forma
20,420,689(3); as adjusted _______.......... 2,042 ______
Additional paid-in capital................ 57,081 ______
Accumulated deficit(4).................... (30,814) (______)
----------- -----------
Total stockholders' equity............. 28,309 ______
----------- -----------
Total capitalization................... $47,297 $______
=========== ===========
(1) The unamortized discount on the Senior Subordinated Notes is attributable
to the issuance of the Noteholder Warrant.
(2) Includes $600,000 of long-term debt repaid on May 28, 1997. See "Certain
Relationships and Related Transactions- Certain Indebtedness."
(3) Does not include 2,739,348 shares issuable upon exercise of the Noteholder
Warrant and the Legg Mason Warrant or shares issuable upon exercise of
stock options outstanding on May 3, 1997.
(4) The as adjusted retained earnings (deficit) amount reflects the effect of
an extraordinary item representing the write-off of unamortized debt
issuance costs and unamortized debt discount, net of taxes, as a result of
the repayment of the Senior Subordinated Notes in connection with this
offering. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition
and Results of Operations."
DILUTION
As of May 3, 1997, the Company's net tangible book value was $26.8
million, or $1.31 per share of Common Stock (adjusted to give pro forma effect
to the Stock Split and to the Series B Conversion). Dilution represents the
difference between the amount per share of Common Stock paid by investors in
this offering, and the net tangible book value per share of Common Stock after
this offering. After giving effect to the sale by the Company of ___________
shares of Common Stock in this offering at an assumed initial public offering
price of $_____ per share and the use of proceeds therefrom as described in "Use
of Proceeds", the pro forma net tangible book value of the Company at May 3,
1997 would have been $____ million, or $____ per share of Common Stock. This
represents an immediate increase in net tangible book value of $___ per share of
Common Stock to the Company's existing stockholders, and an immediate dilution
of $_____ per share of Common Stock to investors purchasing in this offering.
This per share dilution is illustrated in the following table:
Assumed initial public offering price........... $_______
Pro forma net tangible book value before this
offering........................................ $ 1.31
Increase in pro forma net tangible book value
attributable to this offering(1)................ $ ____
Pro forma net tangible book value after this
offering........................................ $ ______
Dilution to investors purchasing in this offering.. $ ______
- ----------
(1) Reflects the receipt of the net proceeds from the sale of ___________
shares of Common Stock in this offering and the use of $______________
million of such net proceeds to repurchase the Noteholder Warrant and
two-thirds of the Legg Mason Warrant.
The following table summarizes, as of May 3, 1997, the differences
between the existing stockholders and the investors purchasing in this offering
(adjusted to give pro forma effect to the Stock Split and to the Series B
Conversion), with respect to the number of shares of Common Stock purchased, the
total consideration paid and the average price per share of Common Stock paid.
The determination of the total consideration and average price per share paid by
existing stockholders has been based upon the consideration paid by stockholders
to acquire the Company and subsequent contributions to the capital of the
Company, net of amounts paid to redeem shares.
AVERAGE
SHARES PURCHASED TOTAL CONSIDERATION PRICE PER
NUMBER PERCENT AMOUNT PERCENT SHARE
Existing stockholders........... 20,420,689 ____% $59,242,000 ____% $ 2.90
New investors.................. _________ ____% $_________ ____% $ ____
=========== ====== ============= ====== ==========
Total...................... _________ 100.0% $_________ 100.0% $ _____
=========== ====== ============= ====== ==========
The foregoing tables assume no exercise of outstanding stock options
after May 3, 1997. At May 3, 1997, 1,444,080 shares of Common Stock were subject
to outstanding options, at a weighted average exercise price of $2.68 per share,
of which options for 288,816 shares were exercisable. To the extent any such
stock options are exercised, there will be further dilution to new investors.
See "Management--Stock Option and Other Plans for Employees--Stock Option
Plans."
SELECTED HISTORICAL AND PRO FORMA FINANCIAL AND OPERATING DATA
The following table sets forth certain historical and pro forma
financial and operating data for the Company. The selected historical financial
data for the Company is qualified by reference to, and should be read in
conjunction with, "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition
and Results of Operations," the financial statements and notes thereto and other
financial information appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus. The statement of
operations data set forth below for fiscal 1994, 1995 and 1996, and the balance
sheet data as of February 3, 1996 and February 1, 1997, have been derived from
the Company's historical financial statements, which statements have been
audited by Arthur Andersen LLP, independent public accountants ("Arthur
Andersen"), as indicated in their report included elsewhere herein. The
statement of operations data set forth below for fiscal 1993, and the balance
sheet data as of January 29, 1994 and January 28, 1995, have been derived from
the Company's historical financial statements audited and reported on by Arthur
Andersen, which are not included in this Prospectus. The historical financial
data for fiscal 1992 have been derived from the Company's historical financial
statements audited by another independent public accounting firm, which are not
included in this Prospectus. The historical information for the three months
ended May 4, 1996 and May 3, 1997, and as of May 3, 1997, has been derived from
the unaudited financial statements of the Company and reflects, in the opinion
of management, all adjustments (consisting only of normal recurring adjustments)
necessary to present fairly the financial position as of, and the results for,
such interim periods. The results of operations for the three months ended May
3, 1997 are not necessarily indicative of results to be expected for the full
fiscal year.
Fiscal Year Ended(1) Three Months Ended
----------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------
January 30, January 29, January 28, February 3, February 1, May 4, May 3,
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1996 1997
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----- ----
Statement of Operations Data: (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
Net sales............................... $114,126 $96,649 $107,953 $122,060 $143,838 $30,438 $39,203
Gross profit............................ 28,764 28,874 33,724 38,626 54,052 10,238 14,018
Selling, general and administrative
expenses............................. 28,051 24,395 27,392 30,407 35,768 7,683 9,695
Pre-opening costs....................... 41 79 178 311 982 75 472
Depreciation and amortization.......... 3,664 3,275 3,344 3,496 4,017 912 1,233
------------- -------------- -------------- ------------ --------- ------------ -----
Operating income (loss)(2) (15,670) 1,125 2,810 4,412 13,285 1,568 2,618
Interest expense, net................... 2,562 1,150 1,303 1,925 2,884 518 828
Other (income) expense, net............. 0 (239) 481 797 879 403 100
------------- -------------- -------------- ------------ ---------- ------------ ------
Income (loss) before income taxes,
extraordinary items and cumulative effect
of accounting change ................ (18,232) 214 1,026 1,690 9,522 647 1,690
Provision (benefit) for income taxes(3). 0 53 54 36 (20,919) 10 679
-------- ------- ------- ------- -------- ------ -----
Income (loss) before extraordinary items. (18,232) 161 972 1,654 30,441 637 1,011
Extraordinary gains(4).................. 0 15,169 490 0 0 0 0
---------- -------- ------- -------- -------- ------- -----
Net income (loss)(5).................... (18,232) 14,780 1,462 1,654 30,441 637 1,011
============= ============== ============== ========== ============= =========== ======
Pro forma net income per common share... 1.27 $0.04
Pro forma weighted average common =========== ==========
shares outstanding(6)............... 23,903,392 23,903,392
Pro forma supplemental net income per
common share (7)...................
Fiscal Year Ended Three Months Ended
----------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------
January 30, January 29, January 28, February 3, February 1, May 4, May 3,
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1996 1997
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
SELECTED OPERATING DATA:
Number of stores open at end of period......... 87 87 87 91 108 93 119
Comparable store sales increase (decrease) (8)(9) 9.8% (2.7%) 13.0% 10.0% 8.6% 9.8% 5.0%
Average net sales per store
(in thousands) (9)(10)............ $1,123 $1,124 $1,264 $1,362 $1,479 $331 $343
Average square footage per store (11).......... 5,049 4,954 4,786 4,528 4,284 4,496 4,232
Average net sales per gross square foot (9)(12) $220 $226 $259 $292 $335 $73 $80
At
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
January 30, January 29, January 28, February 3, February 1, May 3,
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1997
(Dollars in thousands)
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Working capital (deficit)................... ($52,540) ($11,621) ($10,398) ($17,630) $11,951 $10,250
Total assets................................ 31,107 26,600 26,556 32,073 64,479 65,934
Long-term debt.............................. 66,311 23,719 21,626 15,735 20,504 20,248
Stockholders' equity (deficit).............. (52,061) (15,338) (13,388) (11,735) 27,298 28,309
- -----------------------
(1) All references to the Company's fiscal years refer to the 52- or 53-week
year ended on the Saturday nearest to January 31 of the following year. For
example, references to fiscal 1996 mean the fiscal year ended February 1,
1997. Fiscal 1995 was a 53-week year.
(2) The operating income (loss) for fiscal 1992 included a reorganization and
restructuring charge of $12.7 million related to a strategic operational
restructuring plan to close 93 stores, reduce other stores' square footage
and reduce other administrative overhead costs.
(3) The provision (benefit) for income taxes for fiscal 1996 reflected the
reversal of a valuation allowance of $21.0 million on a net deferred tax
asset. See Note 9 of the Notes to Financial Statements.
(4) Extraordinary gains during fiscal 1993 and fiscal 1994 represented
forgiveness of debt in connection with a debt restructuring undertaken with
the consent of the Company's creditors.
(5) Net income for fiscal 1993 included a $550,000 charge related to the
cumulative effect of a change in accounting for inventory capitalization.
(6) Pro forma net income per common share is calculated by dividing net income
by the pro forma weighted average common shares outstanding. The pro forma
weighted average common shares outstanding used in computing pro forma net
income per share for fiscal 1996 and the first quarter of fiscal 1997 are
based on the number of common shares and common share equivalents
outstanding after giving effect to the (i) 1996 Private Placement described
elsewhere in this Prospectus, (ii) the cancellation of the preferred stock
discussed in Note 10 of the Notes to Financial Statements, (iii) the
granting of management options in conjunction with the 1996 Private
Placement as discussed in Note 11 of the Notes to Financial Statements and
(iv) the Stock Split and the Series B Conversion described elsewhere in
this Prospectus, as if all such events had occurred on the first day of
fiscal 1996.
(7) The pro forma supplemental net income per share gives effect to (i) the
elimination of interest expense on $20 million of the Senior Subordinated
Notes assumed to have been repaid with a portion of the net proceeds from
this offering and (ii) the issuance of ______________ shares of Common
Stock in this offering, as if all such events had occurred on the first day
of the period indicated. The pro forma weighted average common shares
outstanding used in computing pro forma supplemental net income per common
share are based upon the events described in footnote (6) and the issuance
of shares in this offering.
(8) The Company defines comparable store sales as net sales from stores that
have been open for more than fourteen months and have not been
substantially remodeled during that time.
(9) For purposes of determining comparable store sales increase (decrease),
average net sales per store and average net sales per gross square foot,
fiscal 1995 results were calculated based on a 52-week year.
(10) Represents net sales from stores open throughout the full period divided by
the number of such stores.
(11) Average square footage per store represents the square footage of stores
open on the last day of the period divided by the number of such stores.
(12) Represents net sales from stores open throughout the full period divided by
the gross square footage of such stores.
MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
This Prospectus contains forward-looking statements that involve risks
and uncertainties. The Company's actual results could differ materially from
those projected in such forward-looking statements. Factors that could cause or
contribute to such differences include, but are not limited to, those discussed
in this section, as well as those discussed in "Risk Factors" and elsewhere in
this Prospectus. The Company undertakes no obligation to publicly update or
revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information,
future events or otherwise. The following discussion of the Company's historical
financial condition and results of operations should be read in conjunction with
the historical financial statements and the notes thereto and the other
financial information appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus.
The Company's fiscal year ends on the Saturday closest to January 31
of the following year. The results for fiscal 1994, 1995, and 1996 represent the
52-week period ended January 28, 1995, the 53-week period ended February 3, 1996
and the 52-week period ended February 1, 1997, respectively.
GENERAL
The Company is a leading specialty retailer of children's apparel and
accessories. As of July 17, 1997, the Company operated 130 stores primarily in
regional shopping malls in the eastern half of the United States. In July 1996,
following the 1996 Private Placement, the Company began to implement an
aggressive growth strategy designed to capitalize on its business strengths and
its strong store economics. From July 1, 1996 through the end of fiscal 1996,
the Company opened a total of 16 stores, growing to 108 stores. During fiscal
1997 through July 17, 1997, the Company has opened 22 stores. The Company
intends to continue its expansion program and currently plans to open
approximately 25 additional stores during the remainder of fiscal 1997 and at
least 60 stores in fiscal 1998.
As a result of increases in comparable store sales and the opening of
new stores, the Company's net sales increased from $108.0 million in fiscal 1994
to $143.8 million in fiscal 1996 and operating income increased from $2.8
million to $13.3 million over the same period. During the past 12 months, the
Company has concentrated on building the infrastructure necessary to manage its
growth strategy, including the opening and remodeling of stores. During fiscal
1996 and the first quarter of fiscal 1997, the Company hired additional
management personnel in the areas of store operations, real estate, store
construction and finance. In fiscal 1998, the Company intends to relocate its
distribution center to a larger facility and to install a warehouse management
system to accommodate the Company's continued growth.
The Company has achieved comparable store sales increases on an annual
basis in each year following fiscal 1993. The Company defines its comparable
store sales as net sales from stores that have been open for more than fourteen
full months and that have not been substantially remodeled during that time. The
Company reported comparable store sales growth over prior years of 13.0%, 10.0%
and 8.6% during fiscal 1994, fiscal 1995 and fiscal 1996, respectively, and 5.0%
in the first quarter of fiscal 1997. The Company believes that these increases
were primarily the result of a successful merchandising and operational
repositioning of the Company, including the restructuring of its real estate
portfolio. The Company does not expect comparable store sales to continue to
increase at rates similar to those that it has experienced in recent years.
The Company incurs significant store pre-opening costs, consisting
primarily of payroll, supply and advertising expenses. The Company's policy is
to expense these pre-opening costs as incurred.
The Company anticipates repaying the $20.0 million principal amount of
the Senior Subordinated Notes, together with accrued interest, out of the net
proceeds of its initial public offering. Consequently, the Company expects to
incur a non-cash, extraordinary charge to earnings during the third quarter of
fiscal 1997 of approximately $2.3 million, resulting from the write-off of
unamortized debt issuance costs and unamortized debt discount, net of taxes.
This charge will negatively impact the Company's third quarter fiscal 1997
results of operations.
During fiscal 1996 and the preceding fiscal years, the Company paid
federal income taxes based on the Alternative Minimum Tax ("AMT") at an
effective tax rate of 2% and minimum taxes in most states due to its utilization
of its NOL carryforwards. At the end of fiscal 1996, management determined,
based on the Company's results of operations and projected future results, that
it was likely that the NOL carryforwards could be utilized in subsequent years
to offset tax liabilities. As a result of this determination, the Company
reversed a valuation allowance on the Company's deferred tax asset on its
balance sheet. Accordingly, the Company's net income for fiscal 1997 and future
years will require calculation of a tax provision based on statutory rates in
effect. Until the NOL is fully utilized or expires, this tax provision will not
be paid in cash (other than to the extent of the federal AMT and state minimum
taxes) but will reduce the deferred tax asset on the balance sheet.
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, selected
statement of operations data expressed as a percentage of net sales:
Fiscal Year Ended Three Months Ended
----------------------------------------- -----------------------
January 28, February 3, February 1, May 4, May 3,
1995 1996 1997 1996 1997
---------- ----------- ---------- ------- -------
Net sales......................................... 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
Cost of sales..................................... 68.8 68.4 62.4 66.4 64.3
------- ------ ------ ------ --------
Gross profit ..................................... 31.2 31.6 37.6 33.6 35.7
Selling, general and administrative expenses...... 25.3 24.9 24.9 25.2 24.7
Pre-opening costs................................. 0.2 0.3 0.7 0.3 1.2
Depreciation and amortization..................... 3.1 2.8 2.8 3.0 3.1
------- ------ ------ ------- -------
Operating income................................. 2.6 3.6 9.2 5.1 6.7
Interest expense, net............................. 1.2 1.6 2.0 1.7 2.1
Other expense, net............................... 0.5 0.6 0.6 1.3 0.3
------- ------ ------ ------- -------
Income before income taxes and extraordinary item 0.9 1.4 6.6 2.1 4.3
Income tax provision (benefit).................... -- -- (14.5) -- 1.7
Extraordinary gain................................ 0.5 -- -- -- --
------- ------ ------- ------- -------
Net income........................................ 1.4% 1.4% 21.1% 2.1% 2.6%
======= ====== ======= ======= =======
THREE MONTHS ENDED MAY 3, 1997 COMPARED TO THREE MONTHS ENDED MAY 4, 1996
Net sales increased by $8.8 million, or 28.9%, to $39.2 million during
the first quarter of fiscal 1997 from $30.4 million during the first quarter of
fiscal 1996. Net sales for the 11 new stores opened during the first quarter of
fiscal 1997 and the 18 new stores opened during fiscal 1996 not yet qualifying
as comparable stores contributed $7.4 million of the increase in net sales.
During the first quarter of fiscal 1997, comparable store sales increased 5.0%
and contributed $1.4 million of the increase in net sales. The first quarter of
fiscal 1997 was being compared to a strong first quarter of fiscal 1996, in
which comparable store sales increased 9.8%. The fiscal 1997 increase in
comparable store sales was attributable in part to strength in the Company's big
girls, legwear and newborn departments.
Gross profit increased by $3.8 million to $14.0 million during the
first quarter of fiscal 1997 from $10.2 million during the first quarter of
fiscal 1996. As a percentage of net sales, gross profit increased to 35.7% in
the first quarter of fiscal 1997 from 33.6% in the first quarter of fiscal 1996.
The increase in gross profit as a percentage of net sales was principally due to
the leveraging of the buying, distribution and occupancy expenses over a larger
store base and increased sales volume. In addition, the Company improved its
initial markup by 0.8% due to sourcing efficiencies.
Selling, general and administrative expenses increased by $2.0 million
to $9.7 million during the first quarter of fiscal 1997 from $7.7 million during
the first quarter of fiscal 1996, but decreased as a percentage of net sales to
24.7% in the first quarter of fiscal 1997 from 25.2% in the first quarter of
fiscal 1996. The decrease as a percentage of net sales was primarily due to a
reduction in store payroll expense as a percentage of net sales and higher
average store sales levels, partially offset by the Company's increased
investment in its corporate infrastructure to support its planned new store
expansion program.
During the first quarter of fiscal 1997, pre-opening costs were
$0.5 million as compared to $0.1 million during the first quarter of fiscal
1996, reflecting the opening of 11 new stores in the first quarter of fiscal
1997 as compared to two new stores during the first quarter of fiscal 1996.
Depreciation and amortization amounted to $1.2 million in the
first quarter of fiscal 1997 as compared to $0.9 million in the comparable prior
year period. The increase in depreciation and amortization primarily
relates to the increase in the number of stores.
Interest expense, net, for the first quarter of fiscal 1997 was $0.8
million, or 2.1% of net sales, as compared to $0.5 million, or 1.7% of net
sales, in the comparable prior year period. The increase in interest expense was
primarily due to interest on the Senior Subordinated Notes, which were not
outstanding during the prior year period.
Other expense, net, for the first quarter of fiscal 1997 amounted to
$0.1 million, or 0.3% of net sales, as compared to $0.4 million, or 1.3% of net
sales, in the comparable quarter of the prior year. During the first quarter of
fiscal 1997, other expenses were primarily comprised of an anniversary fee on
the Foothill Credit Facility. During the first quarter of fiscal 1996, other
expenses were primarily comprised of anniversary and credit agreement amendment
fees relating to the Foothill Credit Facility.
Income before income taxes and extraordinary items increased by $1.0
million to $1.7 million during the first quarter of fiscal 1997 from $0.6
million during the first quarter of fiscal 1996. As a percentage of net sales,
income before income taxes increased to 4.3% during the first quarter of fiscal
1997 from 2.1% during the first quarter of fiscal 1996 due to the factors
discussed above.
During the first quarter of fiscal 1997, the Company recorded a tax
provision for federal, state and local taxes of $0.7 million, or 1.7% of net
sales, which reflected an effective tax rate of approximately 40.0%. During the
first quarter of fiscal 1996, the Company recorded a tax provision for state
minimum taxes and the federal AMT. No other federal tax provision was recorded
in the first quarter of fiscal 1996 due to the Company's NOL.
The Company had net income of $1.0 million and $0.6 million for the
first quarter of fiscal 1997 and the first quarter of fiscal 1996, respectively.
YEAR ENDED FEBRUARY 1, 1997 COMPARED TO YEAR ENDED FEBRUARY 3, 1996
Net sales increased by $21.8 million, or 17.8%, to $143.8 million
during fiscal 1996 from $122.1 million in fiscal 1995. Net sales for the 18 new
stores opened and the five stores remodeled during fiscal 1996, and for those
stores opened or remodeled during fiscal 1995 not yet qualifying as comparable
stores, contributed $17.9 million of the increase in net sales. Comparable store
sales, restated to reflect a comparable 52-week period, increased by 8.6% and
contributed approximately $8.6 million of the increase in net sales. Comparable
store sales increased by 10.0% in fiscal 1995. The increase in comparable store
sales reflected the strength of the Company's newborn, underwear and accessory
departments. The above increases were offset by the closure of five stores
during fiscal 1995 and one store during fiscal 1996, which in the aggregate
generated a net sales decrease of $3.5 million in fiscal 1996 as compared to
fiscal 1995. In addition, fiscal 1995 was a 53-week year, and that extra week
contributed $1.2 million to fiscal 1995 net sales.
Gross profit increased by $15.4 million to $54.1 million during fiscal
1996 from $38.6 million during fiscal 1995. As a percentage of net sales, gross
profit increased to 37.6% during fiscal 1996 from 31.6% during fiscal 1995.
Merchandise margins improved 4.9% from the previous year primarily due to higher
initial markups and a reduction in the markdown rate. In addition, the Company's
buying, distribution and occupancy expenses decreased as a percentage of net
sales due to the increased store base and sales volume.
Selling, general and administrative expenses increased by $5.4 million
to $35.8 million during fiscal 1996 from $30.4 million during fiscal 1995, but
remained constant at 24.9% of net sales in both fiscal years. The $5.4 million
increase was primarily due to the operation of an increased number of stores. In
addition, there were increased management incentive bonuses, advertising costs
and expenses related to the expansion of the real estate and store construction
functions to support the Company's growth strategy. However, as a result of the
increased store base and sales volume, these additional expenses did not
increase selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net
sales.
During fiscal 1996, pre-opening costs were $1.0 million, or 0.7% of
net sales, as compared to $0.3 million, or 0.3% of net sales, during fiscal
1995. The increase in pre-opening costs reflects the opening of 18 stores in
fiscal 1996 as compared to 9 stores in fiscal 1995.
Depreciation and amortization amounted to $4.0 million in fiscal
1996, or 2.8% of net sales, as compared to $3.5 million, or 2.8% of net sales,
in fiscal 1995. The increase in depreciation and amortization was primarily due
to new stores.
Interest expense, net, for fiscal 1996 totaled $2.9 million, or 2.0%
of net sales, as compared to $1.9 million, or 1.6% of net sales, in the prior
year. The increase in interest expense in fiscal 1996 was due primarily to
interest on the Senior Subordinated Notes issued during fiscal 1996, partially
offset by reduced borrowings under the Foothill Credit Facility and the
elimination of interest expense on various loans repaid by the Company with
proceeds from the 1996 Private Placement.
Other expense, net, for fiscal 1996 amounted to $0.9 million, or 0.6%
of net sales, as compared to $0.8 million, or 0.6% of net sales, in fiscal 1995.
During fiscal 1996, other expenses were comprised primarily of $0.4 million to
reserve for costs to close a non-performing store and $0.4 million in
anniversary and credit agreement amendment fees related to the Foothill Credit
Facility. During fiscal 1995, other expenses were comprised primarily of $0.4
million in fees and related legal and professional costs associated with the
Foothill Credit Facility and $0.4 million for professional, legal and settlement
costs related to the Company's restructuring. Income before income taxes and
extraordinary items increased by $7.8 million to $9.5 million during fiscal 1996
from $1.7 million during fiscal 1995 and increased to 6.6% of net sales in
fiscal 1996 from 1.4% of net sales in fiscal 1995 due to the factors discussed
above.
During fiscal 1996, the Company recorded an income tax benefit of
$20.9 million. This income tax benefit primarily resulted from the reversal of a
valuation allowance of $21.0 million on a net deferred tax asset, based on the
Company's results of operations in fiscal 1996 and projected future results. For
fiscal 1995, the Company recorded a tax provision for state minimum taxes and
the federal AMT. No other federal tax provision was recorded by the Company in
fiscal 1995 due to its NOL.
The Company had net income of $30.4 million and $1.7 million for
fiscal 1996 and fiscal 1995, respectively.
YEAR ENDED FEBRUARY 3, 1996 COMPARED TO YEAR ENDED JANUARY 28, 1995
Net sales increased by $14.1 million, or 13.1%, to $122.1 million
during fiscal 1995 from $108.0 million in fiscal 1994. Net sales for the nine
new stores opened and the 12 stores remodeled during fiscal 1995, and for those
stores opened or remodeled during fiscal 1994 not yet qualifying as comparable
stores, contributed $9.0 million of the increase in net sales. Comparable store
sales during fiscal 1995 increased by 10.0% and contributed $8.3 million of the
increase in net sales. Comparable store sales had increased by 13.0% in fiscal
1994. The fiscal 1995 increase in comparable store sales reflected the strength
of the Company's newborn and baby boy and big girl departments along with the
expansion of the underwear/legwear departments. The above increases were offset
by the closing of five stores during fiscal 1995 and six stores during fiscal
1994, which in the aggregate generated a net sales decrease of $4.8 million in
fiscal 1995 as compared to fiscal 1994. In addition, fiscal 1995 was a 53-week
year, with the extra week contributing $1.6 million to fiscal 1995 net sales.
Gross profit increased by $4.9 million to $38.6 million during fiscal
1995 from $33.7 million during fiscal 1994. As a percentage of net sales, gross
profit increased to 31.6% during fiscal 1995 from 31.2% in fiscal 1994. The
increase as a percentage of net sales during fiscal 1995 was attributable to
increased leverage of store occupancy costs resulting from the higher sales
volume and a higher initial markup, partially offset by a higher markdown rate
and increased merchandise design expenses.
Selling, general and administrative expenses increased by $3.0 million
to $30.4 million during fiscal 1995 from $27.4 million during fiscal 1994, but
decreased as a percentage of net sales to 24.9% in fiscal 1995 from 25.3% in
fiscal 1994. The increase in selling, general and administrative expenses was
primarily due to the increased number of stores in operation and the
introduction of the Company's proprietary credit card program. The decrease in
selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net sales was
primarily the result of improved store payroll productivity and a reduction in
corporate overhead expenses as a percentage of net sales due to the Company's
larger store base and increased sales volume.
During fiscal 1995, pre-opening costs were $0.3 million, or 0.3% of
net sales, as compared to $0.2 million, or 0.2% of net sales, in fiscal 1994,
reflecting the opening of nine stores in fiscal 1995 as compared to six stores
in fiscal 1994.
Depreciation and amortization amounted to $3.5 million in fiscal 1995,
or 2.8% of net sales, as compared to $3.3 million, or 3.1% of net sales, in
fiscal 1994. The increase in depreciation and amortization was primarily due to
new and remodeled stores.
Interest expense, net, for fiscal 1995 was $1.9 million, or 1.6% of
net sales, as compared to $1.3 million, or 1.2% of net sales, in fiscal 1994.
The increase in fiscal 1995 interest expense was due primarily to interest on
borrowings under the Foothill Credit Facility.
Other expense, net, for fiscal 1995 amounted to $0.8 million, or 0.6%
of net sales, as compared to $0.5 million, or 0.5% of net sales, in fiscal 1994.
During fiscal 1995, other expenses were comprised primarily of $0.4 million in
fees and related legal and professional costs associated with the Foothill
Credit Facility and $0.4 million for professional, legal and settlement costs
related to the Company's restructuring. During fiscal 1994, other expenses
primarily comprised professional, legal and settlement costs related to the
Company's restructuring.
Income before income taxes and extraordinary items increased by $0.7
million to $1.7 million during fiscal 1995 from $1.0 million during fiscal 1994
and increased to 1.4% of net sales in fiscal 1995 from 0.9% of net sales in
fiscal 1994 due to the factors discussed above.
The Company's recorded income tax provision for fiscal 1995 and fiscal
1994 represented a provision for state minimum taxes and the federal AMT. No
other federal tax provision was recorded due to the use of the Company's NOL.
In fiscal 1994, the Company recorded an extraordinary gain of $0.5
million relating to the forgiveness of debt.
The Company had net income of $1.7 million and $1.5 million for fiscal
1995 and fiscal 1994, respectively.
LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES
During its three most recent fiscal years and the first quarter of
fiscal 1997, the Company's primary uses of cash have been to finance new store
openings, purchase inventory, provide for working capital and make required
principal and interest payments on its debt. Until the 1996 Private Placement,
the Company met its cash requirements through cash flow from operations, the
sale of equity securities and borrowings under its lines of credit. Since the
1996 Private Placement, the Company has been able to meet its cash needs,
including those associated with the opening of new stores, principally by using
cash flow from operations and, to a lesser extent, borrowings under the Foothill
Credit Facility.
Cash flows provided by operating activities were $1.3 million, $7.7
million and $7.8 million in fiscal 1994, 1995 and 1996, respectively, and $1.1
million and $1.4 million in the first quarter of fiscal 1996 and 1997,
respectively. The increase in cash flows from operating activities in fiscal
1995 was primarily the result of an increase in accounts payable. In fiscal
1996, cash flows from operating activities increased primarily as a result of an
increase in net income, partially offset by a decrease in payables and an
increase in other assets relating to deferred financing costs associated with
the Senior Subordinated Notes. The increase in cash flows from operating
activities during the first quarter of fiscal 1997 was due primarily to an
increase in net income.
Cash flows used in investing activities were $2.7 million, $6.9
million and $8.5 million in fiscal 1994, 1995, and 1996, respectively, and $0.9
million and $4.3 million in the first quarter of fiscal 1996 and 1997,
respectively. Cash flows used in investing activities relate primarily to store
openings and remodelings and computer equipment for the Company's executive
offices. In fiscal 1994, 1995 and 1996, the Company opened 6, 9 and 18 stores
while remodeling 3, 12 and 5 stores, respectively. In the first quarter of
fiscal 1996 and 1997, the Company opened 2 and 11 stores while remodeling 1 and
3 stores, respectively.
Cash flows provided by (used in) financing activities were $1.2
million, ($0.5) million and $3.5 million in fiscal 1994, 1995, and 1996,
respectively, and ($0.1) million and $0.3 million in the first quarter of fiscal
1996 and 1997, respectively. The decrease in cash flows from financing
activities in fiscal 1995 was primarily the result of the net repayments on
long-term debt, partially offset by higher borrowings under the Foothill Credit
Facility and lower payments on obligations under capital leases. In fiscal 1996,
cash flows from financing activities increased as a result of the 1996 Private
Placement with the SKM Investors and the Noteholder. The net proceeds of the
1996 Private Placement were used to redeem Common Stock, repay existing
long-term debt and reduce outstanding borrowings under the Foothill Credit
Facility. The increase in cash flows from financing activities during the first
quarter of fiscal 1997 as compared to the first quarter of fiscal 1996 related
primarily to the repayment of long-term debt during the 1996 period.
The Company has a $20.0 million working capital revolving credit
facility with Foothill Capital. As of February 1, 1997, there were no amounts
borrowed under the Foothill Credit Facility, and as of May 3, 1997 a total of
$0.7 million had been borrowed under the Foothill Credit Facility. In addition,
as of February 1, 1997 and May 3, 1997, the Company had outstanding $4.7 million
and $6.9 million, respectively, in letters of credit under the Foothill Credit
Facility. The Company is currently finalizing an amended credit facility with
Foothill Capital to increase the Foothill Credit Facility from $20.0 million to
$30.0 million (including an increase in the sublimit for letters of credit from
$10.0 million to $20.0 million). The amount that may be borrowed by the Company
under the amended credit facility would depend upon the levels of inventory and
accounts receivable. The aggregate amounts available before taking into
consideration borrowings outsanding, as of February 1, 1997 and May 3, 1997 were
$11.9 million and $13.7 million, respectively. Amounts outstanding under the
amended credit facility would bear interest at a floating rate equal to the
reference rate of Norwest Bank Minnesota N.A. or, at the Company's option, the
30-day LIBOR Rate plus a pre-determined spread. The LIBOR spread would be 1 1/2%
or 2%, depending upon the Company's financial performance from time to time.
Borrowings under the amended credit facility would mature in April 2000. It is
contemplated that the amended credit facility would require the Company to
maintain specified minimum levels of tangible net worth and working capital as
well as a minimum current ratio, would impose certain limitations on the
Company's annual capital expenditures, and would include other affirmative and
negative covenants. The Company does not believe that these covenants would
interfere with its business or the implementation of its growth strategy. Like
the existing facility, the proposed amended credit facility would be secured by
a first priority security interest in all assets of the Company. There can be
no assurance that the Company will enter into an amended credit facility with
Foothill Capital on these, or any, terms.
In July 1996, the Company consummated the 1996 Private Placement with
the SKM Investors and the Noteholder, which resulted in net proceeds to the
Company of $37.4 million. These net proceeds were used to repay certain
outstanding indebtedness and to redeem certain outstanding shares of Common
Stock. The successful completion of the 1996 Private Placement enabled the
Company to implement a growth strategy built on opening new stores through the
reinvestment of operating cash flow which had previously been dedicated to debt
repayment obligations. See "Certain Relationships and Related Transactions."
The Company obtained a waiver from Foothill Capital and an amendment
from the Noteholder with respect to the capital expenditure limitations for
fiscal 1996 under the Foothill Credit Facility and the Senior Subordinated
Notes. The waiver and amendment enabled the Company to open additional stores in
connection with its expansion. Management believes that the Company would be
able to comply with the capital expenditure limitation and other financial
covenants that would be contained in the proposed amended Foothill Credit
Facility.
During fiscal 1995, fiscal 1996 and the first quarter of fiscal 1997,
the Company incurred capital expenditures of $6.9 million, $8.5 million and $4.3
million, respectively. In a typical new store, capital expenditures (net of
landlord contribution) approximate $0.2 million. In addition, a new store
typically requires a $0.1 million investment in inventory (net of merchandise
payables) and other pre-opening expenses. Management anticipates that total
capital expenditures in fiscal 1997, relating primarily to new and remodeled
stores and ongoing store maintenance programs, will be approximately $15.2
million. Management plans to fund these capital expenditures from cash flow from
operations.
The Company believes that its current financing arrangements and its
anticipated level of internally generated funds will be adequate to fund its
capital requirements for at least the next 18 to 24 months. The Company's
capital needs consist of working capital expenditures, including inventory and
capital expenditures relating to new and remodeled stores, expenditures for
computer hardware and software required in connection with the Company's growth,
and interest payments on indebtedness. The Company's ability to meet these
capital requirements, and its continued need for external financing, will depend
on its ability to generate cash from operations and successfully implement its
store expansion plans.
QUARTERLY RESULTS AND SEASONALITY
The Company's quarterly results of operations have fluctuated and are
expected to continue to fluctuate materially depending on a variety of factors,
including the timing of new store openings and related pre-opening and other
startup expenses, net sales contributed by new stores, increases or decreases in
comparable store sales, adverse weather conditions, shifts in timing of certain
holidays, changes in the Company's merchandise mix and overall economic
conditions.
The Company's business is also subject to seasonal influences, with
heavier concentrations of sales during the holiday and back-to-school seasons.
As is the case with many retailers of apparel and related merchandise, the
Company typically experiences lower net sales during the first two fiscal
quarters. The Company has experienced first and second quarter losses in the
past and may experience such losses in the future. Because of these fluctuations
in net sales and net income (loss), the results of operations of any quarter are
not necessarily indicative of the results that may be achieved for a full fiscal
year or any future quarter. See "Risk Factors--Fluctuations in Quarterly Results
and Seasonality."
The following table sets forth certain statement of operations data
and operating data for each of the Company's last nine fiscal quarters and the
percentage of net sales represented by the line items presented. The quarterly
statement of operations data and selected operating data set forth below were
derived from unaudited financial statements of the Company and reflect, in the
opinion of management, all adjustments (consisting only of normal recurring
adjustments) necessary to present fairly the results of operations for these
fiscal quarters.
Fiscal Fiscal Fiscal
1995 1996 1997
---------------------------------------- ------------------------------------- ------------
First Second Third Fourth First Second Third Fourth First
Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
(Dollars in thousands)
Statement of Operations Data:
Net sales............................. $25,433 $23,181 $33,713 $39,733 $30,438 $25,974 $40,353 $47,073 $39,203
Gross profit.......................... 7,224 5,530 11,640 14,232 10,238 7,873 16,976 18,965 14,018
Operating income (loss).............. (388) (2,302) 3,100 4,002 1,568 (1,108) 6,348 6,477 2,618
As a Percentage of Net Sales:
Gross profit......................... 28.4% 23.9% 34.5% 35.8% 33.6% 30.3% 42.1% 40.3% 35.8%
Operating income (loss)............. (1.5) (9.9) 9.2 10.1 5.2 (4.3) 15.7 13.8 6.7
SELECTED OPERATING DATA:
Comparable store sales increase..... 25.6% 19.0% 0.8% 3.5% 9.8% 6.2% 8.1% 9.7% 5.0%
Stores open at end of period........ 90 90 94 91 93 95 104 108 119
BUSINESS
OVERVIEW
The Company is a leading specialty retailer of high quality,
value-priced apparel and accessories for newborn to twelve year old children.
The Company designs, contracts to manufacture and sells its products under "The
Children's Place" brand name. As of July 17, 1997, the Company operated 130
stores, primarily located in regional shopping malls in the eastern half of the
United States. The Company's net sales have increased from $96.6 million in
fiscal 1993 to $143.8 million in fiscal 1996 and operating income has increased
from $1.1 million in fiscal 1993 to $13.3 million in fiscal 1996. In the first
quarter of fiscal 1997, net sales totaled $39.2 million as compared to $30.4
million in the first quarter of fiscal 1996. The Company has achieved comparable
store sales increases over prior years of 13.0%, 10.0% and 8.6% during each of
fiscal 1994, 1995 and 1996, respectively, and 5.0% in the first quarter of
fiscal 1997. Net sales per gross square foot have increased from $226 in fiscal
1993 to $335 in fiscal 1996. These increases are primarily the result of a
merchandising and operational repositioning of the Company over the last five
fiscal years under the direction of the Company's current management team.
In fiscal 1996, new stores for which fiscal 1996 was the first full
year of operations had average net sales of $1,250,000. The average investment
for these new stores, including capital expenditures (net of landlord
contribution), initial inventory (net of merchandise payables) and pre-opening
costs, was $371,000. New stores have generally achieved profitability within the
first full quarter of operations, with average fiscal 1996 store level operating
cash flow of approximately $288,000 (23.0% of net sales) for stores for which
fiscal 1996 was the first full year of operations. In fiscal 1996, these stores
yielded a cash return on investment of 77.6%.
In July 1996, following a private financing in which the Company
raised $37.4 million of net proceeds, the Company began to implement an
aggressive growth strategy designed to capitalize on its business strengths and
its strong store economics. From July 1, 1996 through the end of fiscal 1996,
the Company opened a total of 16 new stores, growing to 108 stores. During
fiscal 1997 through July 17, 1997, the Company has opened 22 stores. The Company
intends to continue its expansion program and currently plans to open
approximately 25 additional stores during the remainder of fiscal 1997 and at
least 60 stores in fiscal 1998.
The Company and other children's retailers capitalize on the fact that
children typically require new clothes every season, and often more than once
within a season. Industry sources estimate that the children's apparel market
generated approximately $26.9 billion in retail purchases in calendar 1996.
These sources estimate that total sales of children's apparel grew at a compound
annual rate of approximately 4.6% between calendar 1991 and calendar 1996 and
5.7% from calendar 1995 to calendar 1996. In addition, there are approximately
four million births in the United States each year. The Company believes that
the size and growth of its market, coupled with its business strengths and
expansion strategies, should provide significant opportunities for growth in the
future.
BUSINESS STRENGTHS AND STRATEGY
The Company believes that its value-based, proprietary brand business
strategy has been and will continue to be the key to its success as a specialty
retailer. The following strengths have contributed to the success of the
Company's merchandising and operating strategies:
UNIQUE PRICE-VALUE POSITIONING. By offering quality clothing and
accessories under "The Children's Place" brand name at prices 20% to 30% below
most of its direct mall-based competitors, the Company believes that it has
built a loyal base of customers who regularly purchase from the Company as their
children grow. The Company believes that the value created by the price and
quality of its merchandise has enabled it to establish a unique market position.
See "--Merchandising" and "--Sourcing and Procurement."
MERCHANDISING STRATEGY. The Company's merchandising strategy is built
on the offering of key basic items at exceptional values, complemented by
fashion items and accessories to create a fully coordinated look. The Company
designs its merchandise to present a fresh and youthful image that management
believes is unique to "The Children's Place" brand. See
"--Merchandising" and "--Sourcing and Procurement."
STRONG BRAND IMAGE. The Company believes that it has built a strong
brand image for "The Children's Place" by (i) selling its products exclusively
in its own stores, (ii) creating a uniform appearance in merchandise
presentation, (iii) providing a consistent selection of coordinated separates
and accessories for children, and (iv) offering high quality products at value
prices. The Company believes that these factors foster consumer loyalty to "The
Children's Place" brand name. See "--Merchandising" and "--Company Stores."
BROAD CONSUMER APPEAL. The Company believes that its merchandise
assortment and high quality at everyday value pricing appeal to a broad range of
consumers across all socioeconomic groups, enabling it to compete successfully
in a wide range of regional shopping malls, outlet centers and other locations.
See "--Company Stores."
VERTICALLY INTEGRATED OPERATIONS. The Company controls the design,
sourcing and sale of its private label children's apparel and accessories. The
Company believes that the vertical integration of its operations, from in-house
design to in-store presentation, enables the Company to identify and respond to
market trends, uphold rigorous product quality standards and control the cost of
its merchandise. See "--Merchandising" and "--Company Stores."
EXPERT SOURCING. The Company combines management's extensive sourcing
experience with a cost-based buying strategy. Management has established close,
long-standing and mutually beneficial relationships with numerous manufacturers.
Through these relationships and its extensive knowledge of component costs of
apparel, the Company believes that it has been able to purchase high quality
products at low costs. See "--Merchandising" and "--Sourcing and Procurement."
PROVEN MANAGEMENT TEAM. The Company has a seasoned, highly experienced
management team, with its twelve most senior members having an average of 17
years in the retail and/or apparel business and an average of eight years with
the Company. The Company believes that management's substantial experience
favorably positions the Company for future expansion. See "Management."
MERCHANDISING
MERCHANDISE OFFERING. The Company's merchandise is divided into four
divisions-- girlswear, boyswear, newborn and accessories. The Company's
merchandise offers a balanced assortment of styles in fashionable colors and
patterns, with the aim of consistently creating a fresh, youthful look that the
Company believes is unique to "The Children's Place" brand. Each year the
Company presents four major seasonal lines (spring, summer, back-to-school,
holiday) and two transitional lines. Within each season, the Company offers a
fresh assortment of coordinated basic and fashion apparel with complementary
accessories designed to encourage multiple item purchases.
EVERYDAY VALUE PRICING. The Company's pricing strategy is to set
prices that the Company believes provide value to its customers and are below
those of comparable quality products sold by most of its direct mall-based
competitors. The Company employs this everyday value pricing strategy to attract
and retain customers by allowing customers to make purchases without having to
wait for special sales. The Company's mark-down policy is to systematically
reduce prices on slow-moving merchandise.
MERCHANDISE EXPANSION STRATEGY. The Company periodically evaluates
opportunities for selective line extensions. In fiscal 1997, the Company
introduced a new layette line and expanded its big boy and big girl departments
to include size 16. The Company expects to continue to seek opportunities to
expand its customer base and enhance the productivity of its stores through
further development of existing merchandise categories and the continued
introduction of new merchandise classifications.
DESIGN AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT. Each of the Company's seasonal lines
begins with the compilation of market intelligence regarding fashion trends
approximately nine months before the season, through extensive European and
domestic market research, the purchase of prototype samples, media, trade shows,
fashion magazines, the services of fashion and color forecast organizations and
analysis of prior season performance. Potential items are designed using
computer aided design ("CAD") technology, giving the Company the opportunity to
consider a wide range of style and fashion options.
PLANNING AND ALLOCATION. The merchandise planning team creates a
detailed purchasing plan for each season covering each department, each category
and each key basic item, based on historical and current selling trends. The
Company typically orders 90% of the purchasing plan five months before the
season, saving 10% to respond quickly to new fashion trends and reorders of key
basic items. The production process takes approximately four to five months from
order confirmation to receipt of merchandise at the Company's distribution
facility. The merchandise planning team also monitors current and future
inventory levels on a weekly basis and analyzes sales patterns to predict future
demand for various categories. The Company regularly monitors sales of each
style and color and maintains some flexibility to adjust merchandise on order
for future seasons or to accelerate delivery of merchandise. The merchandise
planning team is also responsible for planning and allocating the merchandise to
the stores based on each store's sales volume levels for each department,
category and key basic item and other factors. See "Risk Factors--Merchandise
Trends."
SOURCING AND PROCUREMENT
After a product line is conceptualized and purchase levels are
determined, the Company's sourcing team makes on-site visits to the Company's
independent agents and various manufacturers to negotiate product costs and
arrange delivery of merchandise manufactured to the Company's specifications.
COST-BASED BUYING. The Company combines management's extensive
sourcing experience with a cost-based buying strategy in order to lower costs
and increase margins. Management believes it has a thorough understanding of the
economics of apparel manufacturing, enabling the Company to determine the most
cost-effective country and manufacturer from which to source each particular
item. Relying on its supplier relationships and management's knowledge of
component costs, the Company believes it has been able to arrange for the
manufacture of high quality products at low cost. One important aspect of the
Company's sourcing strategy is that its Chief Executive Officer, Ezra Dabah, who
has over 25 years of apparel and buying experience, frequently travels to meet
with the Company's agents and manufacturers.
MANUFACTURERS. The Company's apparel is produced to its specifications
by more than 50 independent manufacturers located primarily in the Far East and
elsewhere in Asia. In fiscal 1996, the majority of the Company's merchandise was
produced in Taiwan and Hong Kong. The remainder of the Company's merchandise was
produced in Turkey, China, the United States and certain other countries. To
broaden its sourcing base, the Company also has begun to source from
manufacturers located in lower cost markets, such as the Philippines, Thailand
and Sri Lanka. These three markets accounted for approximately 12% of the
Company's total purchases in fiscal 1996, as compared to approximately 6% in
fiscal 1995.
The Company has no long-term contracts with its manufacturers and
typically transacts business on an item-by-item basis at freight on board
("FOB") cost in United States dollars. The Company employs a Hong Kong trading
company for purchases from China, Hong Kong and the Philippines, as well as
commissioned independent agents elsewhere in the Far East and in Turkey to
assist in sourcing and pre-production approval, production, inspection and
ensuring timely delivery of merchandise. The Company has developed long-term,
continuous relationships with key individual manufacturers and raw material
suppliers which management believes have yielded numerous benefits, including
quality control and favorable costs, and have afforded it flexible working
arrangements and a steady flow of merchandise supply. See "Risk Factors--
Dependence on Unaffiliated Manufacturers."
SYSTEMS. The Company employs a work-in-process tracking system that
enables it to anticipate potential delivery delays and take action to mitigate
the impact of such delays. By using this system together with the Company's
purchase order and advanced shipping notification systems, the Company and its
independent agents actively monitor the status of each purchase order from order
confirmation to merchandise receipt. The Company is also pursuing software
technologies to further enhance communication of the production and pre-approval
status of its work-in-process directly from its overseas agents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE. To ensure quality and promote consumer confidence
in "The Children's Place" products, the Company utilizes its own, in-house
quality assurance laboratory to test and evaluate all fabric and trimming
materials against a comprehensive range of physical performance standards before
bulk production can begin. The Company's director of quality control and/or the
quality control personnel of the Company's independent agents visit the various
manufacturing facilities to monitor the quality control and production process.
With this focus on pre-production quality approval, the Company is generally
able to detect and correct quality related problems before bulk production
begins. The Company does not accept its finished apparel products until each
purchase order receives formal certification of compliance from its agents'
inspectors.
COMPANY STORES
EXISTING STORES. As of July 17, 1997, the Company operated 130 stores,
all of which are located in the eastern half of the United States. Most of the
Company's stores are clustered in and around major metropolitan areas. The
Company's stores are concentrated in major regional malls, with the exception of
seven outlet stores and two urban street stores. The map and store list below
set forth by state the number and location of stores operated by the Company:
[MAP OF THE UNITED STATES INDICATING THE NUMBER OF STORE LOCATIONS BY
CITY AND STATE TO BE INSERTED]
STORE ENVIRONMENT. The Company's prototype store measures
approximately 3,500 square feet and features a design that incorporates light
maple wood floors, fixtures and trim set against a white color scheme, accented
by the hunter green used in the Company's logo. The Company believes that the
environment created by its "apple-maple" prototype store promotes a shopping
experience that is inviting and friendly. The store is brightly lit, featuring
floor-to- ceiling glass windows that allow the Company's colorful fashions to
attract customers from the outside. A customized grid system throughout the
store's upper perimeter displays featured merchandise, marketing photographs and
key basic item prices. Suspended signs direct customers to departments within
the store where each merchandise line is displayed as a separate collection of
coordinated basic and fashion items, with matching accessories. The Company
believes that its merchandise presentation effectively displays "The Children's
Place" look and creates a visually attractive selling environment that maximizes
customer convenience and encourages the purchase of multiple items.
To achieve uniform merchandise presentation and to maximize sales of
coordinating items, store management is provided with detailed written and
visual store plans that specify merchandise placement. Standardization of store
design and merchandise presentation also promotes effective usage and
productivity of selling space and maximizes customer convenience in merchandise
selection. By seeking a uniform appearance in store design and merchandise
presentation, the Company believes that it is able to maintain and enhance "The
Children's Place" brand image.
As of July 17, 1997, approximately 70% of the Company's stores
(excluding outlet stores) are based on the new "apple-maple" prototype. The
Company generally remodels its stores to the new prototype specifications as
their leases are renewed. In many cases, conversion to the new prototype
involves relocation within a mall as well as a significant reduction in space.
STORE OPERATIONS. The Company's store operations are directed by the
Company's Vice President of Store Operations, three regional managers and 15
district managers. Individual stores are managed by a store manager and up to
three co-managers depending on sales volume. A typical store employs a number of
full time and part time sales associates, and hires additional part time
associates based on seasonal needs.
Regional and district managers spend a majority of their work week on
store selling floors, providing direction, motivation, training and support to
field personnel. Store managers are responsible for supervising customer
service, store presentation, staff scheduling, shrinkage control and seeing that
the store achieves its planned sales goals. Customer service is a major focus
for store management and sales associates, and continuing efforts are made to
maximize selling productivity.
The Company engages in an ongoing process of training management and
sales associates in the areas of customer service, selling skills,
merchandising, procedures and controls, utilizing visual aids, training manuals
and training workshops.
Management maintains a high level of communication between the central
office and stores. Frequent downloads through the POS registers, biweekly mail
packs to each store, voicemail and district manager conference calls augment the
frequent store visits by the regional and district managers. In addition,
quarterly home office and district manager meetings engender a strong team
culture. The Company is continuing to improve the communication between the
central office and its stores with the use of new technology.
STORE EXPANSION PROGRAM
In mid-1996, the Company began implementing an aggressive growth
strategy designed to capitalize on its business strengths and its strong store
economics. From July 1, 1996 to the end of fiscal 1996, the Company opened 16
stores. During fiscal 1997 through July 17, 1997, the Company has opened 22
stores. The Company intends to continue its store expansion program and
currently plans to open approximately 25 additional stores during the remainder
of fiscal 1997 (of which 19 have fully executed leases) and at least 60 stores
in fiscal 1998. The Company believes that its value pricing and its merchandise
assortment appeal to customers in all socioeconomic groups, affording it
substantial expansion opportunities. There are hundreds of regional malls,
street locations and outlet centers in the United States that the Company
believes would be suitable sites for the Company's stores.
The Company's expansion strategy focuses primarily on mall-based
locations. The regional malls which the Company targets are typically high
volume centers, generally measuring one million square feet or more, having at
least three department stores or other anchor tenants and various specialty
retailers, as well as several entertainment features (such as restaurants, a
food court and/or movie theaters). The Company conducts extensive analyses of
potential store sites, taking into account the performance of other specialty
retail tenants, the existing anchor stores and other stores, the size, type and
average sales per square foot of the mall and the demographics of the
surrounding area. The most important consideration for the Company in evaluating
a store location within a mall is placement of the store relative to mall
traffic patterns. In addition, the Company continuously evaluates opportunities
to add stores in other types of locations, such as outlet centers and urban
street locations. The Company intends to focus its expansion by establishing
clusters of stores in states in which it already has stores or in contiguous
states in order to strengthen "The Children's Place" brand name recognition. See
"Risk Factors--Aggressive Growth Strategy."
MARKETING
ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION. The Company strives to enhance its
reputation and image in the marketplace and build recognition and equity in "The
Children's Place" brand name by advertising its image, product and message
through in-store photographs and product displays, direct mail and, to a lesser
extent, regional and national print media. The Company's point of purchase
marketing strategy uses high image visuals to highlight the individual
departments and seasonal fashion looks, promoting key basic items at price
points representing exceptional value, and focusing on store-front and window
displays to attract customers into the stores. The Company primarily relies on
mall-based traffic and its reputation, loyal customer base and brand image to
generate sales. Moreover, instead of relying on special holiday or one-day
promotions to stimulate sales, the Company relies on its everyday value pricing
strategy to attract customers. To encourage larger purchases, the Company
periodically distributes coupons providing a discount on purchases above a
specified minimum.
PROPRIETARY CREDIT CARD. The Company views the use of a proprietary
credit card as an important marketing and communication tool and introduced "The
Children's Place" credit card in January 1995. The number of holders of the
Company's proprietary credit card has grown to over 250,000, and these customers
accounted for approximately 15% of the Company's fiscal 1996 net sales. The
Company believes that its proprietary credit card promotes affinity and loyalty
among those customers who use the card and facilitates communication with such
customers through delivery of coupons and promotional materials. The Company
markets its proprietary credit card by offering customers who apply for a card a
15% discount on their initial purchase using the card. The Company's average
dollar sale to customers using "The Children's Place" card has been
substantially higher than the Company's overall average dollar sale. The
Company's credit card operations are conducted through a third party credit card
service. See "Risk Factors-Proprietary Credit Card."
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS
The Company's management information and electronic data processing
systems consist of a full range of retail, financial and merchandising systems,
including purchase order management, importing, inventory planning and control,
inventory distribution, sales reporting and accounts payable. These systems
operate on a Hitachi EX/27 platform mainframe computer and utilize a combination
of third party and proprietary software packages. Management views technology as
an important tool in efficiently supporting its rapid growth and maintaining a
competitive industry position.
Unit and dollar sales information is updated daily in the merchandise
reporting systems by polling each store's POS terminals. Through automated
nightly two-way electronic communication with each store, sales information,
payroll hours and other store initiated transfers are uploaded to the host
system, and price changes and other information are downloaded through the POS
devices. Information obtained from such daily polling generally results in
automatic merchandise replenishment in response to the specific stock keeping
unit ("SKU") requirements of each store. The Company evaluates information
obtained through daily reporting to identify sales trends and to implement
merchandising decisions regarding markdowns and allocation of merchandise.
The Company is committed to utilizing technology to further enhance
its competitive position. In this regard, the Company is scheduled to install a
warehouse management system during fiscal 1998 in connection with the planned
relocation of its distribution center. The Company also intends to replace its
POS software during fiscal 1998 to enhance customer service and communication
between the Company's central office and its stores. See "Risk Factors--Reliance
on Information Systems."
DISTRIBUTION
All merchandise is currently received, inspected, processed and
distributed through the Company's 65,000 square foot leased distribution
facility at its headquarters in West Caldwell, New Jersey. In light of its
stringent quality assurance procedures implemented during the manufacturing
process, the Company has been able to substantially reduce the physical
inspection of garments received at the distribution facility. Accordingly, most
merchandise "flows through" within one business day of its receipt at the
distribution facility and is shipped directly to stores each weekday by
commercial carrier, reducing costs and expediting delivery to the Company's
stores. The Company intends to move its distribution center to a larger facility
during fiscal 1998 to accommodate the Company's continued growth and is
evaluating suitable sites for, and whether to purchase or lease, such new
facility. See "Risk Factors--Disruptions in Receiving and Distribution."
COMPETITION
The children's apparel retail business is highly competitive. The
Company competes in substantially all of its markets with GapKids, BabyGap and
Old Navy (each of which is a division of The Gap, Inc.), The Gymboree
Corporation, Limited Too (a division of The Limited, Inc.), J.C. Penney Company,
Inc., Sears, Roebuck and Co. and other department stores that sell children's
apparel and accessories, as well as certain discount stores such as Wal-Mart
Stores, Inc. and Kids "R" Us (a division of Toys "R" Us, Inc.). The Company also
competes with a wide variety of local and regional specialty stores and with
other national retail chains and catalog companies. One or more of its
competitors are present in substantially all of the malls in which the Company
has stores. Many of the Company's competitors are larger than the Company or
have access to significantly greater financial, marketing and other resources
than the Company.
The Company believes that the principal factors of competition in the
Company's marketplace are perceived value, price, quality, merchandise
assortment, brand name recognition, customer service, and a friendly store
environment. Management believes that the Company has been able to effectively
compete against other retailers of children's apparel because of its reputation
in the marketplace and consistent merchandise offering of high quality, everyday
value- priced childrenswear, sold in a friendly environment. See "Risk
Factors-Competition."
TRADEMARKS AND SERVICE MARK
Each of "The Children's Place," "Baby Place," "The Place," "TCP" and
"Authentic Tiny Tee" has been registered as a trademark and/or a service mark
with the United States Patent and Trademark Office. The registration of the
trademarks and the service marks may be renewed to extend the original
registration period indefinitely, provided the marks are still in use. The
Company intends to continue to use and protect its trademarks and service marks
and maintain their registrations. The Company also intends to take action to
protect its trademarks in certain foreign countries. The Company believes its
trademarks and service marks have received broad recognition and are of
significant value to the Company's business.
PROPERTIES
The Company's executive offices and distribution center are located in
West Caldwell, New Jersey, and are occupied under the terms of a lease covering
approximately 92,000 square feet. The Company expects to relocate its offices
and distribution center during fiscal 1998 but may continue to be obligated on
its current lease until its expiration in March 1999. Many of the Company's
store leases contain provisions requiring landlord consent to a change in
control of the Company. Such provisions may be triggered by this offering or
future offerings of securities by the Company. However, the Company believes
that because of its good relations with its landlords and because most of its
leases are at market rents, these provisions should not have a material adverse
effect on the Company.
All of the Company's existing store locations are leased by the
Company, with lease terms expiring between 1998 and 2008 and with an average
unexpired lease term of 7.5 years. The leases for most of the existing stores
are for terms of ten years and provide for contingent rent based upon a percent
of sales in excess of specified minimums. Leases for future stores will likely
include similar contingent rent provisions.
EMPLOYEES
As of May 3, 1997, the Company had approximately 630 full-time
employees, of whom approximately 150 are based at the Company's headquarters and
distribution center, and approximately 1,150 part-time employees. None of the
Company's employees is covered by a collective bargaining agreement. The Company
believes its relations with its employees are good.
LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
The Company is involved in various legal proceedings from time to time
incidental to the conduct of its business. In the opinion of management, any
ultimate liability arising out of such proceedings will not have a material
adverse effect on the financial condition or results of operations of the
Company.
MANAGEMENT
DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS
The following table sets forth certain information with respect to the
executive officers of the Company:
NAME AGE POSITION
Ezra Dabah................... 43 Chairman of the Board of
Directors and Chief Executive
Officer
Stanley B. Silver............ 59 President, Chief Operating
Officer and Director
Seth L. Udasin............... 41 Vice President, Chief Financial
Officer and Treasurer
Steven Balasiano............. 34 Vice President, General Counsel and
Secretary
Mario A. Ciampi.............. 37 Vice President - Real Estate &
Construction
Ed DeMartino................. 46 Vice President - Management Information
Systems
Robert Finkelstein.......... 45 Vice President - Merchandising Planning
and Allocation
Nina L. Miner............... 48 Vice President - Design and Product
Development
Salvatore W. Pepitone....... 50 Vice President - Distribution Center
Mark L. Rose................ 32 Vice President - Sourcing and Production
Susan F. Schiller........... 36 Vice President - Store Operations
Diane M. Timbanard.......... 52 Vice President - Merchandising Manager
EZRA DABAH has been Chief Executive Officer of the Company since 1991
and Chairman of the Board and a Director since purchasing the Company in 1989
with certain members of his family. Mr. Dabah has more than 25 years of apparel
and buying experience. From 1972 to May 1993, Mr. Dabah was a director and an
executive officer of The Gitano Group, Inc. and its affiliates (collectively,
"Gitano"), a company of which Mr. Dabah and certain members of his family were
principal stockholders and which became a public company in 1988. From 1973
until 1983, Mr. Dabah was in charge of product design and procurement for
Gitano. In 1983, Mr. Dabah founded and became President of a children's apparel
importing and manufacturing division for Gitano which later became an
incorporated subsidiary, Eva Joia Incorporated ("E.J. Gitano"). Mr. Dabah is
Stanley Silverstein's son-in-law and Nina Miner's brother-in-law. See "Certain
Relationships and Related Transactions--Dabah Family and Gitano Legal
Proceedings" for information concerning certain legal proceedings involving Mr.
Dabah.
STANLEY B. SILVER has been President and Chief Operating Officer of
the Company since June 1996 and prior to that served as the Company's Executive
Vice President and Chief Operating Officer since joining the Company in 1991.
Mr. Silver has been a Director of the Company since July 1, 1996. Before joining
the Company in 1991, Mr. Silver held various posts at Grand Met PLC and
Mothercare PLC in the United Kingdom and The Limited, Inc. in the United States.
Mr. Silver has over 25 years of retailing experience in Europe and the United
States and currently serves as Chairman of the Retail Council of New York State.
SETH L. UDASIN has been Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and
Treasurer since 1996. Since joining the Company in 1983, Mr. Udasin has held
various other positions, including Controller from 1988 to 1994 and Vice
President - Finance from 1994 to 1996.
STEVEN BALASIANO has been Vice President, General Counsel and
Secretary since joining the Company in December 1995. Prior to joining the
Company, Mr. Balasiano practiced law in the New York offices of the national
law firms of Stroock & Stroock & Lavan LLP from 1992 to 1995 and Kelley
Drye & Warren from 1987 to 1992.
MARIO A. CIAMPI has been Vice President - Real Estate and Construction
since joining the Company in June 1996. Prior to joining the Company, Mr. Ciampi
was a principal of a private consulting firm, specializing in retail and real
estate restructuring, from 1991 to 1996, in which capacity he was retained as an
outside consultant on the Company's real estate activities since 1991.
ED DEMARTINO has been Vice President - Management Information Systems
since 1991. Mr. DeMartino began his career with the Company in 1981 as a System
Development Project Manager and was subsequently promoted to Director - MIS in
1989.
ROBERT FINKELSTEIN joined the Company in 1989 as Vice President -
Merchandise Planning and Allocation. Immediately prior to joining the Company,
Mr. Finkelstein was a Director of Distribution for Payless Shoe Stores.
NINA L. MINER has been Vice President - Design and Product Development
since joining the Company in 1991. Before joining the Company, Ms. Miner held
various management positions at E.J. Gitano. Ms. Miner is Stanley Silverstein's
daughter and Ezra Dabah's sister-in- law.
SALVATORE W. PEPITONE has been Vice President - Distribution Center
since joining the Company in 1991. Prior to joining the Company, Mr. Pepitone
was employed in a similar capacity by E.J. Gitano.
MARK L. ROSE has been Vice President - Sourcing and Production since
1992. Mr. Rose joined the Company in 1990 and was promoted to Senior Product
Buyer that year. Prior to joining the Company, Mr. Rose held various positions
at Macy's.
SUSAN F. SCHILLER has been Vice President - Store Operations since
1994. Ms. Schiller began her career with the Company as an Assistant Store
Manager in 1985 and subsequently served in various positions, including Director
of Store Communications from 1991 to 1993 and Director of Store Operations from
1993 to 1994.
DIANE M. TIMBANARD has been Vice President - Merchandising Manager
since joining the Company in 1991. Prior to joining the Company, Ms. Timbanard
held various merchandising and management positions, including Vice President of
Merchandising for Macy's.
The following persons are the non-employee directors of the Company:
STANLEY SILVERSTEIN, age 72, has been a Director of the Company since
July 1, 1996. Mr. Silverstein also serves as Chairman of the Board of Directors
of Nina Footwear, a company he founded with his brother in 1952. Mr. Silverstein
is Nina Miner's father and Ezra Dabah's father-in-law.
JOHN F. MEGRUE, age 39, has been a Director of the Company since July
1996. Mr. Megrue has been a partner of SKM Partners, L.P., which serves as the
general partner of SKM and the SK Funds, since 1992. From 1989 to 1992, Mr.
Megrue was a Vice President and Principal at Patricof & Co. and prior thereto he
served as a Vice President at C.M. Diker Associates. Mr. Megrue also serves as
Vice Chairman of the Board and Director of Dollar Tree Stores, Inc. and Chairman
of the Board and Director of Hibbett Sporting Goods, Inc.
DAVID J. ODDI, age 27, has been a Director of the Company since April
1997. Mr. Oddi joined SKM as an Associate in 1994 and is currently a Principal
of SKM. Prior to joining SKM, Mr. Oddi was a financial analyst in the Leveraged
Finance Group at Salomon Brothers Inc.
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
The following table summarizes the compensation for fiscal 1996 for
the Company's Chief Executive Officer and each of its four other most highly
compensated executive officers:
SUMMARY COMPENSATION TABLE
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Annual Long-Term All Other
COMPENSATION (1) COMPENSATION (2) COMPENSATION
Name and Securities
Principal Position Salary($) Bonus($) Underlying ($)
Options (#)
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ezra Dabah $490,403 $ 383,604 0 $ 708 (3)
Chairman of the
Board and Chief
Executive Officer
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stanley B. Silver $325,778 $ 203,934 249,000 $133,980 (4)
President and Chief
Operating Officer
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Diane M. Timbanard $228,846 $ 89,396 99,600 $ 590 (3)
Vice President -
Merchandising
Manager
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nina L. Miner $191,461 $ 77,957 149,400 $ 456 (3)
Vice President -
Design and Product
Development
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mark L. Rose $173,634 $ 68,544 149,400 $ 647 (3)
Vice President -
Sourcing and
Production
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Includes bonuses earned in fiscal 1996, portions of which were paid
in fiscal 1997. Other annual compensation did not exceed $50,000 or
10% of the total salary and bonus for any of the named executive officers.
(2) Each of the options granted becomes exercisable at the rate of 20% on or
after six months following the date of grant and 20% on or after each of
the first, second, third and fourth anniversaries of the date of grant.
See "--Stock Option and Other Plans for Employees-Stock Option
Plans."
(3) Amounts shown consist of the Company's matching contributions under The
Children's Place 401(k) Savings and Investment Plan.
(4) Reflects the value of (i) the purchase, for $50,000, of shares of Common
Stock valued at approximately $173,600 at the time of purchase, pursuant
to an exercise of an option, and (ii) insurance premiums of $10,380
paid by the Company with respect to term life insurance for the benefit
of Mr. Silver.
OPTIONS GRANTED IN LAST FISCAL YEAR
The following table sets forth certain information concerning options
granted during fiscal 1996 to each executive officer named in the Summary
Compensation Table. To date, no options have been exercised.
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of Potential Realizable
Securities % of Value at Assumed Annual
Underlying Total Exercise Expiration Rates of Stock Price
Options Granted in Price (2) Date Appreciation for Option
Name Granted (1) Fiscal 1996 Term (3)
5% 10%
-- ---
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ezra Dabah 0 0% $0 N/A $0 $0
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stanley B. Silver 249,000 17.2% $2.68 6/28/06 420,400 1,064,262
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Diane M. Timbanard 99,600 6.9% $2.68 6/28/06 168,160 425,705
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nina L. Miner 149,400 10.4% $2.68 6/28/06 252,240 638,557
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mark L. Rose 149,400 10.4% $2.68 6/28/06 252,240 638,557
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Each of the options granted becomes exercisable at the rate of 20% on or
after six months following the date of grant and 20% on or after each of
the first, second, third and fourth anniversaries of the date of grant. See
"-Stock Option and Other Plans for Employees-Stock Option Plans."
(2) The exercise price was fixed at the date of the grant and represented the
fair market value per share of Common Stock on such date.
(3) In accordance with the rules of the Commission, the amounts shown on this
table represent hypothetical gains that could be achieved for the
respective options if exercised at the end of the option term. These gains
are based on assumed rates of stock appreciation of 5% and 10% compounded
annually from the date the respective options were granted to their
expiration date and do not reflect the Company's estimates or projections
of future Common Stock prices. The gains shown are net of the option
exercise price, but do not include deductions for taxes or other expenses
associated with the exercise. Actual gains, if any, on stock option
exercises will depend on the future performance of the Common Stock, the
option holders' continued employment through the option period, and the
date on which the options are exercised.
COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS
Beginning with the consummation of the offering made hereby, each
member of the Company's Board of Directors who is not an officer of the Company
or an affiliate of the SKM Investors (any such director, an "Eligible Director")
will receive an annual fee of $10,000 for serving on the Board. Such independent
directors also will receive $1,000 for each Board or committee meeting attended
plus reimbursement of expenses for each such meeting. All directors will be
entitled to receive options under the Company's stock option plans. See "-Stock
Option and Other Plans for Employees-- Stock Option Plans." Directors of the
Company received no compensation, as directors, during the Company's last fiscal
year.
COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Subsequent to this offering, the Company intends to create a
Compensation Committee and an Audit Committee of the Board of Directors. The
Company expects that, following the completion of this offering, two independent
directors will be elected to the Company's Board of Directors. All of the
members of the Audit Committee and a majority of the members of the Compensation
Committee will be outside directors.
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENTS
The Company is a party to employment agreements with Ezra Dabah and
Stanley Silver.
EZRA DABAH
Mr. Dabah's employment agreement (the "Dabah Agreement") provides that
he will serve as Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of the Company from June
27, 1996 through June 27, 1999, at an initial salary of $480,000 per year,
subject to annual review. Mr. Dabah's service after June 27, 1999 shall continue
for successive three year periods, subject to termination in accordance with the
termination provisions of the Dabah Agreement. Mr. Dabah is also entitled to
receive a semi-annual bonus in an amount equal to the product of (x) 50% of his
semi-annual base salary multiplied by (y) a pre-determined bonus percentage
fixed by the Board of Directors for any stated six-month period of not less than
20% nor more than 200%, based on the Company's performance during such six-month
period. The Dabah Agreement also provides for certain insurance and other
benefits to be maintained and paid by the Company.
The Dabah Agreement provides that if Mr. Dabah's employment is
terminated by the Company without cause or for disability, or by Mr. Dabah for
good reason or following a change in control (as each such term is defined in
the Dabah Agreement), the Company will be required to pay Mr. Dabah three times
his base salary then in effect, which amount will be payable within 30 days
following his termination. Mr. Dabah also will be entitled to receive any
accrued but unpaid bonus compensation and all outstanding stock options under
the Company's stock option plans will immediately vest. If Mr. Dabah's
employment is terminated for any of the above reasons, the Company also will be
required, with certain exceptions, to continue to maintain life insurance,
medical benefits and other benefits for Mr. Dabah for three years. The Dabah
Agreement also provides that Mr. Dabah will not, with certain exceptions, engage
or be engaged in a competing business for a period of five years following
termination of his employment.
STANLEY B. SILVER
Mr. Silver's employment agreement (the "Silver Agreement") provides
that he will serve as President and Chief Operating Officer of the Company from
June 27, 1996, and that such service shall continue unless terminated in
accordance with the termination provisions of the Silver Agreement, at an
initial salary of $320,000 per year, subject to annual review. Mr. Silver also
is entitled to receive a semi-annual bonus in an amount equal to the product of
(x) 40% of his semi-annual base salary multiplied by (y) the pre-determined
bonus percentage fixed by the Board of Directors for any stated six-month period
of not less than 20% nor more than 200%, based on the Company's performance
during such six-month period. The Silver Agreement also provides for certain
insurance and other benefits to be maintained and paid by the Company.
The Silver Agreement provides that if Mr. Silver's employment is
terminated without cause by the Company (as such term is defined in the Silver
Agreement), the Company will be required to pay Mr. Silver an amount equal to
his base salary then in effect for two years, which amount is payable in equal
monthly installments over a two year period following his termination. Mr.
Silver will also be entitled to receive any accrued but unpaid bonus
compensation and the Company will be required, with certain exceptions, to
continue to maintain life insurance, medical benefits and other benefits for Mr.
Silver for two years. If Mr. Silver's employment is terminated without cause
following a change in control, all outstanding stock options issued to Mr.
Silver under the Company's stock option plans shall immediately vest. The Silver
Agreement also provides that Mr. Silver will not, with certain exceptions,
engage or be engaged in a competing business for a period of two years following
termination of his employment.
STOCK OPTION AND OTHER PLANS FOR EMPLOYEES
STOCK OPTION PLANS
The 1996 Stock Option Plan of The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.
(the "1996 Plan") was adopted by the Company and approved by the Company's
stockholders as of June 28, 1996. All key executive officers of the Company, as
determined by a committee consisting of Messrs. Dabah and Silver, were eligible
to receive options under the 1996 Plan. A total of 1,743,240 shares were
authorized for issuance under the 1996 Plan. Options with respect to all of
these shares will have been granted under the 1996 Plan prior to this offering.
Effective with this offering, the Board of Directors of the Company will
discontinue any future grants of options under the 1996 Plan.
The 1997 Stock Option Plan of The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.
(the "1997 Plan") was adopted by the Company and approved by the Company's
stockholders prior to this offering. The 1996 Plan and the 1997 Plan
(collectively, the "Plans") will be administered by a Stock Option Plan
Committee of the Company's Board of Directors which solely consists of two or
more directors, except that prior to the offering the Plans were
administered by a committee consisting of Messrs. Dabah and Silver. All
employees and directors of the Company, as may be determined from time to time
by the Stock Option Plan Committee, will be eligible to receive options under
the 1997 Plan. In addition, Eligible Directors of the Company will automatically
receive a limited number of options, as described below.
A total of 1,000,000 shares will be authorized for issuance under the
1997 Plan. Not more than 250,000 shares of Common Stock may be the subject of
options granted to any individual during any calendar year. Upon consummation of
the offering, the Company will grant options with respect to ___________ shares
at exercise prices equal to the initial public offering price to certain
eligible employees under the 1997 Plan, none of which will be granted to
executive officers.
The exercise price of an incentive stock option and a non-qualified
stock option is fixed by the Stock Option Plan Committee at the date of grant;
however, the exercise price under an incentive stock option must be at least
equal to the fair market value of the Common Stock at the date of grant, and
110% of the fair market value of the Common Stock at the date of grant for any
incentive stock option granted to any individual who owns more than 10% of the
voting power or value of all classes of stock of the Company (a "10% Owner").
Stock options are exercisable for a duration determined by the Stock
Option Plan Committee, but in no event more than ten years after the date of
grant (or five years after the date of grant in the case of an incentive stock
option granted to a 10% Owner). Unless otherwise determined by the Stock Option
Plan Committee at the time of grant, options granted under the 1996 Plan are
exercisable cumulatively at the rate of 20% on or after six months following the
date of grant and 20% on or after each of the first, second, third and fourth
anniversaries of the date of grant and options granted under the 1997 Plan will
be exercisable cumulatively at the rate of 20% on or after December 31st of the
year of grant and 20% on or after each of the first, second, third and fourth
anniversaries of the date of grant. The aggregate fair market value (determined
at the time the option is granted) of the Common Stock with respect to which
incentive stock options are exercisable for the first time by a participant
during any calendar year (under all stock option plans of the Company) shall not
exceed $100,000; to the extent this limitation is exceeded, such excess options
shall be treated as non-qualified stock options for purposes of the Plans and
the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code").
At the time a stock option is granted, the Stock Option Plan Committee
may, in its sole discretion, designate whether the stock option is to be
considered an incentive stock option or a non-qualified stock option, except
that incentive stock options can be granted only to employees. Stock options
granted to employees with no such designation shall be deemed incentive stock
options.
The 1997 Plan will also provide for automatic grants of non-qualified
stock options to Eligible Directors. Upon the consummation of the offering, each
Eligible Director will be granted an option to purchase __________ shares of
Common Stock for a purchase price equal to the initial public offering price.
Each Eligible Director who is initially elected to the Board of Directors of the
Company following the consummation of the offering will be granted an option to
purchase ___ shares of Common Stock upon such director's initial election to the
Board, for a purchase price equal to the fair market value of the Common Stock
on the date of grant. On the last day of each fiscal year of the Company
(beginning with the fiscal year commencing on a date following the offering),
each Eligible Director will be granted an additional option for ______ shares of
Common Stock, for a purchase price equal to the fair market value of the Common
Stock on the date of grant; provided that any Eligible Director initially
elected to the Board during a fiscal year will be granted an option for a
prorated portion of ___ shares on the last day of the fiscal year during which
such person was elected. Each of the foregoing options granted to Eligible
Directors will have a duration of ten years and will become exercisable
cumulatively at the rate of one-third on or after each of the first, second and
third anniversaries of the date of grant.
Payment of the purchase price for shares acquired upon the exercise of
options may be made by any one or more of the following methods: in cash, by
check, by delivery to the Company of shares of Common Stock already owned by the
option holder, or by such other method as the Stock Option Plan Committee may
permit from time to time, including by furnishing a promissory note to the
Company or by a "cashless" exercise method. However, a holder may not use
previously owned shares of Common Stock to pay the purchase price under an
option, unless the holder has beneficially owned such shares for at least six
months.
Stock options become immediately exercisable in full upon (i) the
holder's retirement at or after age 65, (ii) the holder's disability or death,
(iii) a "Change in Control" (as defined in the Plans) or (iv) the
occurrence of such special circumstances as in the opinion of the Stock Option
Plan Committee merit special consideration.
Stock options terminate at the end of three months following the
holder's termination of employment or service. This period is extended to one
year in the case of the disability or death of the holder and, in the case of
death, the stock option is exercisable by the holder's estate. However, stock
options terminate immediately upon a holder's termination of employment or
service for cause.
The options granted under the Plans contain anti-dilution provisions
which will automatically adjust the number of shares subject to the option in
the event of a stock dividend, split-up, conversion, exchange, reclassification
or substitution. In the event of any other change in the corporate structure or
outstanding shares of Common Stock, the number of shares and the class of shares
available for grants under the 1997 Plan or upon the exercise of any outstanding
options granted under either of the Plans shall be adjusted so as to prevent
dilution or enlargement of rights.
The Company shall obtain such consideration for granting options under
the 1997 Plan as the Stock Option Plan Committee in its discretion may request.
Each option may be subject to provisions to assure that any exercise or
disposition of Common Stock will not violate federal and state securities laws.
No option may be granted under the 1997 Plan after the day preceding the tenth
anniversary of the adoption of the 1997 Plan.
The Board of Directors or the Stock Option Plan Committee may at any
time withdraw or amend the Plans and may, with the consent of the affected
holder of an outstanding option at any time withdraw or amend the terms and
conditions of outstanding options. Any amendment which would increase the
maximum number of shares issuable pursuant to the Plans, or to any individual
under the 1997 Plan, or change the class of individuals to whom options may be
granted, shall be subject to the approval of the stockholders of the Company.
401(K) SAVINGS PLAN
The Company has adopted The Children's Place 401(k) Savings and
Investment Plan (the "401(k) Plan"), which is intended to be a qualified plan
under Sections 401(a) and 401(k) of the Code. Employees of the Company generally
are eligible to participate in the 401(k) Plan following the date any such
employee attains the age of twenty-one and completes one year of service with
the Company. Each participant may elect to defer the receipt of between 1% and
15% of such participant's compensation (a "Deferral Election") and have the
Company contribute such compensation to the 401(k) Plan, on such participant's
behalf, up to an annual statutory limitation. For 1997, a participant cannot
elect to defer more than $9,500. This amount is adjusted by the Secretary of the
Treasury to reflect increases in the cost of living.
In addition to the contribution made pursuant to each participant's
Deferral Election, the Company makes a matching contribution (a "Matching
Contribution") in an amount equal to the lesser of 50% of the participant's
deferral election or 2.5% of the participant's salary.
The Company's Matching Contributions and earnings thereon generally
become nonforfeitable upon the participant's completion of five years of
service. However, such contributions will become fully vested regardless of
years of service if the participant's employment terminates by reason of
retirement at or after age 55, disability or death. A participant is always 100%
vested in such participant's other benefits under the 401(k) Plan.
All of the contributions under the 401(k) Plan are held in trust (the
"Trust") and allocated to one or more accounts maintained on behalf of each
participant. The Trust is divided into various investment
vehicles, one of which will be the Common Stock of the Company.
When a participant leaves the employ of the Company for any reason,
the participant will be entitled to receive an amount equal to the vested value
of such participant's accounts. A participant's benefit will be paid to such
participant, or, in the case of his or her death, to such participant's
beneficiary, in a lump sum payable in either cash or Common Stock, to the extent
that any funds have been invested in Common Stock Fund under the 401(k) Plan.
Also, all or a part of certain amounts contributed to the 401(k) Plan may be
withdrawn, in the case of financial hardship, or for any reason after age 59
1/2. Finally, a participant may borrow the vested amounts allocated to such
participant's account, up to certain specified limits. Interest is payable to
the 401(k) Plan on any amounts borrowed.
The expenses of administering the 401(k) Plan are paid by the Company.
EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN
The Company's Board of Directors expects to adopt, and anticipates
that the Company's stockholders will approve, The Children's Place Retail
Stores, Inc. Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the "Employee Stock Purchase Plan").
Under the Employee Stock Purchase Plan, a maximum of _________ shares of Common
Stock may be purchased from the Company by employees through payroll withholding
pursuant to offerings under the Employee Stock Purchase Plan, following the
consummation of this offering. The purchase price of the Common Stock will be
85% of the fair market value of the Common Stock on the date of the offering
commencement or termination, whichever is lower. The Employee Stock Purchase
Plan will be established pursuant to the provisions of Section 423 of the Code.
All employees of the Company (or of any future subsidiaries of the Company
designated by the Compensation Committee), except for employees who own Common
Stock of the Company or options on such stock which represent 5% or more of the
Common Stock of the Company, will be eligible to participate. The Employee Stock
Purchase Plan will be administered by the Compensation Committee. The
Compensation Committee shall have discretion to administer, interpret and
construe any and all provisions of the Employee Stock Purchase Plan. The
Compensation Committee's determinations will be conclusive. In the event of
certain corporate transactions or events affecting the Common Stock or structure
of the Company, the Compensation Committee may make certain adjustments set
forth in the Employee Stock Purchase Plan. The Board may amend, alter or
terminate the Plan at any time; provided, however, that stockholder approval
will be required for any amendment that would increase the maximum number of
shares issuable pursuant to the Employee Stock Purchase Plan and subject to the
requirement that no rights under an outstanding option may be impaired by such
action without the consent of the holder thereof. The shares of Common Stock
which may be purchased pursuant to the Employee Stock Purchase Plan will be made
available from authorized but unissued shares of Common Stock or from treasury
shares. No employee will be granted any right to purchase Common Stock with a
value in excess of $25,000 per year.
MANAGEMENT INCENTIVE PLAN
The Company has a Management Incentive Plan under which key executives
of the Company with significant operating and financial responsibility are
eligible to earn seasonal cash incentive compensation payments that are paid
twice each year.
Prior to the beginning of each six month period, operating income
objectives are established by the Compensation Committee. Any objectives set
anticipate a "stretch" performance level, and are based on an analysis of
historical performance and growth expectations for the business. These
objectives and determination of results are based entirely on financial
measures.
Annual incentive compensation targets established for eligible
executives range from 10% to 50% of base salary, as established by the
Compensation Committee. Executives earn their target incentive compensation if
the Company achieves the established operating income. The amount of incentive
compensation paid to executives can range from zero to double their targets,
based upon the extent to which operating income objectives are achieved. The
minimum level at which an executive would earn any incentive payment, and the
level at which an executive would earn the maximum incentive payment of double
the target, are established by the Compensation Committee prior to the
commencement of each bonus period, and actual payouts are based on a
straight-line interpolation based on these minimum and maximum levels and the
target operating income objectives. Payouts under the Management Incentive Plan
based on fiscal 1996 performance amounted to $1.2 million.
COMPENSATION COMMITTEE INTERLOCKS AND INSIDER PARTICIPATION
During its most recent fiscal year, the Company did not have a formal
Compensation Committee. However, Messrs. Dabah and Silver participated in
deliberations of the Company's Board of Directors concerning executive officer
compensation.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND INDEMNIFICATION
As permitted by the DGCL, the Company has adopted provisions in its
Certificate of Incorporation and ByLaws which eliminate, subject to certain
exceptions, the personal liability of directors to the Company and its
stockholders for monetary damages for breach of the directors' fiduciary duties.
The Certificate of Incorporation and ByLaws also provide for the indemnification
of directors and officers of the Company and require the Company to advance
expenses to its officers and directors as incurred in connection with
proceedings against them for which they may be indemnified. The Company also has
entered into agreements to indemnify its directors which are intended to provide
the maximum indemnification permitted by the DGCL. These agreements, among other
things, indemnify each of the Company's directors for certain expenses
(including attorneys' fees), judgments, fines and settlement amounts incurred by
such director in any action or proceeding, including any action by or in the
right of the Company, on account of such director's service as a director of the
Company. The Company believes that these indemnification provisions are
necessary to attract and retain qualified persons as directors. The Company
intends to obtain insurance for the benefit of the directors and officers of the
Company insuring such persons against certain liabilities, including liabilities
under federal and state securities laws.
SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL
OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT
The following table provides information at July 17, 1997, with
respect to ownership of Common Stock by (i) each beneficial owner of five
percent or more of the Company's Common Stock, (ii) each director of the
Company, (iii) each of the Company's five most highly compensated executive
officers in fiscal 1996 and (iv) all directors and executive officers as a
group. For the purpose of computing the percentage of the shares of Common Stock
owned by each person or group listed in this table, any shares not outstanding
which are subject to options or warrants exercisable within 60 days after July
17, 1997 have been deemed to be outstanding and owned by such person or group,
but have not been deemed to be outstanding for the purpose of computing the
percentage of the shares of Common Stock owned by any other person. Except as
indicated in the footnotes to this table, the persons named in the table have
sole voting and investment power with respect to all shares of Common Stock
shown as beneficially owned by them.
NAME AND ADDRESS OF BENEFICIAL OWNER SHARES BENEFICIALLY OWNED PERCENT OF CLASS
Before After
Offering Offering(1)
The SK Equity Fund, L.P. (2)(3) 7,659,889 37.5% %
SK Investment Fund, L.P. (2)(3) 7,659,889 37.5% %
John F. Megrue (2)(3) 7,659,889 37.5% %
Allan W. Karp (2)(3) 7,659,889 37.5% %
Thomas A. Saunders III (2)(3) 7,659,889 37.5% %
Christopher K. Reilly (2)(3) 7,659,889 37.5% %
David Oddi (2)(4) 0 0% 0%
Ezra Dabah (5)(6) 9,893,400 48.4% %
Stanley B. Silver (5)(7) 603,600 2.9% %
Stanley Silverstein (5)(8) 6,249,360 30.6% %
Diane M. Timbanard (9) 39,840 * *
Nina L. Miner (9) 59,760 * *
Mark L. Rose (9) 59,760 * *
Nomura Holding America Inc. (10) 1,992,252 8.9% 0%
2 World Financial Center
New York, New York 10281
All Directors and Executive Officers as a
Group (15 persons)(11) 19,733,401 94.0% %
- --------------------
* Less than 1%.
(1) Does not give effect to the exercise of the Underwriters' over-allotment
option. The SKM Investors have granted an option to the Underwriters,
exercisable during the 30-day period after the date of this Prospectus, to
purchase up to an aggregate of _________ shares of Common Stock, solely to
cover over-allotments, if any. If such option is exercised in full, the SKM
Investors will own _____ shares, or ___% of the Common Stock. Of the ___
shares to be sold if the over-allotment option is exercised in full, ___
are to be sold by The SK Equity Fund, L.P., _____ are to sold by SK
Investment Fund, L.P. and ___ are to be sold by a former consultant to SKM.
(2) The address of this person is Two Greenwich Plaza, Suite 100, Greenwich, CT
06830.
(3) Includes (i) 7,458,445 shares owned by The SK Equity Fund, L.P., (ii)
108,108 shares owned by SK Investment Fund, L.P. and (iii) 93,336 shares
owned by a former affiliate of Saunders Karp & Megrue, L.P., as to which
The SK Equity Fund, L.P. has certain rights. SKM Partners, L.P. is the
general partner of each of The SK Equity Fund, L.P. and SK Investment Fund,
L.P. Messrs. Karp, Megrue, Reilly and Saunders are general partners of SKM
Partners, L.P., and therefore may be deemed to have beneficial ownership of
the shares shown as being owned by the SK Funds. Messrs. Karp, Megrue,
Reilly and Saunders disclaim beneficial ownership of such shares, except to
the extent that any of them has a limited partnership interest in SK
Investment Fund, L.P.
(4) Does not include shares owned by The SK Equity Fund, L.P. or SK
Investment Fund, L.P. Mr. Oddi is a principal of Saunders
Karp & Megrue, L.P. and has a limited partnership interest in
SK Investment Fund, L.P.
(5) The address of this person is c/o The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.,
One Dodge Drive, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006.
(6) Includes (i) 6,549,000 shares held by trusts or custodial accounts for the
benefit of Mr. Dabah's children and certain other family members, of which
Mr. Dabah or his wife is a trustee or custodian, and as to which Mr. Dabah
disclaims beneficial ownership, and (ii) 39,600 shares held by Mr. Dabah's
wife. Does not include (i) 1,098,480 shares beneficially owned by Stanley
Silverstein, Mr. Dabah's father-in-law, and (ii) a total of 868,800 shares
beneficially owned by other members of Mr. Dabah's family.
(7) Includes 99,600 shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding stock options
exercisable within 60 days of July 17, 1997.
(8) Includes 5,150,880 shares held by trusts for the benefit of Mr.
Silverstein's children and grandchildren, of which Mr. Silverstein's wife
is a trustee, and as to which Mr. Silverstein disclaims beneficial
ownership. Does not include 4,742,520 shares beneficially owned by Ezra
Dabah, Mr. Silverstein's son-in-law, or Mr. Dabah's wife.
(9) Reflects shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding stock options
exercisable within 60 days of July 17, 1997.
(10) Reflects shares issuable upon exercise of a warrant, which will be
repurchased by the Company upon consummation of the offering.
(11) Includes shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding stock options
exercisable within 60 days of July 17, 1997.
After the sale of the shares of Common Stock offered hereby, (i) Ezra
Dabah and certain members of his family will own beneficially 11,860,680 shares
of the Company's Common Stock, constituting approximately ________% of the
outstanding Common Stock and (ii) SKM Investors will own approximately
7,659,889 shares or ________% of the outstanding Common Stock (assuming that the
underwriters' over-allotment option is not exercised). Pursuant to a
stockholders agreement, the SKM Investors and certain other stockholders, who
will own in the aggregate ___% of the outstanding Common Stock, have agreed to
vote for the election of two nominees of the SKM Investors and three nominees of
Ezra Dabah to the Company's Board of Directors. As a result, the SKM Investors
and Ezra Dabah will be able to control the election of five of the Company's
seven directors. In addition, if the SKM Investors and Mr. Dabah were to vote
together, they would be able to determine the outcome of any matter submitted to
a vote of the Company's stockholders for approval, including the election of the
remaining two directors. See "Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners
and Management" and "Description of Capital Stock--Certain Certificate of
Incorporation Provisions."
STOCKHOLDERS AGREEMENT
Prior to consummation of this offering, the Company and all of its
existing stockholders, who will own in the aggregate ___% of the Common Stock
immediately after this offering, will enter into an Amended and Restated
Stockholders Agreement (the "Amended Stockholders Agreement"). The Amended
Stockholders Agreement will place certain limitations upon the transfer in
privately negotiated transactions of shares of Common Stock beneficially owned
by Ezra Dabah, Stanley Silver and the SKM Investors. In addition, the Amended
Stockholders Agreement will provide that (i) so long as Ezra Dabah, together
with members of his family, beneficially owns shares representing at least ___%
of the shares of Common Stock owned by such parties on the date of the Amended
Stockholders Agreement, the Company's existing stockholders will be obligated to
vote all shares as to which they have voting rights in a manner such that the
Board will at all times include three directors nominated by Ezra Dabah and (ii)
so long as the SKM Investors beneficially own shares representing at least __%
of the shares of Common Stock owned by such parties on the date of the Amended
Stockholders Agreement, the Company's existing stockholders will be obligated to
vote all shares as to which they have voting rights in a manner such that the
Board will at all times include two directors nominated by the SKM Investors.
Nominees for the remaining director positions will be designated by the
Company's Board of Directors. Pursuant to the Stockholders Agreement, Ezra
Dabah, Stanley Silver and Stanley Silverstein were designated as director
nominees by Mr. Dabah and were elected to the Board, and John Megrue and David
Oddi were designated as director nominees by the SKM Investors and were elected
to the Board.
The Amended Stockholders Agreement will provide that so long as the
SKM Investors beneficially own shares representing at least ___% of the
outstanding Common Stock, the Company will not, without the affirmative vote of
at least one director nominated by the SKM Investors, engage in specified types
of transactions with certain of its affiliates (not including the SKM
Investors), take action to amend the Company's Bylaws or Certificate of
Incorporation or increase or decrease the size of the entire Board of Directors.
The Amended Stockholders Agreement will also provide that certain specified
types of corporate transactions and major corporate actions will require the
approval of at least five of the Company's seven directors.
Under the terms of the Amended Stockholders Agreement, the rights of
any party thereunder will terminate at the time that such party's Common Stock
constitutes less than ___% of the shares of Common Stock owned by such party on
the date the Amended Stockholders Agreement. All the provisions of the
Stockholders Agreement will terminate on _________.
CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS
CERTAIN INDEBTEDNESS
On December 28, 1993, the Company agreed to be a co-maker of two
installment notes issued as of that date by Ezra Dabah and certain of his family
members in connection with their bankruptcy proceedings. Although the Company
was a co-maker of the installment notes, the notes expressly provided that they
were non-recourse to the Company. The Company agreed to be a co- maker of these
installment notes in consideration for the waiver of certain claims in the
amount of $20.0 million for repayment of funds previously loaned to the Company
by its stockholders. One such installment note, in the principal amount of
$2,650,000 ("Note A"), was non-interest bearing and provided for three annual
principal payments. Note A was secured by a pledge of shares of the Company's
Common Stock held by Ezra Dabah and certain of his family members. Note A was
repaid by the Company on July 1, 1996 with a portion of the net proceeds from
the 1996 Private Placement. The other installment note, in the principal amount
of $2,110,000 ("Note B" and, collectively with Note A, the "Installment Notes"),
provided for monthly principal payments of $50,000, commencing November 30, 1995
and continuing through October 31, 1998, with the remaining balance of $310,000
due on November 30, 1998. Interest on Note B accrued at the rate of 5% per annum
for the first two years only, of which 3% per annum was payable monthly and the
remaining 2% was added to the principal balance, to be paid at final maturity.
Note B was secured by a lien on certain personal assets of Ezra Dabah and
certain of his family members. The Company repaid Note B on May 28, 1997.
1996 PRIVATE PLACEMENT
In July 1996, the SKM Investors purchased shares of the Company's
newly issued Series B Common Stock for an aggregate purchase price of $20.5
million. Under the terms of the Series B Common Stock, such shares were entitled
to a liquidation preference over the outstanding Series A Common Stock held by
the Company's other stockholders and carried certain special voting and other
rights. The shares of Series B Common Stock purchased by the SKM Investors are
convertible into 7,659,889 of Common Stock. Such conversion will be effected
immediately prior to consummation of the offering made by this Prospectus.
Concurrently with the issuance of the Series B Common Stock to the SKM
Investors, the Company sold the Senior Subordinated Notes and the Noteholder
Warrant to the Noteholder, for a purchase price of $20.0 million. The Company
also paid the Noteholder funding and structuring fees in the aggregate amount of
$300,000. The Noteholder Warrant expires in 2006 and represents the right to
purchase 1,992,252 shares of Common Stock at an exercise price of $2.68 per
share, which is equal to the per share purchase price paid by the SKM Investors.
The Senior Subordinated Notes are governed by the terms of a note and warrant
purchase agreement which provides for certain operating restrictions and
financial covenants. Upon consummation of this offering, the Senior Subordinated
Notes will be repaid in full at 100% of their principal amount and the Company
will repurchase the Noteholder Warrant for an aggregate purchase price
determined by multiplying (a) the initial public offering price per share minus
the underwriting discount per share (assumed to be 7% of the initial public
offering price per share) minus the $2.68 exercise price per share of such
warrant by (b) the 1,992,252 shares of Common Stock subject to such warrant. See
"Use of Proceeds."
As compensation for Legg Mason's services as placement agent in
connection with the 1996 Private Placement, the Company granted Legg Mason the
Legg Mason Warrant and paid Legg Mason a cash fee of $1,645,000. The Legg Mason
Warrant expires in 2006 and represents the right to purchase 747,096 shares of
Common Stock at an exercise price of $2.68 per share, which is equal to the per
share purchase price paid by the SKM Investors. Upon consummation of this
offering, the Company will repurchase two-thirds of the Legg Mason Warrant for a
purchase price determined by multiplying (a) the initial public offering price
per share minus the underwriting discount (assumed to be 7% of the initial
public offering price per share) minus the $2.68 exercise price per share of
such warrant by (b) the 498,064 shares of Common Stock subject to the portion of
such warrant being repurchased. See "Use of Proceeds." Legg Mason has informed
the Company that, concurrently with such redemption, Legg Mason will exercise
the remaining one-third of the Legg Mason Warrant and will receive 249,032
shares of Common Stock pursuant to such exercise.
At the time of the 1996 Private Placement, the Company entered into a
Registration Rights Agreement with its existing stockholders, the SKM Investors,
the Noteholder and Legg Mason, providing for demand and piggyback registration
rights under certain circumstances. In addition, the Company and its existing
stockholders entered into (i) a Stockholders Agreement with the SKM Investors
providing for, among other things, certain restrictions on the issuance and
transfer of shares of the Company's capital stock held by its existing
stockholders, certain voting rights relating to the election of directors, and
veto rights of the directors nominated by the SKM Investors with respect to
certain specified matters, and certain other rights granted to the SKM
Investors, and (ii) a Warrantholder Agreement with the Noteholder and Legg Mason
pursuant to which the Company and its existing stockholders agreed to grant
certain rights to the Noteholder. The Registration Rights Agreement and the
Stockholders Agreement are being amended and restated in their entirety in
connection with the offering made hereby and the Warrantholder Agreement will
terminate upon the Company's repurchase of the Noteholder Warrant and the Legg
Mason Warrant. For descriptions of the Amended and Restated Stockholders
Agreement and the Amended and Restated Registration Rights Agreement, see
"Security Ownership by Certain Beneficial Owners and Management--Stockholders
Agreement" and "Description of Capital Stock--Registration Rights."
The Company used $11.8 million of net proceeds from the 1996 Private
Placement to redeem certain outstanding shares of Common Stock held by certain
members of the family of Ezra Dabah and used $2,907,814 of such net proceeds to
repay certain indebtedness of the Company owed to Mr. Dabah and certain members
of his family as described below. At the time of the 1996 Private Placement, all
outstanding shares of preferred stock, all of which were held by Mr. Dabah and
certain of his family members, were surrendered for no consideration.
Concurrently with the 1996 Private Placement, the Company paid a
transaction fee of $250,000 to SKM and reimbursed SKM for $50,000 of
out-of-pocket expenses. The Company also entered into an advisory agreement with
SKM pursuant to which SKM agreed to provide certain financial advisory services
to the Company. In consideration for these services, SKM is entitled to receive
an annual fee of $150,000, payable quarterly in advance. Pursuant to the
advisory agreement, the Company incurred fees to SKM of approximately $93,000 in
fiscal 1996 and approximately $38,000 during the first quarter of fiscal 1997.
The Company also agreed to indemnify SKM for certain losses arising out of the
provision of its advisory services and to reimburse certain of SKM's
out-of-pocket expenses. The advisory agreement will continue in effect in
accordance with its terms following the offering.
In July 1994, Ezra Dabah, Stanley Silverstein and Mr. Dabah's mother
made loans to the Company for working capital purposes in the aggregate amount
of $2.5 million. The loans bore interest at rates ranging from 4% to 8% per
annum and were subordinated to the Company's working capital facility with its
senior lender. In addition, Stanley Silverstein loaned the Company $300,000 in
March 1996 at 8% interest per annum. All such loans were repaid with a portion
of the net proceeds of the 1996 Private Placement.
During fiscal 1994, Ezra Dabah forwarded funds in the amount of
$488,000 to the Company for the subscription for shares to be issued to Mr.
Dabah, subject to approval of the Company's Board of Directors, at a future
date. During July 1997, the Board of Directors determined to not issue such
shares and to refund the $488,000 to Mr. Dabah prior to July 31, 1997.
DABAH FAMILY AND GITANO LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
Ezra Dabah, certain members of his family and DG Acquisition filed
petitions for reorganization under chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy
Code in November 1992. In October 1993, a plan of reorganization was confirmed
and all of the debtors' pre-bankruptcy obligations were discharged. With the
express approval of the creditors' committee, the plan permitted Mr. Dabah and
his family members to retain their ownership of the Company. Pursuant to the
terms of such plan of reorganization, certain proceedings, not related
to the Company, were initiated by the liquidating trustee appointed as part of
the Dabah family bankruptcy case and are currently continuing.
In March 1994, Gitano filed a petition under the United States
Bankruptcy Code and its assets were subsequently sold to an unaffiliated third
party. On several occasions Gitano stockholders initiated litigation against
Gitano and certain of its officers, including Mr. Dabah, asserting claims under
the federal securities laws, which litigation was ultimately settled.
DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK
The following description of the capital stock of the Company is
subject to the Delaware General Corporation Law, as amended (the "DGCL"), and to
provisions contained in the Company's Amended and Restated Certificate of
Incorporation (the "Certificate of Incorporation") and Amended and Restated
Bylaws (the "Bylaws"), copies of which have been filed as exhibits to the
Registration Statement of which this Prospectus forms a part. Reference is made
to such exhibits for a detailed description of the provisions thereof summarized
below.
Upon consummation of the offering made hereby, the authorized capital
stock of the Company will consist of one million shares of preferred stock, par
value $1.00 per share, without designation (the "Preferred Stock"), none of
which will be issued and outstanding, and 100,000,000 shares of Common Stock,
$.10 par value per share, of which _______________ shares will be issued and
outstanding (excluding options). Prior to this offering, the Company's common
stock has been designated in two series, the Series A Common Stock and the
Series B Common Stock. Prior to the consummation of this offering, the Series B
Stock will be converted into Series A Common Stock and the Series A Common Stock
will be redesignated as Common Stock.
COMMON STOCK
DIVIDENDS. After any requirements with respect to dividends on any
Preferred Stock have been met, the holders of Common Stock will be entitled to
receive such dividends, if any, as may be declared from time to time by the
Board of Directors on the Common Stock, which dividends will be paid out of
assets legally available therefor and will be distributed pro rata in accordance
with the number of shares of Common Stock held by each such holder. See
"Dividend Policy."
VOTING RIGHTS. Each holder of Common Stock is entitled to one vote per
share on each matter to be voted on by stockholders. Because there is no
cumulative voting of shares, the holders of a majority of the voting power of
the shares voting for the election of directors can elect all of the directors
if they choose to do so. See "Risk Factors--Control by Insiders and Certain
Other Stockholders."
LIQUIDATION RIGHTS. In the event of any liquidation, distribution or
sale of assets, dissolution or winding-up of the Company, holders of Common
Stock will be entitled to share equally and ratably in all assets available for
distribution to stockholders after payment of creditors and distribution in full
to the holders of any series of Preferred Stock outstanding at the time of any
preferential amount to which they may be entitled.
OTHER TERMS. The Common Stock carries no preemptive rights and is not
convertible, redeemable or assessable, or entitled to the benefit of any sinking
fund.
TRANSFER AGENT AND REGISTRAR. The transfer agent and registrar for the
Company's Common Stock is _______________.
PREFERRED STOCK
The Board of Directors is empowered to issue Preferred Stock from time
to time in one or more series, without stockholder approval, and with respect to
each series to determine, subject to limitations prescribed by law, (i) the
number of shares constituting such series, (ii) the dividend rate on the shares
of each series, whether such dividends shall be cumulative and the relation of
such dividends to the dividends payable on any other class of stock, (iii)
whether the shares of each series shall be redeemable and the terms thereof,
(iv) whether the shares shall be convertible into Common Stock and the terms
thereof, (v) the amount per share payable on each series or other rights of
holders of such shares on liquidation or dissolution of the Company, (vi) the
voting rights, if any, of shares of each series, and (vii) generally any other
rights and privileges not in conflict with the Certificate of Incorporation or
the DGCL for each series and any qualifications, limitations or restrictions
thereof. To date, no series of Preferred Stock has been authorized and no shares
of Preferred Stock have been issued.
The issuance of Preferred Stock by action of the Board of Directors
could adversely affect the voting power, dividend rights and other rights of
holders of the Common Stock. Issuance of a series of Preferred Stock also could,
depending on the terms of such series, either impede or facilitate the
completion of a merger, tender offer or other takeover attempt. Although the
Board of Directors is required to make a determination as to the best interests
of the stockholders of the Company when issuing Preferred Stock, the Board of
Directors could act in a manner that would discourage an acquisition attempt or
other transaction that some, or a majority, of the stockholders might believe to
be in the best interests of the Company or in which stockholders might receive a
premium for their stock over the then prevailing market price. Although there
are currently no plans to issue shares of Preferred Stock or rights to purchase
such shares, management believes that the availability of the Preferred Stock
will provide the Company with increased flexibility in structuring possible
future financings and acquisitions and in meeting other corporate needs that
might arise. The authorized shares of Preferred Stock are available for issuance
without further action by the Company's stockholders, unless such action is
required by applicable law or the rules of any stock exchange on which the
Common Stock may then be listed.
CERTAIN CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION AND BYLAW PROVISIONS
Certain provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws may
be deemed to have anti-takeover effects and may discourage, delay or prevent a
takeover attempt that a stockholder might consider in its best interest. These
provisions, among other things, (i) classify the Company's Board of Directors
into three classes, each of which will serve for different three year periods,
(ii) provide that only the chairman of the Board of Directors may call special
meetings of the stockholders, (iii) provide that a director may be removed by
stockholders only for cause by a vote of the holders of more than two-thirds of
the shares entitled to vote, (iv) provide that all vacancies on the Company's
Board of Directors, including any vacancies resulting from an increase in the
number of directors, may be filled by a majority of the remaining directors,
even if the number is less than a quorum, (v) establish certain advance notice
procedures for nominations of candidates for election as directors and for
stockholder proposals to be considered at stockholders' meetings, and (vi)
require a vote of the holders of more than two- thirds of the shares entitled to
vote in order to amend the foregoing provisions and certain other provisions of
the Certificate of Incorporation and ByLaws. In addition, the Board of
Directors, without further action of the stockholders, is permitted to issue and
fix the terms of preferred stock which may have rights senior to those of the
Common Stock.
DELAWARE LAW AND CERTAIN CHARTER PROVISIONS
The Company is subject to the provisions of Section 203 of the DGCL.
In general, this statute prohibits a publicly-held Delaware corporation from
engaging in a "business combination" with an "interested stockholder" for a
period of three years after the person becomes an interested stockholder, unless
(i) prior to such time the transaction which resulted in the stockholder
becoming an interested stockholder was approved by the Company's Board of
Directors, or (ii) upon consummation of the transaction which resulted in the
stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, the interested stockholder owned
at least 85% of the voting stock of the Company outstanding at the commencement
of the transaction, subject to certain exceptions, or (iii) at or subsequent to
such time, the business combination is approved by the Company's Board of
Directors and authorized at an annual or special meeting of stockholders by the
affirmative vote of at least two-thirds of the holders of the Company's
outstanding voting stock not owned by the interested stockholder. An "interested
stockholder" is a person who, together with affiliates and associates, owns (or
within the prior three years did own) 15% or more of the Company's voting stock.
Such provisions could render the Company more difficult to be acquired pursuant
to an unfriendly acquisition by a third party by making it more difficult for
such person to obtain control of the Company without the approval of the Board
of Directors.
The Company has included in its Certificate of Incorporation
provisions to eliminate the personal liability of its directors for monetary
damages resulting from breaches of their fiduciary duty to the extent permitted
by the DGCL and to indemnify its directors and officers to the fullest extent
permitted by Section 145 of the DGCL. See "Management--Limitation of Liability
and Indemnification."
SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE
Upon completion of the offering, the Company will have a total of
________ shares of Common Stock outstanding (excluding options). Of these
shares, the ________ shares of Common Stock offered hereby will be freely
tradable without restriction or registration under the Securities Act by persons
other than "affiliates" of the Company, as defined in the Securities Act, who
would be required to sell under Rule 144 under the Securities Act. The remaining
_________ shares of Common Stock outstanding will be "restricted securities" as
such term is defined by Rule 144 (the "Restricted Shares"). The Restricted
Shares were issued and sold by the Company in private transactions in reliance
upon exemptions from registration under the Securities Act.
Of the Restricted Shares, _________ shares will be eligible for sale
in the public market in reliance on Rule 144(k) immediately following the
commencement of this offering. The remaining __________ Restricted Shares will
be eligible for sale in the public market pursuant to Rule 144 and Rule 701
under the Securities Act beginning 90 days after the date of this Prospectus as
described below. All of the Restricted Shares are subject to the lock-up
agreements. See "Underwriting."
In general, under Rule 144 as currently in effect, a person (or
persons whose shares are aggregated) who has beneficially owned restricted
securities for at least one year (including the holding period of any prior
owner except an affiliate), including persons who may be deemed "affiliates" of
the Company, would be entitled to sell within any three-month period a number of
shares that does not exceed the greater of 1% of the number of shares of Common
Stock then outstanding (approximately ____________ shares upon completion of the
offering) or the average weekly trading volume of the Common Stock during the
four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a Form 144 with respect to such
sale. Sales under Rule 144 are also subject to certain manner of sale provisions
and notice requirements, and to the availability of current public information
about the Company. In addition, a person who is not deemed to have been an
affiliate of the Company at any time during the 90 days preceding a sale, and
who has beneficially owned the shares proposed to be sold for at least two years
(including the holding period of any prior owner except an affiliate), would be
entitled to sell such shares under Rule 144(k) without regard to the
requirements described above. Rule 144 also provides that affiliates who are
selling shares that are not Restricted Shares must nonetheless comply with the
same restrictions applicable to Restricted Shares with the exception of the
holding period requirement.
Rule 701 promulgated under the Securities Act provides that shares of
Common Stock acquired on the exercise of outstanding options may be resold by
persons other than affiliates, beginning 90 days after the date of this
Prospectus, subject only to the manner of sale provisions of Rule 144, and by
affiliates, beginning 90 days after the date of this Prospectus, subject to all
provisions of Rule 144 except its one-year minimum holding period.
The Company is party to an Amended and Restated Registration Rights
Agreement pursuant to which the SKM Investors and the Company's other existing
stockholders may demand registration under the Securities Act of shares of the
Common Stock held by them at any time after nine months from the date of this
Prospectus. The Company may postpone such a demand under certain circumstances.
In addition, the Company's existing stockholders may request the Company to
include shares of the Common Stock held by them in any registration proposed by
the Company of such Common Stock under the Securities Act.
As of July 17, 1997, options to purchase a total of 1,444,080 shares
of Common Stock pursuant to the 1996 Plan were outstanding with a weighted
average exercise price of $2.68 per share. It is expected that options to
purchase an additional 299,160 shares will be granted prior to this offering. In
addition, a total of 1,000,000 shares of Common Stock are available for future
issuance under the 1997 Plan. Following this offering, the Company intends to
file one or more registration statements on Form S-8 under the Securities Act to
register shares of Common Stock issuable under the 1996 Plan, 1997 Plan and
Employee Stock Purchase Plan.
Prior to the offering, there has been no public market for the Common
Stock and no predictions can be made of the effect, if any, that the sale or
availability for sale of shares of Common Stock will have on the market price of
the Common Stock. Nevertheless, sales of substantial amounts of such shares in
the public market, or the perception that such sales could occur, could
materially and adversely affect the market price of the Common Stock and could
impair the Company's future ability to raise capital through an offering of its
equity securities. See "Risk Factors - Potential Impact of Shares Eligible for
Future Sale; Registration Rights."
UNDERWRITING
The Underwriters named below, represented by Montgomery Securities,
Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation, Smith Barney Inc. and Legg
Mason (the "Representatives"), have severally agreed, subject to the terms and
conditions contained in the Underwriting Agreement, to purchase from the Company
the number of shares of Common Stock indicated below opposite their respective
names, at the initial public offering price less the underwriting discount set
forth on the cover page of this Prospectus. The Underwriting Agreement provides
that the obligations of the Underwriters are subject to certain conditions
precedent and that the Underwriters are committed to purchase all of the shares
of Common Stock if they purchase any.
NUMBER
UNDERWRITERS OF SHARES
Montgomery Securities........................................ ________
Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation.......... ________
Smith Barney Inc............................................. ________
Legg Mason Wood Walker, Incorporated ________
Total ...................................... ________
========
The Representatives have advised the Company that the Underwriters
propose initially to offer the shares of Common Stock to the public on the terms
set forth on the cover page of this Prospectus. The Underwriters may allow to
selected dealers a concession of not more than $_____ per share; and the
Underwriters may allow, and such dealers may reallow, a concession of not more
than $______ per share to certain other dealers. After the initial public
offering, the offering price and other selling terms may be changed by the
Representatives. The Common Stock is offered subject to receipt and acceptance
by the Underwriters, and to certain other conditions, including the right to
reject orders in whole or in part. The Representatives have advised the Company
that they intend to make a market in the Common Stock after the effective date
of this offering.
Certain of the SKM Investors have granted an option to the
Underwriters, exercisable during the 30-day period after the date of this
Prospectus, to purchase up to a maximum of ________________ additional shares of
Common Stock from such SKM Investors to cover over- allotments, if any, at the
same price per share as the initial shares to be purchased by the Underwriters.
To the extent that the Underwriters exercise this option, the Underwriters will
be committed, subject to certain conditions, to purchase such additional shares
in approximately the same proportion as set forth in the above table. The
Underwriters may purchase such shares only to cover over-allotments made in
connection with this offering.
The Underwriting Agreement provides that the Company and the SKM
Investors will indemnify the Underwriters against certain liabilities, including
liabilities under the Securities Act, or will contribute to payments that the
Underwriters may be required to make in respect thereof.
The Representatives have informed the Company that the Underwriters do
not expect to make sales of Common Stock offered by this Prospectus to accounts
over which they exercise discretionary authority in excess of 5% of the shares
of Common Stock offered hereby.
At the request of the Company, the Underwriters have reserved for sale
to certain employees of the Company and certain other persons, at the public
offering price, up to _____________ of the shares of Common Stock offered
hereby. The number of shares available for sale to the general public will be
reduced to the extent such persons purchase such reserved shares. Any reserved
shares not so purchased will be offered by the Underwriters to the general
public on the same basis as the other shares offered hereby.
The Representatives are permitted to engage in certain transactions
that stabilize the price of the Common Stock. Such transactions consist of bids
or purchases for the purpose of pegging, fixing or maintaining the price of the
Common Stock. If the Underwriters create a short position in the Common Stock in
connection with the offering, i.e., if they sell more shares of Common Stock
than are set forth on the cover page of this Prospectus, the Representatives may
reduce that short position by purchasing Common Stock in the open market. The
Representatives may also elect to reduce any short position by exercising all or
part of the over-allotment option described above.
In general, purchases of Common Stock for the purpose of stabilization
or to reduce a short position could cause the price of the Common Stock to be
higher than it might be in the absence of such purchases. Neither the Company
nor any of the Underwriters makes any representation or predictions as to the
direction or magnitude of any effect that the transactions described above may
have on the price of the Common Stock. In addition, neither the Company nor any
of the Underwriters makes any representation that the Representatives will
engage in such transactions or that such transactions, once commenced, will not
be discontinued without notice.
Pursuant to a redemption agreement entered into between the Company
and Legg Mason, one of the Representatives, the Company will use approximately
$__________ of the net proceeds of this offering to redeem, immediately prior to
the closing of this offering, two-thirds of the Legg Mason Warrant. The
redemption price to be paid by the Company to Legg Mason will be determined by
multiplying (a) the initial public offering price per share minus the
underwriting discount (assumed to be 7% of the initial public offering price per
share) minus the $2.68 exercise price per share of such warrant by (b) the
498,064 shares of Common Stock subject to the portion of such warrant being
repurchased. Legg Mason has informed the Company that, concurrently with such
redemption, Legg Mason will exercise the remaining one- third of the Legg Mason
Warrant and will receive 249,032 shares of Common Stock pursuant to such
exercise. The Legg Mason Warrant was issued as partial compensation for its
services in connection with the 1996 Private Placement; the Company also paid
Legg Mason a total cash fee of $1.6 million for services in connection with the
1996 Private Placement. As a result of this warrant redemption, the Conduct
Rules of the National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc. require that the
initial public offering price be established at a price no higher than that
recommended by a "qualified independent underwriter" (as defined in such Conduct
Rules) that (i) does not beneficially own 5% or more of the outstanding voting
securities of the Company, (ii) participates in the preparation of this
Prospectus and the Registration Statement of which this Prospectus is a part and
(iii) exercises the usual standards of "due diligence" in respect thereto.
Montgomery Securities is acting as such qualified independent underwriter with
respect to this offering.
The Company's stockholders and Legg Mason have agreed that, subject to
certain limited exceptions, for a period of 180 days from the date of this
Prospectus, they will not, without the prior written consent of Montgomery
Securities, directly or indirectly, sell, offer, contract or grant any option to
sell or otherwise dispose of any shares of the Company's capital stock, options
or warrants to acquire shares of the Company's capital stock, or securities
exchangeable or exercisable for or convertible into shares of the Company's
capital stock. Montgomery Securities may, in its sole discretion and at any time
without notice, release all or any portion of the securities subject to these
lock-up agreements. The Company has agreed that, for a period of 180 days from
the date of this Prospectus, it will not, directly or indirectly, sell, offer,
contract or grant any option to sell or otherwise dispose of any shares of
Common Stock, options or warrants to acquire shares of Common Stock, or
securities exchangeable or exercisable for or convertible into shares of Common
Stock, except that the Company may issue shares of Common Stock or options to
purchase Common Stock pursuant to any stock option, stock bonus or other stock
plan or arrangement described in this Prospectus, but only if the holders of
such shares or options agree in writing not to sell, offer, dispose of or
otherwise transfer any such shares or options during such 180-day period.
The Company intends to apply for listing of the Common Stock on
______________ under the symbol ____.
Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for the Common
Stock. Consequently, the initial public offering price of the Common Stock will
be determined by negotiations among the Representatives and the Company. Among
the factors considered in such negotiations will be the history of, and the
prospects for, the Company and the industry in which it competes, an assessment
of the Company's management, its past and present earnings and the trend of such
earnings, the general condition of securities markets at the time of this
offering and the market price of publicly traded stock of comparable companies
in recent periods.
LEGAL MATTERS
The validity of the shares offered hereby will be passed upon for the
Company by Stroock & Stroock & Lavan LLP, New York, New York. Certain legal
matters will be passed upon for the Underwriters by Hale and Dorr LLP, Boston,
Massachusetts.
EXPERTS
The audited financial statements included in this Prospectus and
elsewhere in the registration statement have been audited by Arthur Andersen
LLP, independent public accountants, as stated in their reports with respect
thereto, and are included herein, in reliance upon the authority of said firm as
experts in accounting and auditing in giving said reports.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
The Company has filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the
"Commission"), 450 Fifth Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20549, a Registration
Statement on Form S-1 (the "Registration Statement") under the Securities Act,
for the registration of the Common Stock offered by this Prospectus. Certain of
the information contained in the Registration Statement is omitted from this
Prospectus, and reference is hereby made to the Registration Statement and
exhibits relating thereto for further information concerning the Company and the
Common Stock. Statements contained herein concerning the provisions of any
document are not necessarily complete and in each instance reference is made to
the copy of the document filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement. Each
such statement is qualified in its entirety by this reference.
The Registration Statement and the exhibits thereto are available for
inspection in the principal office of the Commission in Washington, D.C. and
photostatic copies of such material may be obtained from the Commission upon
payment of the fees prescribed by the Commission. In addition, such material may
be electronically examined at the Commission's Web site on the Internet located
at http://www.sec.gov.
INDEX TO
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
PAGE
Report of Independent Public Accountants..................... F-2
Balance Sheets at February 3, 1996, February 1, 1997
and May 3, 1997 (unaudited)............................... F-3
Statements of Income for the fiscal years ended January 28,
1995, February 3, 1996 and February 1, 1997 and for the
three months ended May 4, 1996 (unaudited) and
May 3, 1997 (unaudited).................................... F-4
Statements of Changes in Stockholders' Equity (Deficit)
for the fiscal years ended January 28, 1995, February 3,
1996 and February 1, 1997 and for the three months ended
May 3, 1997 (unaudited).................................... F-5
Statements of Cash Flows for the fiscal years ended
January 28, 1995, February 3, 1996 and February 1, 1997
and for the three months ended May 4, 1996 (unaudited)
and May 3, 1997 (unaudited)............................... F-6
Notes to Financial Statements............................... F-7
After the stock split described in Note 15 to the Company's Financial
Statements is effected, we expect to be in a position to render the following
audit report which would appear in the final Prospectus.
/s/ ARTHUR ANDERSEN LLP
New York, New York
July 17, 1997
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS
To the Stockholders and Board of Directors
of The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.:
We have audited the accompanying balance sheets of The Children's
Place Retail Stores, Inc. (a Delaware corporation) as of February 1, 1997 and
February 3, 1996, and the related statements of income, changes in stockholders'
equity (deficit) and cash flows for each of the three fiscal years in the period
ended February 1, 1997. These financial statements are the responsibility of the
Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these
financial statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with generally accepted auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes
assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by
management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.
We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present
fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of The Children's Place
Retail Stores, Inc. as of February 1, 1997 and February 3, 1996, and the results
of its operations and its cash flows for each of three fiscal years in the
period ended February 1, 1997, in conformity with generally accepted accounting
principles.
New York, New York
March 13, 1997 (except with respect
to the matters discussed in Note 15,
as to which the date is ___, 1997)
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
BALANCE SHEETS
(Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
ASSETS
February 3, February 1, May 3,
1996 1997 1997
----------- ----------- ----------
(unaudited)
Cash and cash equivalents.......................................... $569 $3,422 $765
Accounts receivable................................................ 641 890 1,545
Inventories........................................................ 12,613 14,425 14,828
Prepaid expenses and other current assets.......................... 2,349 3,163 3,558
Deferred income taxes, net of valuation allowance.................. 0 5,788 5,788
------ ------- -------
Total current assets......................................... 16,172 27,688 26,484
Property and equipment, net........................................ 15,792 20,299 23,416
Deferred income taxes, net of valuation allowance.................. 0 14,711 14,217
Other assets....................................................... 109 1,781 1,817
Total assets ............................................... $32,073 $64,479 $65,934
======== ======== ========
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)
LIABILITIES:
Revolving credit facility.......................................... $8,689 $0 $659
Current portion of long-term debt.................................. 6,808 600 600
Current maturities of obligations under capital leases............. 692 772 660
Accounts payable................................................... 12,856 8,322 8,164
Accrued expenses, interest and other current liabilities........... 4,757 6,043 6,151
------- ------ -------
Total current liabilities................................. 33,802 15,737 16,234
Long-term debt .................................................... 7,373 19,040 18,970
Obligations under capital leases................................... 862 92 18
Other long-term liabilities........................................ 1,771 2,312 2,403
------ ------ -------
Total liabilities......................................... 43,808 37,181 37,625
-------- ------- -------
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT):
Preferred stock, $1 par value...................................... 10 0 0
Common stock, Series A, $.10 par value............................. 0 1,276 1,276
Common stock, Series B, $.10 par value............................. 0 5 5
Common stock, $.10 par value....................................... 14 0 0
Additional paid-in capital......................................... 50,557 57,842 57,842
Accumulated deficit................................................ (62,266) (31,825) (30,814)
Less: Treasury stock, 2,800 shares of common stock, at cost........ (50) 0 0
--------- --------- ---------
Total stockholders' equity (deficit)....................... (11,735) 27,298 28,309
--------- --------- ---------
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity (deficit)....... $32,073 $64,479 $65,934
========= ========= =========
The accompanying notes to financial statements are an integral part of
these balance sheets.
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
STATEMENTS OF INCOME
(Dollars in thousands except per share amounts)
Fiscal Year Ended Three Months Ended
----------------------------------------------- -----------------------
January 28, February 3, February 1, May 4, May 3,
1995 1996 1997 1996 1997
--------- --------- --------- -------- ----------
(unaudited) (unaudited)
Net sales............................ $107,953 $122,060 $143,838 $30,438 $39,203
Cost of sales........................ 74,229 83,434 89,786 20,200 25,185
--------- --------- --------- -------- ----------
Gross profit......................... 33,724 38,626 54,052 10,238 14,018
Selling, general and administrative
expenses........................... 27,392 30,407 35,768 7,683 9,695
Pre-opening costs.................... 178 311 982 75 472
Depreciation and amortization........ 3,344 3,496 4,017 912 1,233
-------- --------- -------- ------- -------
Operating income..................... 2,810 4,412 13,285 1,568 2,618
Interest expense, net................ 1,303 1,925 2,884 518 828
Other expense, net................... 481 797 879 403 100
-------- --------- ------- -------- --------
Income before income taxes and
extraordinary item................ 1,026 1,690 9,522 647 1,690
Provision (benefit) for income taxes.. 54 36 (20,919) 10 679
-------- -------- ---------- ------- -------
Income before extraordinary item....... 972 1,654 30,441 637 1,011
Extraordinary item--gain on forgiveness
of debt................................ 490 0 0 0 0
--------- --------- --------- -------- ----------
Net income.............................. $1,462 $1,654 $30,441 $637 $1,011
========= ========== ========== ======== ==========
Pro forma net income per common share (unaudited) $1.27 $0.04
Pro forma weighted average common
shares outstanding (unaudited)........ 23,903,392 23,903,392
----------- -----------
The accompanying notes to financial statements are an integral part of
these statements.
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)
FOR THE FISCAL YEARS ENDED JANUARY 28, 1995, FEBRUARY 3, 1996
AND FEBRUARY 1, 1997 AND FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED MAY 3, 1997
(Dollars in thousands, except share data)
Series A Series B Total
Preferred Common Common Common Treasury Stock-
Stock Stock Stock Stock Additional Stock holders'
------------- ------------- ------------ -------------- Paid-in Accumulated ------------ Equity
Shares Amount Shares Amount Shares Amount Shares Amount Capital Deficit Shares Amount (Deficit)
----- ------ ----- ----- ----- ----- ------ ------- ---------- ----------- ----- ----- ----------
BALANCE, January 29,
1994....... 10,000 $10 0 $0 0 $0 137,200 $14 $50,069 ($65,382) (2,800) ($50) ($15,339)
Subscription of common
stock........... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 488 0 0 0 488
Net income...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,462 0 0 1,462
------ --- --- ---- ---- ---- ------ --- ------ -------- ------ ----- ---------
BALANCE,
January 28, 1995... 10,000 10 0 0 0 0 137,200 14 50,557 (63,920) (2,800) (50) (13,389)
Net income....... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,654 0 0 1,654
-------- ------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -------- ------- --------------------- ------------- -----------
BALANCE,
February 3, 1996.. 10,000 10 0 0 0 0 137,200 14 50,557 (62,266) (2,800) (50) (11,735)
Surrendered preferred
stock........... (10,000) (10) 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0
Exercise of
stock options... 0 0 0 0 0 0 2,800 0 123 0 2,800 50 173
Issuance of
warrants........ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,501 0 0 0 1,501
Conversion of common stock to
Series A Common Stock... 0 0 16,800,000 1,680 0 0 (140,000) (14) (1,666) 0 0 0 0
Issuance of Series B Common
Stock, net of transaction
costs................ 0 0 0 0 47,238 5 0 0 18,758 0 0 0 18,763
Redemption of Series A
Common Stock........... 0 0(4,039,200)(404) 0 0 0 0 (11,441) 0 0 0 (11,845)
Net income.............. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30,441 0 0 30,441
----- ------ ------- ------ ------ ------- -------- --- ------- --------- -------- ----- --------
BALANCE, February 1, 1997 0 0 12,760,800 1,276 47,238 5 0 0 57,842 (31,825) 0 0 27,298
Net income(unaudited)... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,011 0 0 1,011
----- ---- ------- -------- ------- -------- --- ----- ------- ---------- --------- ------ -----------
BALANCE, May 3, 1997
(unaudited)............. 0 $0 12,760,800 $1,276 47,238 $5 0 $0 $57,842 ($30,814) 0 $0 $28,309
===== === ========= ======= ====== ======= ===== ==== ======== =========== ========= ===== ==========
The accompanying notes to financial statements are an integral part of
these statements
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
(Dollars in thousands)
Fiscal Year Eended Three Months Ended
---------------------------------------------------- -----------------------
January 28, Febuary 3, February 1, May 4, May 3,
1995 1996 1997 1996 1997
---------- --------- ---------- ------ ------
(unaudited)
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:
Net income............................... $1,462 $1,654 $30,441 $637 $1,011
Adjustments to reconcile net
income to net cash provided by
operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization......... 3,344 3,496 4,017 912 1,233
Deferred financing fee amortization... 0 0 359 0 151
Loss on disposals of property
and equipment......................... 0 156 0 (3) 10
Extraordinary gain.................... (490) 0 0 0 0
Deferred taxes........................ 0 0 (21,263) 0 494
Changes in operating assets
and liabilities:
Accounts receivable................ 38 (146) (249) (68) (655)
Inventories........................ (1,819) (1,601) (1,812) 2,815 (403)
Prepaid expenses and other
current assets..................... 454 (243) (814) 45 (395)
Other assets....................... 251 (29) (128) (117) (124)
Accounts payable................... (531) 5,691 (4,536) (3,422) (156)
Accrued expenses, interest
and other current liabilities...... 864 530 2,045 267 197
Payment of restructuring charges... (2,265) (1,854) (214) 0 0
---------- -------- --------- ------- -------
Total adjustments............... (154) 6,000 (22,595) 429 352
---------- -------- --------- ------- -------
Net cash provided by
operating activities..................... 1,308 7,654 7,846 1,066 1,363
---------- -------- --------- ------- -------
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:
Property and equipment
purchases............................. (2,723) (6,935) (8,492) (902) (4,343)
--------- ---------- --------- -------- ---------
Net cash used in investing activities.... (2,723) (6,935) (8,492) (902) (4,343)
--------- ---------- --------- -------- ---------
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:
Revolving credit facility, net............ 689 3,323 (8,689) 629 659
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt.. 2,987 0 20,000 0 0
Repayment of long-term debt............... (1,567) (3,436) (12,821) (601) (150)
Payment of obligations under capital leases (1,220) (387) (690) (164) (186)
Increase in bank overdrafts............... 299 0 0 0 0
Redemption of Series A Common Stock....... 0 0 (11,845) 0 0
Net proceeds from Series B Common Stock... 0 0 18,763 0 0
Exercise of stock options................. 0 0 173 0 0
Deferred financing costs.................. 0 0 (1,392) 0 0
-------- ----------- ---------- -------- ------
Net cash provided by (used in)
financing activities.................. 1,188 (500) 3,499 (136) 323
---------- ----------- ---------- -------- -------
Net increase (decrease) in cash and
cash equivalents...................... (227) 219 2,853 28 (2,657)
Cash and cash equivalents,
beginning of period................... 577 350 569 569 3,422
--------- ---------- -------- --------- --------
Cash and cash equivalents, end of period.. $350 $569 $3,422 $597 $765
========= ========== ======== ========= ========
The accompanying notes to financial statements are an integral part of
these statements.
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
(All information relating to the three months ended May 3, 1997 is
unaudited.)
1. BUSINESS AND ORGANIZATION OF THE COMPANY
The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the
"Company"), is a specialty retailer of high quality, value-priced apparel and
accessories for newborn to twelve year old children. The Company designs,
contracts to manufacture and sells its products under "The Children's Place"
brand name. As of February 1, 1997, the Company operated 108 stores, primarily
located in regional shopping malls in the eastern half of the United States.
During the fiscal year ended February 1, 1997 ("Fiscal 1996"), the
Company embarked on an aggressive expansion program. During Fiscal 1996, the
Company opened 18 new stores and substantially remodeled or relocated 5 stores.
During the three months ended May 3, 1997 (the "First Quarter Fiscal 1997"), 11
new stores were opened. During the fiscal year ended February 3, 1996 ("Fiscal
1995"), the Company opened 9 new stores. The Company's future operating results
will depend largely upon its ability to open and operate new stores successfully
and to manage a growing business profitably.
2. BASIS OF PRESENTATION AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES FISCAL YEAR
The Company's fiscal year is a 52-week or 53-week period ending on the
Saturday nearest to January 31. The results for fiscal 1994, 1995 and 1996
represent the 52-week period ended January 28, 1995 ("Fiscal 1994"), the 53-week
period ended February 3, 1996 and the 52- week period ended February 1, 1997,
respectively.
USE OF ESTIMATES
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally
accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and
assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities,
disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial
statements, and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the
reporting period. Actual results could differ from the estimates made by and
assumptions used by management.
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
In accordance with the Statement of Financial Accounting Standards
("SFAS") No. 95, "Statement of Cash Flows," the Company considers all highly
liquid investments with an original maturity of three months or less to be cash
equivalents.
INVENTORIES
Inventories, which consist primarily of finished goods, are stated at
the lower of average cost or market as determined by the retail inventory
method.
COST OF SALES
The Company includes its buying, distribution and occupancy expenses
in its cost of sales.
PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT
Property and equipment are stated at cost, except for store fixtures
and equipment under capital leases which are recorded at the present value of
the future lease payments as of lease inception. Property and equipment is
depreciated on a straight-line basis based upon their estimated useful lives,
which range from three to ten years. Amortization of property and equipment
under capital leases and leasehold improvements is computed on a straight-line
basis over the term of the lease or the estimated useful life, whichever is
shorter.
DEFERRED FINANCING COSTS
The Company capitalizes costs directly associated with acquiring
long-term third-party financing, including the value of the Legg Mason warrants
attributable to the debt financing portion of the 1996 Private Placement
discussed further in Note 3 - 1996 Private Placement and Note 10 - Stockholders'
Equity (Deficit). Deferred financing costs are included in other assets and are
amortized over the term of the indebtedness. As of February 1, 1997 unamortized
deferred financing costs were approximately $1.6 million, net of accumulated
amortization of $0.4 million. The Company expects to write-off its unamortized
deferred financing costs and debt discount in conjunction with its contemplated
repayment of debt following its initial public offering (see Note 15 -
Subsequent Events).
ACCOUNTING FOR IMPAIRMENTS IN LONG-LIVED ASSETS
The Financial Accounting Standards Board ("FASB") issued SFAS No. 121,
"Accounting for the Impairment of Long-Lived Assets and for Long-Lived Assets
Being Disposed Of," which the Company adopted in the First Fiscal Quarter 1996.
This statement requires that long-lived assets and identifiable intangibles be
reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate
that carrying amounts of the assets may not be recoverable. The Company
continually evaluates the carrying value and the economic useful life of its
long-lived assets based on the Company's operating performance and the expected
future net cash flows and will adjust the carrying amount of assets which may
not be recoverable. The Company does not believe that any impairment exists in
the recoverability of its long-lived assets.
PRE-OPENING COSTS
Store pre-opening costs, which consist primarily of payroll, supply
and advertising expenses, are expensed as incurred.
INCOME TAXES
The Company accounts for income taxes under Statement of Financial
Accounting Standards No. 109, "Accounting for Income Taxes" ("SFAS 109"). This
standard requires recognition of deferred tax assets and liabilities, measured
by enacted rates, attributable to temporary differences between financial
statement and income tax basis of assets and liabilities. Temporary differences
result primarily from accelerated depreciation and amortization for tax purposes
and various accruals and reserves being deductible for tax periods in future
periods. See Note 9-Income Taxes for a discussion of income taxes and the
Company's net operating loss carryforwards.
FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
SFAS No. 107, "Disclosures about Fair Values of Financial
Instruments," requires entities to disclose the fair value of financial
instruments, both assets and liabilities, recognized and not recognized in the
balance sheets, for which it is practicable to estimate fair value. For purposes
of this disclosure, the fair value of a financial instrument is the amount at
which the instrument could be exchanged in a current transaction between willing
parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale. Fair value is based on
quoted market prices for the same or similar financial instruments.
As cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable and payable, and
certain other short-term financial instruments are all short-term in nature,
their carrying amount approximates fair value. The fair values of the Company's
long-term debt are discussed further in Note 4--Short and Long-term Borrowings.
ACCOUNTING FOR STOCK BASED COMPENSATION
The Company accounts for its 1996 Stock Option Plan (the "1996 Plan")
under the provisions of Accounting Principles Bulletin ("APB") No. 25,
"Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees," under which no compensation cost has
been recognized. Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123,
"Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation" ("SFAS 123"), establishes a fair value
based method of accounting for stock-based compensation plans and requires
adoption or pro forma disclosure for all transactions entered into after
December 15, 1994. See Note 11--Stock Option Plan for a discussion of the
Company's pro forma disclosure of its 1996 Plan.
ACCOUNTING FOR COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
In June 1997, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued SFAS No.
130, "Reporting Comprehensive Income." Under SFAS No. 130, the Company will be
required to present comprehensive income in its primary financial statements.
Other comprehensive income represents revenues, expenses, gains and losses that
bypass the income statement. The Company will be required to display the
cumulative effect of other comprehensive income items as a separate component of
stockholders' equity, and present the components of other comprehensive income
in its income statement or statement of stockholders' equity. This statement is
effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 1997 and
reclassification of comparative information for prior years' financial
statements will be required. Management does not believe that the accompanying
financial statements will be affected by the adoption of SFAS No. 130, and will
adopt SFAS No. 130 during the first quarter of Fiscal 1998.
RECLASSIFICATIONS
Certain prior period balances have been reclassified to conform to
current year presentation.
UNAUDITED INTERIM FINANCIAL INFORMATION
All information with respect to the balance sheet as of May 3, 1997
and the statements of income, changes in stockholders' equity (deficit) and cash
flows for the three months ended May 4, 1996 ("First Quarter Fiscal 1996") and
First Quarter Fiscal 1997 is unaudited and has been prepared in accordance with
generally accepted accounting principles for interim financial presentation. In
the opinion of management, the unaudited financial statements contain all
adjustments necessary for a fair presentation of the results of such periods.
The unaudited financial statements have been prepared on a basis consistent with
that of the audited financial statements as of February 1, 1997. Certain
information and footnote disclosures normally included in financial statements
prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles have been
condensed or omitted pursuant to the rules and regulations of the Securities and
Exchange Commission. The results of operations for the First Quarter Fiscal 1997
are not necessarily indicative of the results of operations that may be expected
for the full year.
PRO FORMA NET INCOME PER COMMON SHARE
Pro forma net income per common share is calculated by dividing net
income by the pro forma weighted average common shares and common share
equivalents outstanding as if (i) the proposed stock split and Series B
conversion discussed in Note 15--Subsequent Events, (ii) the 1996 Private
Placement of Common Stock discussed in Note 3--Private Placements, (iii) the
cancellation of the preferred shares as discussed in Note 10--Stockholders'
Equity (Deficit) and (iv) the granting of management options in conjunction with
the 1996 Private Placement as discussed in Note 11--Stock Option Plan, occurred
on February 4, 1996. Common share equivalents include the Noteholder Warrant,
the Legg Mason Warrant, as discussed in Note 3-- 1996 Private Placement, and
management options to purchase common stock, calculated using the treasury stock
method in accordance with APB Opinion No. 15, "Earnings per Share," ("APB No.
15") at an estimated initial public offering price. Pro forma fully diluted net
income per common share is equal to the amount presented.
Historical net income (loss) per common share amounted to $(0.03),
$(0.01) and $2.06 for Fiscal 1994, Fiscal 1995 and Fiscal 1996 and to $0.01
(unaudited) and $0.04 (unaudited) for First Quarter Fiscal 1996 and First
Quarter Fiscal 1997, respectively. Weighted average common shares and common
share equivalents amounted to 16,464,000, 16,464,000, and 20,803,645 for Fiscal
1994, Fiscal 1995, and Fiscal 1996 and to 16,464,000 (unaudited) and 23,903,392
(unaudited) for First Quarter Fiscal 1996 and First Quarter Fiscal 1997,
respectively. Common share equivalents, calculated using the treasury stock
method as described above, include management options, the Noteholder warrant
and the Legg Mason warrant (see Note 3-- 1996 Private Placement). Net income
(loss) applicable to common shares was $(418,000), $(116,000) and $42,894,000
for Fiscal 1994, Fiscal 1995 and Fiscal 1996, respectively, and $215,000
(unaudited) and $1,011,000 (unaudited) for First Quarter Fiscal 1996 and First
Quarter Fiscal 1997, respectively. This reflects the deduction of the accretion
of preferred dividends of $1,880,000 and $1,770,000 for Fiscal 1994 and Fiscal
1995, respectively, and $422,000 (unaudited) for First Quarter Fiscal 1996. For
Fiscal 1996, reflected in net income applicable to common shareholders is a
credit of $12,453,000, representing cumulative preferred dividends in arrears
that went unpaid at the time of surrender of the preferred stock of
$13,147,000, offset by $694,000 of dividends accreting in Fiscal 1996 prior to
their surrender.
In February 1997, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued SFAS
No. 128, "Earnings per Share." Under SFAS No. 128, the presentation of both
basic and diluted earnings per share is required on the statements of income for
periods ending after December 15, 1997, at which time restatement will be
necessary. Had the provisions of SFAS No. 128 been in effect as of February 1,
1997 and during First Quarter Fiscal 1997, the Company would have reported pro
forma basic net income per share of $1.49 (unaudited) and $0.05 (unaudited) for
Fiscal 1996 and for the First Quarter Fiscal 1997, respectively. Under SFAS No.
128, pro forma diluted earnings per share is equal to the pro forma net income
per share currently disclosed by the Company.
3. 1996 PRIVATE PLACEMENT
During Fiscal 1996, the Company employed the services of Legg Mason
Wood Walker, Incorporated ("Legg Mason") to assist, as its placement agent, in
the recapitalization of the Company. As a result, pursuant to a Note and Warrant
Agreement dated June 28, 1996 (the "Note and Warrant Purchase Agreement")
between the Company and Nomura Holding America Inc. (the "Noteholder"), the
Company sold to the Noteholder, for a purchase price of $20 million, the
Company's 12% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2002 (the "Senior Subordinated
Notes") in the principal amount of $20 million, together with a warrant (the
"Noteholder Warrant") representing the right to purchase 1,992,252 shares of
Common Stock at an exercise price of $2.68 per share. This warrant was valued
for financial reporting purposes by an independent appraisal firm at
approximately $1.9 million. This amount has been accounted for herein as a
credit to additional paid-in capital, net of income tax effect of $0.8 million,
and a discount to the Senior Subordinated Notes, and is being amortized over the
six-year term of the Senior Subordinated Notes. The Company also paid the
Noteholder funding and structuring fees in the aggregate amount of $300,000.
Concurrent with the sale of the Senior Subordinated Notes, Legg Mason
assisted the Company in its sale of its newly issued Series B Common
Stock to two funds managed by Saunders Karp & Megrue L.P. ("SKM"), The SK Equity
Fund, L.P. and SK Investment Fund, L.P., together with a former consultant to
SKM (collectively, the "SKM Investors"). The aggregate proceeds from the sale of
the Series B Common Stock were approximately $20.5 million, before deducting
transaction costs of approximately $1.7 million. See Note 10- Stockholders'
Equity (Deficit) for a discussion of the Series B Common Stock. Concurrently
with the 1996 Private Placement, the Company paid a transaction fee of $250,000
to SKM and reimbursed SKM for $50,000 of out-of-pocket expenses.
Net proceeds from the sale of the Senior Subordinated Notes and the
issuance of the Series B Common Stock (collectively, the "1996 Private
Placement"), were used to (i) redeem certain outstanding shares of Common Stock
($11.8 million), (ii) repay certain indebtedness and related interest ($13.5
million), (iii) pay transaction costs ($3.1 million), (iv) reduce borrowings
under the Foothill Credit Facility (see Note 4-Short- and Long-term Borrowings)
and (v) for other general corporate purposes.
In conjunction with the 1996 Private Placement, Legg Mason received
$1.6 million in cash fees and a warrant to purchase 747,096 shares of Common
Stock at an exercise price of $2.68 per share (the "Legg Mason Warrant"). This
warrant was valued for financial reporting purposes by an independent appraisal
firm at approximately $700,000. An amount equal to 49.4% of the value of the
warrant, determined on the basis of gross proceeds from the 1996 Private
Placement, was attributable to the placement of the Senior Subordinated Notes,
has been credited to additional paid-in capital and capitalized as deferred
financing costs in other assets, and is being amortized over the six- year term
of the Senior Subordinated Notes. See Note 10-Stockholders' Equity (Deficit) for
a further discussion of the Legg Mason Warrant.
4. SHORT AND LONG-TERM BORROWINGS
SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS
THE FOOTHILL CREDIT FACILITY
On April 12, 1995, the Company entered into a revolving credit
facility (the "Foothill Credit Facility") with Foothill Capital Corporation
("Foothill Capital"). The Foothill Credit Facility provided for borrowings of up
to $15 million and up to $5 million of letters of credit. The Foothill Credit
Facility expires in April 1998, and provides for one year automatic renewal
options. In May 1996, the Foothill Credit Facility was amended to provide for up
to $20 million in borrowings and up to $10 million of letters of credit. As of
February 3, 1996 and February 1, 1997 the Company had $8.7 million in borrowings
and no borrowings, respectively, outstanding under the Foothill Credit Facility.
The availability of borrowings under the Foothill Credit Facility is
determined as an amount equal to the sum of (i) 90% of eligible accounts
receivable, (ii) 30% of the selling price of eligible inventory (not to exceed
60% of the cost of eligible inventory or 65% of the cost of eligible inventory
during the months of February, March, June, July, August and November) and (iii)
30% of the retail selling price of inventory to be acquired pursuant to
outstanding letters of credit (not to exceed the lower of (a) the face value of
the outstanding letters of credit or (b) 60% of the cost of inventory to be
acquired pursuant to outstanding letters of credit or 65% of the cost of such
inventory during the months of February, March, June, July, August, October and
November). The Company's obligations under the Foothill Credit Facility are
secured by a lien on the Company's present and future assets, intellectual
property and other general intangibles. The aggregate amounts available, before
taking into consideration borrowings outstanding, as of February 1, 1997 and May
3, 1997 (unaudited) were $11.9 million and $13.7 million, respectively. Letters
of credit outstanding as of February 3, 1996, February 1, 1997 and May 3, 1997
(unaudited) were $2.0 million, $4.7 million and $6.9 million, respectively.
The Foothill Credit Facility also contains certain financial covenants
including among others, the maintenance of minimum levels of tangible net worth,
working capital and current ratios and maximum capital expenditures, as defined
in the Foothill Credit Facility. The Company obtained a waiver from Foothill
Capital with respect to the capital expenditure limitations for fiscal 1996,
which enabled the Company to open additional stores in connection with its
expansion program. As of February 1, 1997, the Company was in compliance with
all of its other covenants under the Foothill Credit Facility.
The Foothill Credit Facility provides for borrowings at an interest
rate equal to the higher of (a) 9% per annum or (b) the sum of (i) 2.5% per
annum plus (ii) the highest of the variable rates of interest, per annum, most
recently announced by (x) Bank of America, T.A. & S.A., (y) Mellon Bank, N.A.
and (z) Citibank, N.A.; provided, however, that in no event may the amount of
interest accrued and payable under the Foothill Credit Facility be less than
$500,000 per year. As of each of February 3, 1996 and February 1, 1997, the
interest rate charged under the Foothill Credit Facility was 10.75%. In
addition, the Company was also required to pay an anniversary fee of $150,000
during Fiscal 1996 and $100,000 during the First Quarter Fiscal 1997.
Borrowing activity under the Foothill Credit Facility was as follows
(dollars in thousands):
For the Fiscal
Years Ended
-----------------------------
February 3, February 1,
1996 1997
---------- --------------
Weighted average balances outstanding.......... $9,556 $5,403
Weighted average interest rate................. 11.21% 10.75%
Maximum balance outstanding.................... $15,747 $12,687
For additional information on the pending amendment to the Foothill
Credit Facility, see Note 15-Subsequent Events.
LONG-TERM BORROWINGS
The fair value of the Company's long-term debt is estimated based on
the borrowing rates currently available to the Company for bank loans with
similar terms and maturities. Management believes that the carrying amount of
the Company's long-term debt approximates fair value. The components of the
Company's long-term debt are as follows (dollars in thousands) :
May 3,
February 3, February 1, 1997
1996 1997 (unaudited)
----------- ---------- -----------
Senior Subordinated Notes............... $ 0 $20,000 $20,000
Installment Notes....................... 4,610 1,360 1,210
Finchside Notes......................... 3,713 0 0
Skiva Note.............................. 3,358 0 0
Related party loan...................... 2,500 0 0
-------- -------- --------
14,181 21,360 21,210
Less: Current portion................... (6,808) (600) (600)
Less: Unamortized discount of Senior
Subordinated Notes................ 0 (1,720) (1,640)
--------- --------- --------
Total long-term debt.................. $ 7,373 $19,040 $18,970
========= ========= =========
THE SENIOR SUBORDINATED NOTES
The Senior Subordinated Notes, which mature in 2002, are in the
principal amount of $20.0 million and bear interest at a rate of 12% per annum,
payable quarterly in arrears on January 1, April 1, July 1 and October 1 of each
year, commencing on July 1, 1996. These notes have been discounted by $1.9
million relative to the valuation of the Noteholder Warrant for financial
reporting purposes (see Note 10-Stockholders' Equity (Deficit)). This discount
is being accreted into interest expense over the six year term of the Senior
Subordinated Notes.
The Senior Subordinated Notes are governed by the terms of a note and
warrant purchase agreement which provides for certain operating restrictions and
financial covenants. The Senior Subordinated Notes by their terms are
subordinated to borrowings under the Foothill Credit Facility. The Senior
Subordinated Notes rank senior to or pari passu with all other unsecured
indebtedness of the Company. The Senior Subordinated Notes may not be prepaid
prior to December 31, 1997, except upon consummation of an initial public
offering of the Company's Common Stock. On or after December 31, 1997 or, if
earlier, upon consummation of an initial public offering, the Senior
Subordinated Notes may be prepaid in whole or in part, upon payment of a
prepayment premium of 6% through December 31, 1998, decreasing to 4% during 1999
and 2% during 2000, with no prepayment premium thereafter. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, the Senior Subordinated Notes may be prepaid at any time without a
prepayment premium if concurrently with prepayment the Noteholder is afforded
the opportunity to sell at least 75% of the stock underlying its warrants in a
public offering of the Company. The Company obtained an amendment from the
Noteholder with respect to the capital expenditure limitations for fiscal 1996,
which enabled the Company to open additional stores in connection with its
expansion.
THE INSTALLMENT NOTES
On December 28, 1993, the Company agreed to be a co-maker of two
installment notes issued as of that date by the Chairman of the Board and
certain of his family members in connection with their bankruptcy proceedings.
Although the Company was a co-maker of the installment notes, the notes
expressly provided that they were non-recourse to the Company. The Company
agreed to be a co-maker of these installment notes in consideration for the
waiver of certain claims in the amount of $20.0 million for repayment of funds
previously loaned to the Company by its stockholders. One such installment note,
in the principal amount of $2,650,000 ("Note A"), was non-interest bearing and
provided for three annual principal payments. Note A was secured by a pledge of
shares of the Company's Common Stock held by the Chairman of the Board and
certain of his family members. Note A was repaid by the Company on July 1, 1996
with a portion of the net proceeds from the 1996 Private Placement. The other
installment note, in the principal amount of $2,110,000 ("Note B" and
collectively with Note A, the "Installment Notes"), provided for monthly
principal payments of $50,000, commencing November 30, 1995 and continuing
through October 31, 1998, with the remaining balance of $310,000 due on November
30, 1998. Interest on Note B accrued at the rate of 5% per annum for the first
two years only, of which 3% per annum was payable monthly and the remaining 2%
was added to the principal balance, to be paid at final maturity. Note B was
secured by a lien on certain personal assets of the Chairman of the Board and
certain of his family members. The Company repaid Note B on May 28,
1997 (unaudited).
THE FINCHSIDE NOTES
On June 28, 1991, the Company entered into a $10 million financing
agreement with Finchside International, Ltd. ("Finchside"), an unaffiliated
lender, which provided for irrevocable letters of credit, draft acceptances and
advances (up to 120 days) to finance inventory purchases. The Company
subsequently entered into a non-interest bearing agreement (the "Finchside
Notes") with Finchside on January 28, 1993 providing for the repayment of $7.6
million in past due amounts under the original financing agreement. The
Finchside Notes required installment payments of principal through June
1997. As a result of the Company's financial difficulties leading to its revised
agreement with Finchside, the issuance of the Finchside Notes was accounted for
as a troubled debt restructuring and therefore no interest was imputed on the
Finchside Notes. On July 22, 1994, the Company amended and extended the
remaining principal amount of the Finchside Notes of $5,712,000 over seven
non-interest bearing payments commencing December 1995 with full repayment
required by December 1998. On December 8, 1995, the Company further amended the
repayment schedule of the Finchside Notes to provide for a final maturity in
August 1998. The Finchside Notes were repaid on June 28, 1996 with a portion of
the net proceeds from the 1996 Private Placement.
THE SKIVA NOTE
During fiscal 1992, Skiva International, Inc. ("Skiva") agreed to
extend credit to the Company for working capital purposes, under an informal
financing arrangement personally guaranteed by certain stockholders of the
Company. As a result of a default by the Company during fiscal 1992, Skiva
accepted a note from the Company (the "Skiva Note") in the aggregate principal
amount of $4,473,000 with no interest. As a result of the Company's financial
difficulties leading to its revised arrangement with Skiva, the issuance of the
Skiva Note was accounted for as a troubled debt restructuring and therefore no
interest was imputed on the Skiva Note. In fiscal 1994, as the Company continued
to restructure its business, the terms of the Skiva Note were amended to extend
the repayment of the outstanding principal balance of $3,358,000, with no
interest, over nine quarterly installment payments commencing in December 1995.
On January 1, 1996, the Company further amended the Skiva Note to provide for a
revised repayment schedule, an annual interest rate of 10% on the remaining
balance and a $154,000 payment for accrued interest for the six month period
ended June 30, 1996. The Skiva Note was repaid on June 28, 1996 with a portion
of the net proceeds from the 1996 Private Placement.
RELATED PARTY LOANS
During the fiscal year ended January 29, 1994, the Chairman of the
Board, his father-in-law and his mother made loans to the Company for working
capital purposes in the aggregate amount of $2.5 million. The loans bore
interest at rates ranging from 4% to 8% per annum and were subordinated to the
Company's working capital facility with its senior lender. In addition, the
Chairman of the Board's father-in-law loaned the Company $300,000 in March 1996
at 8% per annum interest. All such loans were repaid with a portion of the net
proceeds of the 1996 Private Placement.
MATURITIES OF LONG-TERM DEBT
As of February 1, 1997, the aggregate maturities of long-term debt
were as follows (dollars in thousands):
1997.................................... $600
1998.................................... 760
1999.................................... 0
2000.................................... 0
2001.................................... 0
Thereafter.............................. 20,000
-------
21,360
Less: Current portion .................. 600
Less: Unamortized discount.............. 1,720
------------
Total long-term debt-- $19,040
============
5. SUPPLEMENTAL CASH FLOW INFORMATION
Cash paid for interest and income taxes were as follows (dollars in
thousands):
For the Three
For the Fiscal Years Ended Months Ended
----------------------------------------- ---------------------------
January 28, February 3, February 1, May 4, 1996 May 3, 1997
1995 1996 1997 (unaudited) (unaudited)
------------- ------------ ------------ ---------- -------------
Interest............................ $1,255 $1,916 $2,369 $377 $669
Income taxes........................ $ 0 $ 58 $ 70 $ 35 $401
======== ====== ====== ===== ====
6. PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT, NET
Property and equipment, net is comprised of the following (dollars in
thousands) :
May 3,
February 3, February 1, 1997
1996 1997 (unaudited)
------------ ---------- ----------
Leasehold improvements.......................................... $15,012 $19,226 $21,391
Store fixtures and equipment.................................... 6,610 8,604 10,673
Store fixtures and equipment under capital leases............... 3,642 3,642 3,642
Construction in progress........................................ 197 910 1,002
----------- --------- ----------
Property and equipment, gross................................... 25,461 32,382 36,708
Less: Accumulated depreciation and amortization................ (9,669) (12,083) (13,292)
----------- --------- -----------
Property and equipment, net..................................... $15,792 $20,299 $23,416
=========== ========= ===========
7. ACCRUED EXPENSES, INTEREST AND OTHER CURRENT LIABILITIES
Accrued expenses, interest and other current liabilities is comprised
of the following (dollars in thousands):
May 3,
February 3, February 1, 1997
1996 1997 (unaudited)
---------- ---------- -----------
Accrued salaries and benefits.................................. $1,236 $1,878 $1,813
Accrued interest............................................... 196 298 307
Accrued real estate expenses................................... 825 1,000 1,086
Customer liabilities........................................... 566 716 621
Accrued taxes other than income................................ 367 342 602
Other accrued expenses......................................... 1,567 1,809 1,722
-------- ------- -------
Accrued expenses, interest and other current liabilities....... $4,757 $6,043 6,151
======== ======== =======
8. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
The Company leases all of its stores, a distribution facility, and
certain office equipment and store fixtures under leases expiring at various
dates through 2008. Certain of the leases include options to renew. The leases
require fixed minimum annual rentals plus, under the terms of certain leases,
additional payments for taxes, other expenses and rentals based upon sales.
Rent expense is as follows (dollars in thousands):
For the Fiscal Years
Ended
------------------------------------------
January 28, February 3, February 1,
1995 1996 1997
------------ ------------- -------------
Store and distribution facility rent
Minimum rentals.......................... $8,915 $9,946 $11,221
Additional rent based upon sales......... 175 175 195
------------ ------------- -------------
Total store rent.............. 9,090 10,121 11,416
Store fixtures and equipment rent 711 712 727
------------ ------------- -------------
Total rent expense............... $9,801 $10,833 $12,143
============ ============= =============
Future minimum annual lease payments under the Company's operating and
capital leases with initial or remaining terms of one year or more, at February
1, 1997, are as follows (dollars in thousands):
Operating Capital
Leases Leases
------------- -------------
Fiscal year -
1997..................... $14,122 $828
1998..................... 14,245 92
1999..................... 13,891 0
2000..................... 13,277 0
2001..................... 10,608 0
Thereafter............... 36,869 0
------------- -------------
Total minimum lease payments........... $103,012 920
=============
Less: Interest and executory costs.... (56)
-------------
Present value of net minimum lease payments 864
Less: Current portion of obligations under capital lease (772)
-------------
Long-term obligations under capital lease $92
=============
LITIGATION
The Company, from time-to-time, is involved in litigation arising in
the normal course of its business. Management believes that the resolution of
all pending litigation, after considering reserves provided for in the
accompanying financial statements, will not have a material adverse effect on
the Company's financial position or results of operations.
9. INCOME TAXES
Components of the Company's provision (benefit) for income taxes
consisted of the following (dollars in thousands):
For the Fiscal Years Ended
---------------------------------------------
January 28, February 3, February 1,
1995 1996 1997
--------------- ----------- -------------
Current-
Federal................... $ 0 $36 $244
State..................... 54 0 100
Deferred-
Federal................... 0 0 859
State..................... 0 0 249
Valuation allowance....... 0 0 (22,371)
Provision (benefit) for ----- ----- ---------
income taxes.............. $ 54 $36 ($20,919)
====== ===== =========
A reconciliation between the calculated tax provision (benefit) on
income based on the statutory rates in effect and the effective tax rate follows
(dollars in thousands):
For the Fiscal Years Ended
----------------------------------------
January 28, February 3, February 1,
1995 1996 1997
------------ -------------- ------------
Calculated income tax provision..... $371 $575 $3,333
Reversal of valuation allowance .... 0 0 (21,042)
Utilization of operating loss
carryforwards ...................... (167) (537) ( 3,540)
State income taxes ................. 36 27 259
Nondeductible expenses ............. 12 21 24
Other.............................. (198) (50) 47
-------------- --------- ----------
Tax provision (benefit) as shown on
the statements of income ........... $54 $36 ($20,919)
============== ========== =============
Deferred income taxes reflect the impact of temporary differences
between amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes as
measured by tax laws. These temporary differences are determined in accordance
with SFAS No. 109.
Temporary differences and net operating loss carryforwards which give
rise to deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows (dollars in
thousands):
February 3, 1996 February 1, 1997
------------------------------------- -----------------------------
Deferred Tax Deferred Tax Deferred Tax Deferred Tax
Assets Liabilities Assets Liabilities
------------ ------------ ------------ ------------
Current-
Restructuring....................... $89 $0 $0 $0
Uniform inventory capitalization.... 181 0 258 0
Inventory........................... 121 0 16 0
Expenses not currently deductible... 114 0 514 0
Net operating loss carryforwards.... 0 0 5,000 0
-------- ---------- -------- ------
Total current.......... $505 $0 $5,788 $0
========= ========= ======== ======
Noncurrent-
Amortization of debt issue costs.... $0 $0 $66 $0
Depreciation........................ 1,021 0 921 0
Deferred rent....................... 609 0 925 0
Imputed interest on loans........... 0 (668) 139 0
Discount on Senior Subordinated Notes 0 0 0 688
Net operating loss carryforwards.... 20,904 0 13,348 0
-------- ------ -------- ------
Total noncurrent........... 22,534 ($668) 15,399 $688
-------- ======= -------- ========
Net noncurrent............. 21,866 14,711
--------- --------
Total............ 22,371 20,499
--------- ---------
Valuation allowance................ (22,371) 0
--------- ---------
Total deferred taxes............... $0 $20,499
========= ========
At February 1, 1997, the Company had net operating loss carryforwards
("NOLs") totaling approximately $45.9 million which expire for federal income
tax purposes during the fiscal years 2003 through 2006. The provisions of SFAS
109 require that the tax benefit of such NOLs be recorded as an asset and, to
the extent that management cannot assess that the utilization of all or a
portion of such deferred tax assets is more likely than not to be realized, a
valuation allowance should be recorded. At February 3, 1996, the Company had net
deferred tax assets amounting to approximately $22.4 million and management
believed it to be more likely than not that the deferred tax assets would not be
utilized based upon the historical performance of the Company. Accordingly, a
valuation allowance was recorded against the net deferred tax assets at February
3, 1996. During the fourth quarter of Fiscal 1996, the valuation allowance was
reversed because management believed it to be more likely than not that future
taxable income of the Company will be sufficient to utilize the Company's net
deferred tax assets of $20.5 million due to the Company's improved operating
results in Fiscal 1995 and Fiscal 1996 as well as the Company's projected
operating performance. Accordingly, the Company's net income for fiscal 1997 and
future years will require calculation of a tax provision based on statutory
rates in effect. Until the NOLs are fully utilized or expire, this tax
provision will not be paid in cash (other than to the extent of the federal
alternative minimum tax and state minimum taxes) but will reduce the deferred
tax asset on the balance sheet. The amount and availability of these NOLs are
subject to review by the Internal Revenue Service.
Under the provisions of the Internal Revenue Code, the occurrence of
certain events may affect the Company's ability to utilize its NOLs. The Company
does not believe any such events occurred during fiscal 1996.
10. STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)
The Company's preferred stock, Series A Common Stock, Series B Common
Stock and the common stock are comprised of the following (dollars in
thousands):
May 3,
February 3, February 1, 1997
1996 1997 (unaudited)
----------- ----------- -----------
Preferred stock:
Authorized number of shares.................... 10,000 10,000 10,000
Issued and outstanding number of shares........ 10,000 0 0
Liquidation preference........................ $35,953 0 0
Series A Common Stock:
Authorized number of shares................... n/a 27,600,000 27,600,000
Issued and outstanding number of shares....... n/a 12,760,800 12,760,800
Series B Common Stock:
Authorized number of shares................... n/a 70,000 70,000
Issued and outstanding number of shares....... n/a 47,238 47,238
Liquidation preference........................ n/a $20,506 $20,506
Common stock:
Authorized number of shares.................. 140,000 n/a n/a
Issued and outstanding number of shares....... 137,200 n/a n/a
Treasury stock:
Number of shares............................. 2,800 0 0
Warrants:
Number of shares of Series A Common Stock..... n/a 2,739,348 2,739,348
In conjunction with the Company's initial public offering, the Company
intends to effectuate a 120-for-one stock split of its Series A Common Stock and
anticipates a conversion of all outstanding Series B Common Stock into 7,659,889
shares of Common Stock (see Note 15 - Subsequent Events). The Company's
financial statements retroactively reflect such stock split. In addition, the
Series A Common Stock will be redesignated as Common Stock.
PREFERRED STOCK
The preferred stock was nonvoting and provided for cumulative
dividends. Dividends in arrears amounted to approximately $12.5 million, or
$1,245 per share at February 3, 1996. The Company did not declare or pay any
dividends during fiscal 1996. The shares of preferred stock were redeemable by
the Company at their issuance price plus accrued dividends, whether or not such
dividends were earned or declared. Accrued dividends were deducted from net
income to calculate net income applicable to common stockholders for historical
earnings per share purposes (See Note 2 - Basis of Presentation and Significant
Accounting Policies). On June 28, 1996, the outstanding shares of preferred
stock were surrendered for no consideration. Accordingly, at February 1, 1997,
10,000 shares are available for future issuance by the Company.
SERIES A COMMON STOCK
During Fiscal 1996, the Company converted all outstanding shares of
its common stock to 16,800,000 shares of Series A Common Stock. Pursuant to a
Redemption Agreement dated June 28, 1996, the Company redeemed a total of
4,039,200 shares of its Series A Common Stock from certain stockholders of the
Company for the aggregate amount of $11.8 million.
SERIES B COMMON STOCK
In conjunction with the 1996 Private Placement, the Company issued
47,238 shares of Series B Common Stock to the SKM Investors (see Note 3 - 1996
Private Placement).
The Series B Common Stock is currently convertible into 7,659,889
shares of Series A Common Stock, which would represent 30.8% of the outstanding
shares of the Series A Common Stock on a fully diluted basis. The conversion
ratio is subject to adjustment under certain circumstances. In the event of a
public offering, the liquidation preference and special voting rights of the
Series B Common Stock terminate thirty days after any such event, provided
certain conditions are met. The Series B Common Stock carries a liquidation
preference initially equal to its purchase price, increasing by 12.5% per annum.
After five years, if the Company has not effected an initial public offering,
the holders of the Series B Common Stock have the right subject to certain
conditions, to require the Company to repurchase the Series B Common Stock at a
price equal to the greater of its liquidation preference or fair market value.
The Company can avoid this repurchase by allowing the holders of the Series B
Common Stock to sell the entire company. The Series B Common Stock also has
certain registration rights. For additional information on the Series B Common
Stock, see Note 15--Subsequent Events.
COMMON STOCK
During Fiscal 1994, an executive officer of the Company forwarded funds
in the amount of $488,000 to the Company for the subscription for shares to be
issued to such executive officer, subject to approval of the Company's Board of
Directors, at a future date. Such shares were not issued as of February 1, 1997.
See Note 15 - Subsequent Events.
During Fiscal 1996, the Company converted all outstanding shares of its
common stock to 16,800,000 shares of Series A Common Stock.
TREASURY STOCK
During Fiscal 1993, the Company purchased 2,800 shares of common
stock for treasury for an aggregate price of $50,000. On June 5, 1996, an
executive officer officer of the Company exercised his option to purchase such
shares of treasury stock.
WARRANTS
In conjunction with the 1996 Private Placement (see Note 3-1996
Private Placement), the Company sold to the Noteholder a warrant to purchase
1,992,252 shares of the Series A Common Stock of the Company at an exercise
price of $2.68 per share. The Noteholder Warrant is exercisable for a ten year
period beginning after the earlier of January 10, 1997 or the date the Series A
Common Stock is first registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. The
Noteholder also has registration rights with respect to shares underlying the
Noteholder Warrant. This Noteholder Warrant was valued for financial reporting
purposes by an independent appraisal firm at approximately $1.9 million. This
amount has been accounted for herein as a credit to additional paid-in capital,
net of income taxes, and a discount to the Senior Subordinated Notes, and is
being amortized over the six-year term of the Senior Subordinated Notes.
The Company also issued a warrant to purchase 747,096 shares of the Series
A Common Stock of the Company at an exercise price of $2.68 per share to Legg
Mason. The Legg Mason Warrant was valued for financial reporting purposes by an
independent appraisal firm at approximately $700,000. An amount equal to 49.4%
of the value of the Legg Mason Warrant, determined on the basis of gross
proceeds from the 1996 Private Placement, was attributable to the placement of
the Senior Subordinated Notes, has been credited to paid-in capital and
capitalized as deferred financing costs in other assets, and is being amortized
over the six-year term of the Senior Subordinated Notes.
See Note 15--Subsequent Events for additional information about the
warrants.
11. STOCK OPTION PLAN
On June 28, 1996, the Company approved the adoption of the 1996 Stock
Option Plan (the "1996 Plan"). The 1996 Plan authorizes the granting of
incentive stock options and nonqualified stock options to key employees of the
Company. The Plan provides for the granting of options with respect to 1,743,240
shares of Series A Common Stock. The 1996 Plan is administered by a committee of
the Board of Directors (the "Committee"). Options granted under the 1996 Plan
will have an exercise price established by the Committee provided that the
exercise price of incentive stock options may not be less than the fair market
value of the underlying shares at the date of grant. The 1996 Plan also contains
certain provisions that require the exercise price of incentive stock options
granted to shareholders owning greater than 10% of the Company be at least 110%
of the fair market value of the underlying shares. At February 1, 1997, no stock
options were issued to any stockholders owning greater than 10% of the Company's
stock. Unless otherwise specified by the Committee, options will vest at the
rate of 20% six months from the date of grant and 20% on each of the first,
second, third and fourth anniversaries of the date of grant. On June 28, 1996,
options to purchase 1,444,080 shares were granted at the exercise price of $2.68
per share. No additional options were granted in Fiscal 1996. As of February 1,
1997, no options had been exercised under the 1996 Stock Option Plan. For
additional information on additional options being granted under the 1996 Plan,
see Note 15-Subsequent Events.
Effective February 1, 1997, the Company adopted the provisions of SFAS
123. As permitted by SFAS 123, the Company has elected to continue to account
for stock-based compensation using the intrinsic value method under Accounting
Principles Board Opinion No. 25. Accordingly, no compensation expense has been
recognized for stock-based compensation, since the options granted were at
prices that equaled or exceeded their estimated fair market value at the date of
grant. If compensation expense for the Company's stock options issued in 1996
had been determined based on the fair value method of accounting, for Fiscal
1996 the Company's net income would have been reduced to the pro forma amounts
indicated below:
Net income-
As reported $30,441,000
Pro forma $30,210,000
Pro forma net income
per share-
As reported $1.27
Pro forma $1.26
The fair value of issued stock options was estimated on the date of
grant using the Black- Scholes option pricing model incorporating the following
assumptions for options granted in Fiscal 1996: no dividend yield or volatility
factor; risk free interest rate of 6.46%; and an expected life of the options of
five years.
12. SAVINGS AND INVESTMENT PLAN
The Company has adopted The Children's Place 401(k) Savings and
Investment Plan (the "401(k) Plan"), which is intended to qualify under Section
401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended. The 401(k) Plan is a
defined contribution plan established to provide retirement benefits for all
employees who have completed one year of service with the Company and attained
21 years of age.
The 401(k) Plan is employee funded up to an elective annual deferral
and also provides an option for the Company to contribute to the 401(k) Plan at
the discretion of the 401(k) Plan's trustees. The Company did not exercise its
discretionary contribution option during Fiscal 1994, Fiscal 1995 and Fiscal
1996. In January 1997, the 401(k) Plan was amended whereby the Company will
match the lesser of 50% of the participant's contribution or 2.5% of the
participant's compensation.
13. QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA (UNAUDITED)
The following table summarizes the quarterly financial data for fiscal
1995 and fiscal 1996 (dollars in thousands):
Year Ended February 3, 1996
-------------------------------------------------------------------
First Second Third Fourth
Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter
------- ------- ------- -------
Net sales.............................. $25,433 $23,181 $33,713 $39,733
Gross profit........................... 7,224 5,530 11,640 14,232
Net income (loss)...................... (1,116) (2,959) 2,382 3,347
Year Ended February 1, 1997
First Second Third Fourth
Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter
Net sales.............................. $30,438 $25,974 $40,353 $47,073
Gross profit........................... 10,238 7,873 16,976 18,965
Net income (loss)...................... 637 (1,962) 5,350 26,416(1)
- ----------------------
(1) Includes a reversal of a valuation allowance on a net deferred tax asset
(see Note 9-Income Taxes).
14. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
Concurrently with the 1996 Private Placement, the Company entered into
a management agreement with SKM which provides for the payment of an annual fee
of $150,000, payable quarterly in advance, in exchange for certain financial
advisory services. Pursuant to the advisory agreement, the Company incurred fees
to SKM of approximately $93,000 in Fiscal 1996 and approximately $38,000 during
the First Quarter Fiscal 1997.
For additional information about related party transactions, see Note 3 -
1996 Private Placement, Note 4 - Short and Long Term Borrowings, and Note 10 -
Stockholders' Equity (Deficit).
15. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS
During July 1997, with respect to $488,000 of funds forwarded to the
Company during fiscal 1994 by an executive officer of the Company for the
subscription for shares of the Company's common stock (see Note 10--Stockholders
Equity (Deficit)), the Board of Directors determined to not issue such shares
and to refund the $488,000 to such executive officer prior to July 31, 1997.
The Company is currently finalizing an amended credit facility with
Foothill Capital to increase the Foothill Credit Facility from $20.0 million to
$30.0 million (including an increase in the sublimit for letters of credit from
$10.0 million to $20.0 million).
In July 1997, the Company filed a registration statement on Form S-1
with the Securities and Exchange Commission for an initial public offering of
________ shares of Common Stock. The Company intends to use the net proceeds of
the proposed offering to (i) pay the principal amount of, and accrued interest
on, the Senior Subordinated Notes, (ii) repurchase the Noteholder Warrant and
(iii) repurchase two-thirds of the Legg Mason Warrant. As a result of the
repayment of the Senior Subordinated Notes, the Company expects to incur a
non-cash, extraordinary charge to earnings during the third quarter of Fiscal
1997 of approximately $2.3 million, resulting from the write-off of unamortized
debt issuance costs and unamortized debt discount, net of taxes.
In conjunction with its proposed initial public offering, the Company
intends to effect a 120-for-one stock split of the Series A Common Stock (the
"Stock Split"), to convert all outstanding shares of the Series B Common Stock
into 7,659,889 shares of Series A Common Stock (the "Series B Conversion") and
to redesignate the Series A Common Stock as Common Stock (the
"Reclassification"). In addition, the Company expects that, prior to the
consummation of the initial public offering, the Company will amend and restate
its certificate of incorporation and bylaws in order to, among other things, (i)
effect the Series B Conversion, the Stock Split and the Reclassification, (ii)
authorize 100,000,000 shares of Common Stock, $.10 par value per share, (iii)
authorize one million shares of Preferred Stock, par value $1.00 per share,
without designation, and (iv) provide for certain anti-takeover provisions.
The Company also expects to enter into an amended and restated
stockholders agreement with all of its existing stockholders. In addition, the
Company intends to adopt a 1997 Stock Option Plan and is considering adopting an
Employee Stock Purchase Plan. Moreover, it is expected that, prior to the public
offering, options to purchase 299,160 shares of Common Stock will be granted to
one or more executive officers under the 1996 Plan and that, thereafter, no
further options will be granted under the 1996 Plan.
==============================================================================
No dealer, sales representative or any other person has been
authorized to give any information or to make any representations other than
those contained in this Prospectus, and, if given or made, such information or
representations must not be relied upon as having been authorized by the Company
or by the Underwriters. Neither the delivery of this Prospectus nor any sale
made hereunder shall under any circumstances create any implication that there
has been no change in the affairs of the Company since the date hereof. This
Prospectus does not constitute an offer to sell or a solicitation of an offer to
buy any securities offered hereby by anyone in any jurisdiction in which such
offer or solicitation is not authorized or in which the person making such offer
or solicitation is not qualified to do so or to anyone to whom it is unlawful to
make such solicitation.
------------------------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
------------------------
PAGE
Prospectus Summary.........................................
Risk Factors...............................................
Company History............................................
Use of Proceeds............................................
Dividend Policy............................................
Capitalization.............................................
Dilution ..................................................
Selected Financial and Operating Data
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations
Business...................................................
Management.................................................
Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners
and Management ..........................................
Certain Relationships and Related
Transactions...............................................
Description of Capital Stock...............................
Shares Eligible for Future Sale............................
Underwriting...............................................
Legal Matters..............................................
Experts ...................................................
Additional Information ....................................
Index to Financial Statements.............................. F-1
--------------------------
Until ____________, 1997 (25 days after the date of this Prospectus),
all dealers effecting transactions in the registered securities, whether or not
participating in this distribution, may be required to deliver a Prospectus.
This is in addition to the obligation of dealers to deliver a Prospectus when
acting as Underwriters and with respect to their unsold allotments or
subscriptions.
==============================================================================
____________ SHARES
THE CHILDREN'S
PLACE
COMMON STOCK
_____________
PROSPECTUS
_____________
MONTGOMERY SECURITIES
DONALDSON, LUFKIN & JENRETTE
Securities Corporation
SMITH BARNEY INC.
LEGG MASON WOOD WALKER
Incorporated
__________, 1997
PART II.
INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS
ITEM 13. OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION.
The following sets forth the estimated fees and expenses in connection
with the issuance and distribution of the Registrant's securities being
registered hereby, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, all of
which will be borne by the Registrant:
Securities and Exchange Commission registration fee... $21,212
National Association of Securities Dealers filing fee. 7,500
[listing fee]......................................... *
Printing and engraving expenses....................... *
Legal fees and expenses............................... *
Accounting fees and expenses.......................... *
Blue Sky fees and expenses............................ 11,800
Transfer Agent's fees................................. *
Miscellaneous expenses................................ *
-------
Total........................................ $ *
==========
* To be filed by Amendment
ITEM 14. INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS.
The Company's Certificate of Incorporation limits the liability of
directors (in their capacity as directors but not in their capacity as officers)
to the Company or its stockholders to the fullest extent permitted by the DGCL.
Specifically, no director of the Company will be personally liable for monetary
damages for breach of the director's fiduciary duty as a director, except for
liability: (i) for any breach of the director's duty of loyalty to the Company
or its stockholders; (ii) for acts or omissions not in good faith or which
involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law; (iii) under
Section 174 of the DGCL, which relates to unlawful payments of dividends or
unlawful stock repurchases or redemptions, or any successor provision thereto;
or (iv) for any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal
benefit. The inclusion of this provision in the Certificate of Incorporation may
have the effect of reducing the likelihood of derivative litigation against
directors, and may discourage or deter stockholders or management from bringing
a lawsuit against directors for breach of their duty of care, even though such
an action, if successful, might otherwise have benefited the Company and its
stockholders.
Under the Certificate of Incorporation, the Company will indemnify
those persons whom it shall have the power to indemnify to the fullest extent
permitted by Section 145 of the DGCL, which may include liabilities under the
Securities Act of 1933. Accordingly, in accordance with Section 145 of the DGCL,
the Company will indemnify any person who was or is a party, or is threatened to
be made a party, to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or
proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (other than
a "derivative" action by or in the right of the Company) by reason of the fact
that such person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the
Company, against expenses (including attorneys' fees), judgments, fines and
amounts paid in settlement in connection with such action, suit or proceeding if
such person acted in good faith and in a manner such person reasonably believed
to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Company, and, with respect
to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe was
unlawful. A similar standard of care is applicable in the case of derivative
actions, except that indemnification only extends to expenses (including
attorneys' fees) incurred in connection with the defense or settlement of such
an action and then, where the person is adjudged to be liable to the Company,
only if and to the extent that the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware or
the court in which such action was brought determines that such person is fairly
and reasonably entitled to such indemnity and then only for such expenses as the
court deems proper.
The Certificate of Incorporation provides that the Company will
advance expenses to the fullest extent permitted by Section 145 of the DGCL.
Accordingly, the Company, in accordance therewith, will pay for the expenses
incurred by an indemnified person in defending the proceedings specified in the
preceding paragraph in advance of their final disposition, provided that, if the
DGCL so requires, such person agrees to reimburse the Company if it is
ultimately determined that such person is not entitled to indemnification. In
addition, pursuant to the DGCL the Company may purchase and maintain insurance
on behalf of any person who is or was a director, employee or agent of the
Company against any liability asserted against and incurred by such person in
such capacity, or arising out of the person's status as such whether or not the
Company would have the power or obligation to indemnify such person against such
liability under the provisions of DGCL. The Company intends to obtain insurance
for the benefit of the Company's officers and directors insuring such persons
against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the securities laws.
The Company has entered into agreements to indemnify its directors
which are intended to provide the maximum indemnification permitted by Delaware
law. These agreements, among other things, indemnify each of the Company's
outside directors for certain expenses (including attorneys' fees), judgments,
fines and settlement amounts incurred by such director in any action or
proceeding, including any action by or in the right of the Company, on account
of such director's service as a director of the Company.
ITEM 15. RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES.
Within the three years preceding the filing of this Registration
Statement, the Company has sold and issued the following securities without
registration under the Securities Act (all share numbers and per share amounts
have been adjusted to reflect the 120-to-one stock split to occur prior to
consummation of the offering):
In July 1996, in connection with the 1996 Private Placement described
in the Prospectus, the Company issued the following equity securities:
(i) a total of 47,238 shares of the Company's Series B Common
Stock were sold to the SKM Investors for an aggregate purchase price of
$20.5 million. Such shares of Series B Common Stock were convertible
into 7,659,889 shares (subject to adjustment under certain
circumstances) of Series A Common Stock (representing approximately
30.8% of the Series A Common Stock on a fully diluted basis).
Immediately prior to the consummation of the Company's initial public
offering, all outstanding shares of Series B Common Stock will be
converted into a total of 7,659,889 shares of Common Stock.
(ii) The Company issued to the Noteholder , in connection with
the Noteholder's purchase of the Company's Senior Subordinated Notes,
the Noteholder Warrant. The Noteholder Warrant entitles the holder
thereof to purchase 1,992,252 shares of Series A Common Stock
(representing approximately 8% of the Series A Common Stock on a fully
diluted basis) at an exercise price of $2.68 per share. The total
purchase price of the Senior Subordinated Notes and the Noteholder
Warrant was $20.0 million. Upon consummation of the Company's initial
public offering, the Company will repurchase the Noteholder Warrant as
described under "Use of Proceeds."
(iii) The Company issued to Legg Mason, as partial
compensation for Legg Mason's services as placement agent in connection
with the 1996 Private Placement, the Legg Mason Warrant. The Legg Mason
Warrant entitles the holder thereof to purchase 747,096 shares of
Series A Common Stock (representing approximately 3% of the Series A
Common Stock on a fully diluted basis) at an exercise price of $2.68
per share. Upon consummation of the Company's initial public offering,
the Company will repurchase two-thirds of the Legg Mason Warrant as
described under "Use of Proceeds."
During fiscal 1994, an executive officer of the Company forwarded
funds in the amount of $488,000 to the Company for the subscription for shares
to be issued to such executive officer, subject to approval of the Company's
Board of Directors, at a future date. During July 1997, the Board of Directors
determined to not issue such shares and to refund the $488,000 to such executive
officer prior to July 31, 1997.
On June 5, 1996, an executive officer of the Company exercised an
option to purchase 336,000 shares of Common Stock held in treasury. The purchase
price for such shares was $50,000.
All securities issued in the above-described transactions were offered
and sold in reliance upon the exemption from registration under Section 4(2) of
the Securities Act.
ITEM 16. EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES.
(a) Exhibits.
Exhibit
NO. DESCRIPTION OF DOCUMENT
1.1* Form of Underwriting Agreement.
3.1* Form of Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the
Company.
3.2* Form of Amended and Restated ByLaws of the Company.
4.1* Form of Certificate for Common Stock of the Company.
5.1* Opinion of Stroock & Stroock & Lavan LLP as to the validity of the
securities being registered.
9.1* Form of Amended and Restated Stockholders Agreement,
dated _____ __,1997.
10.1* 1996 Stock Option Plan of The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.
10.2* Form of 1997 Stock Option Plan of The Children's Place Retail Stores,
Inc.
10.3* The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc. 401(k) Savings and Investment
Plan.
10.4* Form of The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc. Employee Stock Purchase
Plan.
10.5* The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc. Management Incentive Plan.
10.6* Form of Amended and Restated Loan and Security Agreement dated as of
July __, 1997, between the Company and Foothill Capital Corporation.
10.7 Merchant Services Agreement dated December 12, 1994 between the Company
and Hurley State Bank.
10.8 Employment Agreement dated as of June 27, 1996 between the Company and
Ezra Dabah.
10.9 Employment Agreement dated as of June 27, 1996 between the Company and
Stanley B. Silver.
10.10* Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Company and the members
of its Board of Directors.
10.11 Lease Agreement dated August 11, 1993 between the Company and Suburban
Mall V Associates, as amended by First Amendment to Lease, dated
October 21, 1994 between the Company and Suburban Mall V Associates.
10.12* Form of Amended and Restated Registration Rights Agreement,
dated ____ __, 1997.
23.1 Consent of Arthur Andersen LLP.
23.2* Consent of Stroock & Stroock & Lavan LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1).
24.1 Power of Attorney (included on signature page to this Registration
Statement).
27.1 Financial Data Schedule.
- ---------------
* To be filed by Amendment.
(b) Financial Statement Schedules.
None.
All schedules for which provision is made in the applicable
regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission are not required under the
related instructions or are inapplicable, and therefore have been omitted.
ITEM 17. UNDERTAKINGS.
The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the
Underwriters at the closing specified in the Underwriting Agreement certificates
in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the
Underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.
Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the
Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons
of the Registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions in Item 14, or otherwise,
the Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and
Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed
in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a
claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by
the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or
controlling person of the Registrant in the successful defense of any action,
suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person
in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless
in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling
precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether
such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the
Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes that:
(1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities
Act, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part
of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained
in a form of prospectus filed by the Registrant pursuant to Rule
424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to
be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared
effective.
(2) For the purpose of determining any liability under the
Securities Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of
prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating
to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities
at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering
thereof.
SIGNATURES
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the
Registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its
behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of West
Caldwell, State of New Jersey, on July 17, 1997.
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
By:/s/ EZRA DABAH
Ezra Dabah
Chairman of the Board and
Chief Executive Officer
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that each person whose signature
appears below constitutes and appoints Ezra Dabah, Stanley B. Silver, Steven
Balasiano and Seth L. Udasin and each of them, his true and lawful
attorneys-in-fact and agents with full power of substitution and resubstitution
for him and in his name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any
or all amendments (including post-effective amendments) of and supplements to
this Registration Statement and any Registration Statement relating to any
offering made pursuant to this Registration Statement that is to be effective
upon filing pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, and to file the
same, with all exhibits thereto, and other documents in connection therewith,
with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto such
attorneys-in-fact and agents and each of them full power and authority to do and
perform each and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done in and
about the premises, to all intents and purposes and as fully as they might or
could do in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that such
attorneys-in-fact and agents, or their substitutes, may lawfully do or cause to
be done by virtue hereof.
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this
Registration Statement has been signed below by the following persons in the
capacities and on the dates indicated.
SIGNATURE TITLE DATE
/s/ EZRA DABAH Chairman of the Board July 17, 1997
Ezra Dabah of Directors and
Chief Executive
Officer (Principal
Executive Officer)
/s/ STANLEY B. SILVER President, Chief July 17, 1997
Stanley B. Silver Operating Officer and
Director
/s/ SETH L. UDASIN Vice President and July 17, 1997
Seth L. Udasin Chief Financial
Officer (Principal
Financial and
Accounting Officer)
/s/ STANLEY SILVERSTEIN Director July 17, 1997
Stanley Silverstein
/s/ JOHN MEGRUE Director July 17, 1997
John Megrue
/s/ DAVID J. ODDI Director July 17, 1997
David J. Oddi
EXHIBIT INDEX
-------------
Exhibit
NO. DESCRIPTION OF DOCUMENT
1.1* Form of Underwriting Agreement.
3.1* Form of Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the
Company.
3.2* Form of Amended and Restated ByLaws of the Company.
4.1* Form of Certificate for Common Stock of the Company.
5.1* Opinion of Stroock & Stroock & Lavan LLP as to the validity of the
securities being registered.
9.1* Form of Amended and Restated Stockholders Agreement,
dated _____ __,1997.
10.1* 1996 Stock Option Plan of The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.
10.2* Form of 1997 Stock Option Plan of The Children's Place Retail Stores,
Inc.
10.3* The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc. 401(k) Savings and Investment
Plan.
10.4* Form of The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc. Employee Stock Purchase
Plan.
10.5* The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc. Management Incentive Plan.
10.6* Form of Amended and Restated Loan and Security Agreement dated as of
July __, 1997, between the Company and Foothill Capital Corporation.
10.7 Merchant Services Agreement dated December 12, 1994 between the Company
and Hurley State Bank.
10.8 Employment Agreement dated as of June 27, 1996 between the Company and
Ezra Dabah.
10.9 Employment Agreement dated as of June 27, 1996 between the Company and
Stanley B. Silver.
10.10* Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Company and the members
of its Board of Directors.
10.11 Lease Agreement dated August 11, 1993 between the Company and Suburban
Mall V Associates, as amended by First Amendment to Lease, dated
October 21, 1994 between the Company and Suburban Mall V Associates.
10.12* Form of Amended and Restated Registration Rights Agreement,
dated ____ __, 1997.
23.1 Consent of Arthur Andersen LLP.
23.2* Consent of Stroock & Stroock & Lavan LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1).
24.1 Power of Attorney (included on signature page to this Registration
Statement).
27.1 Financial Data Schedule.
- ---------------
* To be filed by Amendment.
EXHIBIT 10.7
MERCHANT SERVICES AGREEMENT
This MERCHANT SERVICES AGREEMENT (hereinafter the "Agreement") made as of
December 12, 1994, by and between HURLEY STATE BANK ("Bank"), a banking
corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of South Dakota,
with its offices at Sioux Falls, South Dakota, and THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL
STORES, INC. (the "Company"), a corporation organized and existing under the
laws of the State of Delaware, with its offices at One Dodge Drive, West
Caldwell, New Jersey 07006.
WITNESSETH:
WHEREAS, Bank intends to issue to consumers private label credit cards for
use at specific retail establishments and desires to offer to certain consumers
the ability to use a Bank- issued credit card with Company's name and logo
appearing on such card for the purchase of goods and services normally offered
by Company ("Authorized Services") at Company locations; and
WHEREAS, Company is in the business of providing Authorized Services and
desires to offer consumers the convenience of using a Bank-issued credit card
with Company's name and logo appearing on such card in payment therefor; and
WHEREAS, Bank directly or through its designee will operate and administer
a merchant authorization and settlement program whereby, subject to certain
conditions, Bank will authorize certain Bank-issued credit card transactions for
Company and Company or its designated agent will present Bank with transaction
records for payment; and
WHEREAS, Bank and Company acknowledge that this Agreement constitutes a
financial accommodation between the parties for purposes of federal bankruptcy
law.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing premises and mutual
covenants hereinafter set forth and for other good and valuable consideration,
the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, Bank and Company
agree as follows:
ARTICLE I - DEFINITIONS
1.1 DEFINITIONS. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the following
terms shall have the meaning specified herein:
"Account" means a Card account. An Account may have more than one Card
issued for it. Any Account shall be deemed to be the property of Bank and Bank
shall establish the terms and conditions under which Accounts will be
established.
"Authorization" means permission from Bank to make a Card Sale.
"Authorization Center" means the facility designated by Bank as the
facility at which Card Sales are authorized.
"Business Day" means Mondays through Fridays except days when Bank is
closed for business.
"Card" means a credit card issued by Bank with Company's name and logo
appearing on such card or with such other design as mutually acceptable to the
parties, which evidences an Account. During the term of this Agreement Company
shall not issue, arrange to issue, or accept any other private label credit
card, or private label credit account, including any credit card or account
under any of its names or logos or that would otherwise compete with the Card
Plan except as provided hereunder.
"Card Plan" means the program under which Accounts will be established and
Cards issued to Cardholders.
"Card Sale" means any sale of Authorized Services that Company makes to a
Cardholder pursuant to this Agreement that is charged to an Account.
"Cardholder" means (i) the person in whose name an Account is maintained
and (ii) an authorized user of that Account.
"Chargeback" means the refusal of Bank to pay Company for a Card Sale or
Company's reimbursement of Bank for a Card Sale for which Company was previously
paid.
"Credit" means a non-cash refund issued by Company to a Cardholder of all
or a portion of the amount of a Card Sale.
"Credit Slip" means evidence of a Credit in paper form.
"Electronic Location" means a Company location at which there is an
Electronic Terminal.
"Electronic Terminal" means an electronic terminal or computer capable of
communicating by means of an on-line or dial-up electronic link (whether routed
through Bank's facilities or otherwise) with an Authorization Center to obtain
Authorization. Company agrees that the Electronic Terminals it uses hereunder
shall be those provided to Company by Bank or its designee (at Company's
expense) or shall be otherwise reasonably acceptable to Bank.
"Floor Limit" means the United States dollar amount designated by Bank, as
it may be changed from time to time, at or above which Authorization must be
obtained to make a Card Sale.
"Operating Regulations" means the standard operating procedures of Bank, as
they may be changed from time to time, which shall be provided to Company upon
written request therefor. For purposes of this Agreement, the Operating
Regulations shall be deemed an integral part of the Agreement and references to
the Agreement shall be deemed to include the Operating Regulations.
"Sales Data" means Card Sales and Credits whether in paper form, in the
form of magnetic tape, or in a form in which the data representing Card Sales
and Credits are electronically transmitted.
"Sales Slip" means evidence of a Card Sale in paper form.
"Settlement" means the reimbursement to Company for the net amount of Card
Sales and Credits remitted to Bank.
"Settlement Account" means the deposit account(s) at the financial
institution(s) designated by Company as the account(s) to be debited and/or
credited, as applicable, for the Settlement of Card transactions and the payment
of any fees and charges due hereunder.
1.2. CONSTRUCTION. Unless the context otherwise clearly indicates, words
used in the singular include the plural and words used in the plural include the
singular.
ARTICLE II - ISSUANCE OF ACCOUNTS AND ACCEPTANCE OF CARDS
2.1 CONDITIONS OF OPENING ACCOUNTS. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this Agreement, Bank shall receive Cardholder applications and approve or
decline Accounts in accordance with Bank's Account issuance criteria.
(a) WRITTEN APPLICATIONS. Applications which are received by Bank through
the mail and are not made contemporaneously with a sale shall be reviewed in
accordance with Bank's customary practice for written applications.
(b) APPLICATIONS WITH ACCOMPANYING SALE. Applications telephoned to Bank by
Company's employees in conjunction with a sale shall be reviewed by Bank in
accordance with Bank's criteria. Company shall be responsible for the following:
(i) Providing all information found on Customer's Application
which has been requested by Bank's representative.
(ii) Obtaining positive identification and verification of the
individual applying for the Account by obtaining a valid driver's
license number, state identification card number, or other
identification card number acceptable to Bank.
(iii) Obtaining the signature on the application of all persons
whose name will appear on the Account or will be responsible for the
Account.
(iv) Upon either approval or decline, the application must be
sent to Bank at the designated address within five (5) business days.
(v) The sale must be entered into Company's Electronic Terminal.
If requested to do so by Bank's representative, Company's employee
shall also enter into the Electronic Terminal the approval code
provided by Bank.
Failure to adhere to the above procedures shall result in a Chargeback in
accordance with paragraph 2.10 of this Agreement.
2.2 HONORING OF CARDS.
(a) CONDITIONS FOR HONORING CARDS. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this Agreement, Company agrees to accept the Card for payment of Authorized
Services in those instances when a Cardholder wishes to charge the purchase of
such Authorized Services to his/her Account and shall not attempt to suppress or
discriminate against use of a Card by a Cardholder (except in accordance with
this Agreement). Company shall accept the Card at all of its participating
locations in the United States for the purchase of Authorized Services, provided
the Card transactions resulting from such acceptance of the Card are submitted
to Bank in United States dollars. Bank will advise Company if it develops the
capability of accepting Card transactions in currencies other than United States
dollars. In such event, Card transactions may be made in such other currencies
upon terms and conditions to be mutually determined at that time. If any
facility or service is operated on Company premises under a franchise, lease or
license from Company and such franchisee, lessee or licensee (who is not a party
to a merchant services agreement with Bank) agrees with Company to accept Cards,
Card Sales incurred at such facility or service shall be subject to the terms
and conditions of this Agreement and must be handled through Company as if it
had transacted such Card Sales. Company shall be obligated to pay its
franchisee, lessee or licensee with respect to such Card Sales.
(b) COMMENCEMENT OF CARD ACCEPTANCE. Acceptance of Cards by Company shall
commence on or about the date of this Agreement or as soon thereafter as agreed
to by the parties and shall continue until the termination of the Agreement.
2.3 ACCEPTANCE OF CARDS. Company shall accept each Card presented by a
Cardholder as payment for Authorized Services provided that all of the following
conditions are met with respect to each Card Sale and that Company further
complies with all of the procedures set forth elsewhere in this Agreement and in
the Operating Regulations relating to the acceptance of Cards each time it makes
a Card Sale:
(a) The Card is presented to Company on or before the expiration date, if
any, shown on its face;
(b) The Card is used as payment for Authorized Services purchased by a
Cardholder;
(c) Company will not accept a Card for the purpose of advancing money to a
Cardholder or paying money to a Cardholder for any amount that is included in a
Card Sale;
(d) Company has followed the procedures for the completion of Sales Slips
as set forth in paragraph 2.5 below; and
(e) Company has obtained Authorization for the Card Sale if required
pursuant to paragraph 2.6 below.
2.4 OPERATING REGULATIONS. The Operating Regulations may be changed by Bank
from time to time upon sixty (60) days' prior written notice to Company,
provided, however, that changes which do not require major systems or
operational modifications and changes required for security measures shall be
made effective as soon as possible following Company's receipt of notice thereof
but in all events shall become effective within five (5) days of Company's
receipt of notice thereof. In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between
the terms of this Agreement and those of the Operating Regulations, the former
shall govern.
2.5 COMPLETION OF SALES SLIPs.
(a) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. For each Card Sale, Company shall prepare a Sales
Slip using a form that is mutually acceptable to Bank and Company, e.g., a
universal sales slip. Each Sales Slip must be legible and fully completed with
the following information:
(i) The date and, unless otherwise provided to Bank, e.g. batch
reports, etc., location (city/state) of the Card Sale;
(ii) A brief description of the Authorized Services;
(iii) The total amount of the Card Sale, including tax;
(iv) The Account number;
(v) The expiration date, if any, of the Card;
(vi) The Authorization number or code (where applicable); and
(vii) Company's merchant number, unless otherwise provided to
Bank, e.g. batch reports.
Each Sales Slip shall be imprinted to obtain a clear imprint of the Card;
provided that in the case of Sales Data which are electronically produced by
Company, Company shall not be required to obtain an imprint of the Card. Company
shall include all Authorized Services purchased in a single transaction on one
Sales Slip except for customer deposits or partial payments. Company will not
collect tax separately in cash in connection with any Card Sale.
(b) CARDHOLDER'S SIGNATURE. A Sales Slip must be signed by the Cardholder
for each Card Sale at the time the Card Sale is made and in the presence of an
authorized representative or employee of Company. The signature on the Sales
Slip must be reasonably similar to the signature appearing on the signature
panel of the Card. After completion of the Card Sale, Company shall provide a
legible and completed copy of the Sales Slip to the Cardholder. If Company fails
to obtain the signature of the Cardholder on a Sales Slip and the Cardholder has
not authorized the Card Sale or denies the validity of the Card Sale, the Card
Sale shall be subject to Chargeback pursuant to paragraph 2.10 below.
2.6 AUTHORIZATION.
(a) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. In accordance with the terms of this paragraph
2.6, Company shall obtain Authorization for each proposed Card Sale at or above
the Floor Limit. For purposes of this Agreement, the purchase of one or more
items or other Authorized Services made by a Cardholder at one Company location
and at one time shall be deemed to constitute a single Card Sale.
(b) FLOOR LIMIT. Except as provided in paragraph 2.6(c)(ii) below, the
Floor Limit shall be $0. Bank may change the Floor Limit upon notice to Company.
(c) OBTAINING AUTHORIZATION.
(i) ELECTRONIC LOCATIONS. To obtain Authorization for Card Sales
made at Electronic Locations, Company shall utilize an Electronic
Terminal in accordance with procedures applicable for the use of that
terminal. At an Electronic Location, if a referral code is displayed
on an Electronic Terminal, Company shall telephone Bank to obtain
further instructions, using a toll-free telephone number provided by
Bank for such purpose.
(ii) NON-ELECTRONIC AUTHORIZATION. To obtain Authorization when
Bank's electronic capability to provide Authorization or Company's
electronic capability to obtain Authorization is not operational,
Company shall contact Bank using a toll-free telephone number provided
by Bank for such purpose. If the Authorization Center approves the
Card Sale, Company will be given an Authorization code or number which
must be written on the Sales Slip. In the event that Bank's electronic
capability to provide Authorization is not operational, the downtime
Floor Limit shall be $50.00, or such other amount as Bank may
determine and communicate to Company.
(d) RIGHT OF CHARGEBACK. If Authorization for any Card Sale is required but
not obtained by Company, or requested by Company but declined by Bank, Bank may
process a Chargeback for such Card Sale pursuant to paragraph 2.10 below.
(e) CANCELLATION OF AUTHORIZATION. At its expense, Bank shall make
available during Bank's normal authorization hours, a toll-free number which
Company may call in the event a previously authorized Card Sale is cancelled by
the Cardholder.
2.7 SETTLEMENT OF CARD TRANSACTIONS.
(a) REMITTANCE OF SALES DATA BY COMPANY. At least weekly, Company shall
remit Sales Data to Bank. All such remittances shall be in Bank's form and
format. Remittances of Sales Data shall contain all of the information specified
in this Agreement and the Operating Regulations. Upon receipt thereof, Bank will
balance and edit the data submitted and make appropriate adjustments for errors
or invalid or incomplete transactions. In the event all or a portion of the
required data is not received by Bank or such data is unreadable, Bank shall not
be required to process the Sales Data containing the missing or unreadable data,
but shall promptly inform Company or its designated agent of the missing or
unreadable data. Company shall be responsible for retrieving and resubmitting
the Sales Data in completed form. Company shall be responsible for the loss,
damage or destruction of Sales Data until such Sales Data is received by Bank or
by Bank's designated processor.
(b) OBLIGATION TO REIMBURSE COMPANY FOR SALES DATA. Subject to Bank's right
of Chargeback, Bank shall reimburse Company for all Card Sales properly remitted
by Company and received by Bank. Bank will pay Company an amount equal to the
total amount of Card Sales submitted to and received by Bank, less the amount of
Credits, if any, submitted that Business Day by Company, plus or minus the
applicable amount, if any, for other adjustments to the amounts so submitted.
Bank shall not be required to reimburse Company for any Card Sale not submitted
within sixty (60) days of the date of the Card Sale.
(c) METHOD AND TIMING OF SETTLEMENT. For each electronic or tape remittance
of Sales Data received in Bank's form and format by 12:00 PM local time on a
Business Day at the location specified by Bank, Bank will use its best efforts
to initiate the appropriate credit or debit to the Settlement Account, as
applicable, by federal wire transfer ("Fed Wire") by the following Business Day.
With respect to each such remittance of Sales Data received by Bank after 12:00
PM local time on a Business Day, Bank will use its best efforts to initiate the
appropriate credit or debit to the Settlement Account, as applicable, by Fed
Wire by the second Business Day after receipt. Unless otherwise agreed to in
writing by the Bank, Bank shall not accept remittance of Sales Data in paper
form (hard copy). Company hereby authorizes Bank and its designated agents and
representatives to credit or debit the Settlement Account, as applicable, in
accordance with this Agreement and the rules and procedures of the settlement
institution. This authority shall remain in effect until five (5) Business Days
after Bank receives written notice from Company of its cancellation of such
authorization, provided that in the event of termination of this Agreement,
Company agrees to maintain the Settlement Account with sufficient funds until
such time as Company and Bank agree that all Chargebacks and other adjustments
are processed and to permit Bank to credit and debit such Settlement Account
until all charges, Chargebacks and other adjustments are settled as provided in
this Agreement. Bank shall not be liable to Company for any delays in receipt of
funds or errors in credit entries caused by Company or by third parties
including, but not limited to, a clearinghouse, Company's financial institution,
or any agent of Company.
2.8 CARDHOLDER CREDITS AND PAYMENTS. Unless specifically required by law,
Company will not give cash refunds to any Cardholder in connection with a Card
Sale. For each Credit issued by Company, Company will prepare and deliver to the
Cardholder a Credit Slip which Company will complete in accordance with the
Operating Regulations. Company shall submit Sales Data evidencing each Credit to
Bank within seven days after it is issued in order that the appropriate Credit
may be entered on the Cardholder's Account. Company will not accept payment for
a Card Sale from a Cardholder (other than through the use of the Card) unless
Authorization for such Card Sale is denied by Bank or such Card Sale is charged
back to Company by Bank.
2.9 BILLING INQUIRIES AND CARDHOLDER DISPUTES. Bank will notify Company on
a current basis when a Cardholder has made a billing inquiry or filed a billing
error notice relating to a Card Sale made by Company. Company agrees to
investigate and make a good faith effort to resolve each billing inquiry or
dispute referred to it by Bank or received directly from a Cardholder. Within
fifteen (15) Business Days from the date Bank sends a billing inquiry or dispute
to Company, Company shall notify Bank in writing of the resolution thereof or
the action Company will take which will resolve the billing inquiry or dispute.
Company shall provide Bank with all such information as Bank may reasonably
request in connection therewith.
2.10 CHARGEBACK RIGHTS AND PROCEDURES.
(a) CHARGEBACK RIGHTS. If Company has not complied with the terms of this
Agreement or with the Operating Regulations with respect to either the Opening
of Accounts or a Card Sale made by Company, or if, at the end of the fifteen
(15) Business Day billing inquiry dispute resolution period specified in
paragraph 2.9 above, the billing inquiry or dispute is not resolved (or Bank has
not been informed of the resolution or the action Company will take to resolve
the billing inquiry or dispute), Bank may process a Chargeback to Company for
the amount of the Card Sale, the Account balance or the disputed portion
thereof, as applicable. If Bank processes a Chargeback and the disputed amount
is subsequently paid by the Cardholder, Bank will reimburse Company for the
amount of the disputed Card Sale or disputed portion thereof.
(b) METHOD OF RECOURSE. Bank is not required to pay Company for a Card Sale
which is being charged back. If Bank has already paid Company for such Card
Sale, Bank, at its sole discretion, may deduct the amount to be charged back
from the Settlement Account or offset such amount from a future payment to
Company. Any Chargebacks which are not paid by the aforesaid means shall be due
and payable by Company promptly on demand.
(c) COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary
contained herein, in the event a Cardholder, in accordance with the provisions
of applicable state law or the federal Truth in Lending Act and Regulation Z, as
they may be amended from time to time, files with Bank a billing error inquiry
or alleges a quality dispute with respect to goods or services purchased from
Company, Bank has the right of Chargeback against Company with respect to the
Card Sale which is the subject of such inquiry or dispute.
(d) EXCESSIVE CHARGEBACKS. If Chargebacks exceed 1.5% of the total number
of Card Sales submitted by Company with respect to an individual Company
location in any calendar quarter, Bank reserves the right to assess, and Company
agrees to pay, a fee of $7.50 for each Chargeback in excess of the 1.5% limit.
2.11 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES. Company represents and warrants to
Bank that each Card Sale will arise out of a bona fide sale of Authorized
Services by Company and will not involve the use of a Card for any other
purpose.
2.12 REPORTS. Bank shall supply, at no additional charge, Company with
Bank's standard reports, including a monthly statement containing the following
information: Card Sales, Credits, Merchant Fees, any other fees and Daily
Remittances. Company may elect to receive reports available from Bank containing
additional information at Bank's then current price for such reports.
ARTICLE III - FEES
3.1 FEES.
(a) For each Card Sale made by Company, Bank shall charge and Company
agrees to pay a fee in an amount equal to 3.41% of the Card Sale (the "Merchant
Fee"), as calculated in accordance with paragraph 3.1 (c) below. Upon thirty
(30) days' prior written notice to Company, the Bank may change the Merchant Fee
effective as of the completion of the first twelve (12) months of the term of
this Agreement and, thereafter the Merchant Fee may be changed by Bank every
twelve (12) months upon thirty (30) days notice to Company, provided that Bank
shall not increase or decrease the Merchant Fee more than 25 basis points after
the initial twelve (12) months of the term and 25 basis points during any
subsequent twelve (12) month period. Such Merchant Fee change(s) shall be as a
result of such factors as: (i) actual losses absorbed by Bank, or (ii) material
differences between the Assumptions upon which the Merchant Fee is based as
reflected in Schedule B, attached hereto, and the actual performance of the Card
Plan. The foregoing limitations on the amount of increases to the Merchant Fee
shall not apply to the extent that such increases are based on adjustments to
the legally allowable finance charge rates in the states of residence of
Cardholders.
(b) The above Merchant Fee of 3.41% is based in part on the Prime Rate of
8.5%. The Prime Rate is the rate of interest listed as the highest "prime rate"
in the "Money Rates" section of THE WALL STREET JOURNAL on the last business day
of the month. Bank and Company agree that Bank shall directly pass through
changes in the Prime Rate to Cardholders by applying a variable rate annual
percentage rate to Accounts. If Bank and Company agree to change the annual
percentage rate to a fixed rate, Bank shall pass through to Company changes in
the cost of funds.
(c) On each day of each month, Bank shall:
(i) Determine the net amount of Card Sales made by Company during
that day;
(ii) Calculate the total amount of Credits and adjustments to
Accounts with respect to Card Sales made by Company during that day;
and
(iii) Calculate and collect the amount of the Merchant Fee based
on the net amount after making such calculations.
(d) Bank may offset the amount of the Merchant Fee and any other amounts
which become due and owing to Bank or Bank's affiliate from the Settlement
amount due Company, or Bank may debit the Settlement Account in the amount of
the Merchant Fee and any such other amounts. If Bank elects the former and the
Settlement amount due Company is insufficient to cover the Merchant Fee and any
such other amounts, Bank, at its option, may offset the Merchant Fee and any
such other amounts, or remaining portion thereof from subsequent amounts due
Company or debit the Settlement Account. Any amounts owed which cannot be paid
by the aforesaid means shall be due and payable by Company on demand.
(e) Bank acknowledges that Company has paid Bank a set-up fee and
conversion fee of $35,000 and Bank shall charge and Company agrees to pay such
other fees for services, forms or materials as set forth in Schedule A which is
attached hereto and incorporated herein.
ARTICLE IV- MISCELLANEOUS
4.1 INDEMNIFICATION.
(a) INDEMNIFICATION BY COMPANY. Company shall be liable to and shall
indemnify and hold harmless Bank and its officers, employees and directors from
any losses, damages, claims or complaints (including reasonable outside
attorney's fees and disbursements) incurred by Bank or its respective officers,
employees and directors arising out of:
(i) Any claim, complaint or setoff made by a Cardholder with
respect to Card Sales or Credits submitted by Company pursuant to this
Agreement;
(ii) Anything wrongfully done or not done by Company in
connection with the furnishing of any Authorized Services purchased by
Cardholders pursuant to this Agreement; and
(iii) The death or injury to any person or the loss, destruction
or damage to any property arising out of the furnishing by Company of
any Authorized Services purchased with the Card.
(iv) Any claim or complaint of a third party in connection with
the use of Company's name and logo on the Card or in advertisements
and promotions relating to the Card Plan.
(b) INDEMNIFICATION BY BANK. Bank shall be liable to and shall indemnify
and hold harmless Company and its officers, employees and directors from any
losses, damages, claims or complaints (including reasonable outside attorney's
fees and disbursements) incurred by Company or its officers, employees and
directors arising out of any claim or complaint by a Cardholder with respect to
anything wrongfully done or not done by Bank in connection with such
Cardholder's Account. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the indemnification by Bank
shall not apply to any claim or complaint relating to Company's failure to
resolve a billing inquiry or dispute with a Cardholder.
(c) NOTICE OF CLAIM. In the event that Bank or Company shall receive any
claim or demand or be subject to any suit or proceeding of which a claim may be
made against the other under this paragraph 4.1, the indemnified party shall
give prompt written notice thereof to the indemnifying party and the
indemnifying party will be entitled to participate in the settlement or defense
thereof and, if the indemnifying party elects, to take over and control the
settlement or defense thereof with counsel satisfactory to the indemnified
party. In any case, the indemnifying party and the indemnified party shall
cooperate (at no cost to the indemnified party) in the settlement or defense of
any such claim, demand, suit or proceeding.
(d) SURVIVAL. The terms of this paragraph 4.1 shall survive the termination
of the Agreement.
4.2 CARD PLAN PROMOTION; ADVERTISING AND SERVICEMARKS.
(a) LIMITED LICENSE. Company hereby authorizes Bank for purposes of this
Agreement to use Company's name, logo, registered trademarks and servicemarks
(if any), and any other proprietary designations on the Card and in advertising
and promoting the Card Plan, subject to Company's periodic reasonable review of
such use and to such reasonable specifications of Company to the extent such
specifications are directly related to the legal maintenance of Company's marks,
if any.
(b) PROMOTION OF THE CARD PLAN. Company shall prominently display at each
of its locations advertising and promotional materials relating to the Card
Plan, including without limitation take-one applications for the Card. Further,
to the extent Company displays other third party credit or charge card
materials, it shall display the advertising and promotional materials relating
to the Card Plan in a manner and with a frequency equal to or greater than that
accorded any other third party credit or charge card. Company shall only use or
display such materials in accordance with the Operating Regulations or in
accordance with any specifications provided by Bank. Bank and Company shall
cooperate in the development of advertising and display materials and such other
operating forms and materials necessary to promote the Card and make Card Sales.
Bank may charge Company and Company agrees to pay for any such materials and
forms provided to Company by Bank. Any such materials shall not be used by
Company following termination of this Agreement.
(c) CARDHOLDER SOLICITATION. For purposes of prospective Cardholder
solicitations by Bank, Company shall provide Bank with its customer lists and
any other lists of consumers that Company owns or with respect to which Company
possesses a right to use such list. Bank and Company shall mutually agree upon
plans for solicitation of Company's customers. Company shall be responsible for
the costs of such solicitations, including without limitation the cost of
obtaining lists of consumers who are potential Cardholders and providing the
same to Bank. Any such solicitations of Company's customers or any other
consumers by Bank shall be in accordance with Bank's policies and procedures,
and subject to its credit analysis and determination, provided that Bank shall
act reasonably in determining the number, frequency and nature of solicitations
for Cardholders. Cardholders' names and addresses shall be deemed the property
of Bank and (except for the names and addresses of Company's existing customer
base) not of Company. Company may use Cardholders' names and addresses to
conduct promotional programs for products and services other than credit and
payment programs, provided Company obtains Bank's prior written consent for each
such use of the names and addresses. Such Cardholder information may be used by
Bank for such purposes as it deems appropriate so long as (i) Bank does not use
such information in a manner that is anti-competitive and injurious to Company's
retail business, and (ii) Bank obtains prior written consent of Company for such
use.
(d) JOINT MARKETING FUNDS. Bank shall make available funds in the amount of
$70,000 for the development and execution of marketing programs in support of
the Card Plan, provided Company contributes $30,000 for such purposes. Bank and
Company shall jointly determine how the marketing programs will be accomplished;
and each party shall be responsible for managing and administering the marketing
funds it contributes.
4.3 BOOKS AND RECORDS. Company shall retain an original copy of each Sales
Slip and Credit Slip for one hundred and eighty (180) days following the date of
the Card Sale and a microfilm or other copy thereof for a total of seven (7)
years. Company will send to Bank the original or a legible copy of any Sales
Slip, Credit Slip or any other record relating to this Agreement retained by
Company within fifteen (15) Business Days of a request from Bank.
4.4 TERM AND TERMINATION.
(a) TERM. This Agreement shall be effective on the date first written above
when executed by authorized officers of each of the parties and shall remain in
effect for a period of five (5) years from the date of Commencement of Card
Acceptance set forth in paragraph 2.2(b) ("Initial Term"), and shall continue
thereafter for additional five (5) year periods ("Subsequent Term(s)") unless
either party provides written notice of termination at least one (1) year prior
to the end of the Initial Term or Subsequent Term(s). The termination of this
Agreement shall not affect the rights and obligations of the parties with
respect to transactions and occurrences which take place prior to the effective
date of termination, except as otherwise provided herein.
(b) TERMINATION. This Agreement may otherwise be terminated:
(i) by Bank or Company upon notice to the other in the event the
other party shall elect to wind up or dissolve its operation or is
wound up and dissolved; becomes insolvent or repeatedly fails to pay
its debts as they become due, or in the event Company otherwise
suffers a material adverse change in Company's financial condition
(for purposes of this Agreement a material adverse change in Company's
financial condition shall mean, but not be limited to a default in
payment or some other failure to meet a debt obligation of Company,
either of which is of such a material nature that a lender could
declare a default); makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors;
files a voluntary petition in bankruptcy or for reorganization or is
adjudicated as bankrupt or insolvent; or has a liquidator or trustee
appointed over its affairs and such appointment shall not have been
terminated and discharged within thirty (30) days thereof; or
(ii) by Bank or Company upon thirty (30) days notice to the other
in the event the other materially breaches its obligations hereunder
provided that such termination shall be deemed ineffective if the
breaching party cures its breach within the thirty (30) day period.
(iii) by Bank upon thirty (30) days' prior written notice to
Company in the event that Company closes or otherwise ceases operation
in one or more of its retail locations such that the aggregate of such
closures or cessations materially impacts the Cardholder's use or the
utility of their Cards.
(c) TERMINATION OF CARD ACCEPTANCE. Bank upon notice to the other party may
elect to terminate the acceptance of the Card at a particular Company location
if acceptance of the Card at such location is subject to high fraudulent
activity, excessive Chargebacks (that is, in excess of 1.50% of the total number
of Card Sales) or other course of business conduct that is injurious to the
business relationship between Bank and Company. Termination of an individual
Company location shall not affect this Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
if such termination of acceptance of the Card at individual Company locations
materially affects the volume of Card Sales generated by Company, Bank may elect
to terminate this Agreement upon thirty (30) days' prior written notice to
Company.
(d) DUTIES UPON TERMINATION. Upon termination of this Agreement, Company
will promptly submit to Bank all Sales Data made through the date of
termination.
(e) PURCHASE REQUIREMENTS. If Company terminates this Agreement under
paragraph 4.4(a) or if any event arises that would be a basis for termination of
this Agreement by Bank under paragraphs 4.4(b) (i), (ii) or (iii), 4.4(c) or
4.12, Bank or Bank's designee at its option, may cause Company, its successors
and assigns to purchase, or to cause Company's parent corporation, if any, to
purchase all of the outstanding Card receivables (subject to the terms of any
then current securitization agreement of Bank) under such terms and conditions
as are reasonably acceptable to Bank.
4.5 RESERVE ACCOUNT. If any event arises that would be a basis for
termination of this Agreement by Bank under paragraph 4.4(b)(i), Bank may
immediately establish a reserve account ("Reserve") against potential liability
to Cardholders for Credits and refunds for advance Card Sales. The amount of
such Reserve shall be determined by Bank based on Company's Chargeback history.
Company shall immediately pay to Bank the amount of such Reserve, or Bank may
debit the Settlement Account or withhold Settlement until the Reserve is fully
funded. Company agrees that Bank may set off against the Reserve any Credits,
Chargebacks or adjustments that Company does not or is unable to satisfy through
Settlement. Bank will release all remaining amounts held in the Reserve not
later than two hundred ten (210) days after the termination date of this
Agreement, upon satisfaction of all Company's obligations to Bank. Bank will
provide Company with an accounting of any amounts withdrawn from the Reserve.
4.6 SET-OFFS. Bank and Company agree that each time a Card Sale occurs, a
contingent and unmatured claim for payment accrues against Bank in favor of
Company, and simultaneously, a contingent and unmatured Chargeback claim accrues
against Company in favor of Bank. Company agrees that Bank has the right to
effect a Chargeback and set off any claim it has against any amounts that Bank
may owe Company from time to time, whether or not such amounts were derived from
the Card Sale out of which Bank's claim arose. Company irrevocably grants Bank a
right to set off in and to any funds held by Bank and all amounts now or
hereafter due to Company from Bank.
4.7 STATUS OF THE PARTIES. In performing their responsibilities pursuant to
this Agreement, Bank and Company are in the position of independent contractors.
This Agreement is not intended to create, nor does it create and shall not be
construed to create, a relationship of partner or joint venturer or an
association for profit between Bank and Company. Further, notwithstanding
anything contained in this Agreement to the contrary, any third party designated
by Company to obtain Authorization or perform data capture, remittance or
Settlement functions hereunder shall be subject to the approval of Bank and
shall be deemed to be the agent of Company for all such purposes and not the
agent of Bank and Company shall be fully liable for the fees and actions of any
such third party with respect to obtaining such Authorization or the performance
of such functions.
4.8 FORCE MAJEURE. Neither party to this Agreement shall be liable to the
other by reason of any failure in performance of this Agreement in accordance
with its terms if such failure arises out of causes beyond the control and
without the fault or negligence of such party. Such causes may include but are
not limited to acts of God or of the public enemy, acts of civil or military
authority, fires, strikes, unavailability of energy resources, delay in
transportation, riots or war. In the event of any force majeure occurrence, the
disabled party shall use its best efforts to meet its obligations as set forth
in this Agreement. The disabled party shall promptly and in writing advise the
other party if it is unable to perform due to a force majeure event, the
expected duration of such inability to perform, and of any developments (or
changes therein) that appear likely to affect the ability of that party to
perform any of its obligations hereunder in whole or in part.
4.9 CONFIDENTIALITY. In performing its obligations pursuant to this
Agreement, each party may have access to and receive certain confidential or
proprietary information about the other party, including, but not limited to:
such party's marketing philosophy and objectives, competitive advantages and
disadvantages, cardmember and customer names and addresses, financial results,
technological development, store locations, sales volume(s), merchandise mix or
other information of the business or affairs of each party, its parent company,
or its affiliated and subsidiary companies, which that party reasonably
considers confidential and/or proprietary (hereinafter collectively referred to
as "Confidential Information"). Both parties agree that they will reveal such
Confidential Information only to those of their directors, officers, or
employees (or, with regard to Company, directors, officers or employees of any
of its operating divisions/subsidiaries which accept or may consider accepting
the Card, and, with regard to Bank, directors, officers, or employees of Bank,
or its affiliates which are involved in the development of the Card program) who
are engaged in the implementation of policies, programs or procedures with
regard to the acceptance of the Card by Company. Each party agrees not to use
such Confidential Information nor to disclose Confidential Information to any
third party, except as may be necessary for that party to perform its
obligations pursuant to this Agreement and except as may be agreed upon by the
parties. If either should disclose Confidential Information to a third party,
such party shall cause said third party to agree to the confidentiality
provisions set forth in this paragraph 4.9.
Confidential Information shall not include information in the public
domain, information already known by the party receiving the information prior
to commencing the discussions that led to this Agreement, and information
lawfully obtained from a third party. The provisions of this paragraph 4.9 shall
survive the termination of this Agreement.
4.10 ACCESS TO CARDHOLDER LIST. Company may request from Bank the
Cardholder names and addresses of Cardholders who use their Cards to purchase
Authorized Services at participating locations. Bank shall charge and Company
agrees to pay the fee specified in Schedule A for such requests. Except as
provided in paragraph 4.2(c), Company may only use such Cardholder information
in connection with sales promotions of Authorized Services by Company during the
term of this Agreement; any other use of such Cardholder information including,
without limitation, the disclosure or sale of such information to third parties,
is prohibited and is subject to the terms of paragraph 4.9.
4.11 FINANCIAL INFORMATION. At least annually Company shall provide to Bank
audited financial statements prepared for Company by an independent public
accounting firm. Quarterly, Company shall provide to Bank quarterly financial
statements prepared by or for Company.
4.12 ASSIGNABILITY; SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. This Agreement and any of the
rights, interests and obligations of either of the parties hereunder may be
assigned to a parent, subsidiary, or affiliate of either party. Bank may assign
this Agreement to a third party upon the sale of all or substantially all of its
assets or stock to such third party. This Agreement may not otherwise be
assigned without the prior written consent of the non-assigning party, which
consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. The rights and
obligations of the parties hereto shall inure to the benefit of and shall be
binding upon the successors and permitted assigns of each of them. Company shall
notify Bank within twenty (20) days after it or its parent corporation, if any,
is purchased by another entity or agrees to merge or be consolidated into or
transfer all or substantially all of either of their respective assets to
another entity. In such event, Bank may within thirty (30) days of its receipt
of Company's notice terminate this Agreement upon thirty (30) days notice to
Company.
4.13 AMENDMENT. Except as otherwise provided herein, neither this Agreement
nor any of its provisions shall be amended or modified except in writing
executed by a duly authorized officer of each party.
4.14 SEVERABILITY. If any provision, or portion thereof, of this Agreement
is held invalid, illegal, void or unenforceable by reason of any rule or law,
administrative order, judicial decision or public policy, all other provisions
of this Agreement shall nevertheless remain in full force and in effect.
4.15 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Agreement, including the Operating Regulations
and any exhibits and documents incorporated by reference, constitutes the entire
Agreement between the parties in connection with the acceptance of the Card by
Company and supersedes all prior agreements, negotiations and communications on
such subject matter.
4.16 GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of South Dakota.
4.17 APPLICABLE LAW OR REGULATION. It is expressly understood that changes
in the performance of either party's obligations under this Agreement
necessitated by a change in interpretation of any applicable federal or state
statute or regulation will not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
4.18 WAIVERS. Neither party shall be deemed to have waived any of its
rights, powers or remedies under this Agreement unless such waiver is approved
in writing by the waiving party.
4.19 NOTICES. Whenever notice or demand under this Agreement is given to or
made upon either party by the other party, such notice or demand shall be given
in writing, either (i) by depositing it in the United States mail addressed to
such party at its address as set forth below, with postage thereon prepaid, and
any notice or demand so mailed shall be deemed to have been given at the time
when it was mailed, or (ii) by courier, telecopier, or similar method, and such
notice or demand shall be deemed to have been given when the telex, cablegram,
writing, or other form of notice or demand is either personally delivered to the
party or delivered to the address set forth below. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, notice of intent to terminate this Agreement and notice of default
shall be sent by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested.
If to Bank: Hurley State Bank
1503 East 10th Street
Sioux Falls, South Dakota 57103
Attn: Senior Vice President
With a copy to: SPS Payment Systems, Inc.
2500 Lake Cook Road
Riverwoods, Illinois 60015
Attn: Vice President- Controller
If to Company: The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.
One Dodge Drive
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Attn: Controller
EITHER PARTY MAY CHANGE THE ADDRESS TO WHICH NOTICE SHALL BE SENT BY GIVING
WRITTEN NOTICE OF SUCH CHANGE TO THE OTHER PARTY IN THE MANNER PROVIDED HEREIN.
4.20 CAPTIONS. The captions used in this Agreement have been inserted for
convenience and for reference only and shall not be deemed to limit or define
the text of this Agreement.
4.21 COUNTERPARTS. This Agreement may be executed in separate counterparts,
each of which shall constitute an original but all of which shall constitute one
and the same Agreement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of
the day and year first written above.
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL HURLEY STATE BANK
STORES, INC. (Accepted at its Home Office)
By: /s/ By: /s/
------------------------ --------------------------
Title: EVP - COO Title: SVP - Operations
SCHEDULE A
FEES
ITEM AMOUNT
1. In-store forms, including credit applications and sales Cost plus
and credit slips handling
2. Each tape file of Cardholder names and addresses in
excess of one per month
- Per request $150.00
3. System changes Cost
SCHEDULE B
ASSUMPTIONS
1. Anticipated average annual credit sales per
active Account $370.00
2. Percentage of aggregate Account balances that
incur finance charges 90%
3. Average active Account balance $150.00
EXHIBIT 10.8
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT, dated as of June 27, 1996, between Ezra Dabah
("Executive") and THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC., a Delaware
corporation ("Employer").
SECTION 1
EMPLOYMENT OF EXECUTIVE
1.01. Employer hereby agrees to employ Executive and Executive hereby
agrees to be and remain in the employ of Employer upon the terms and conditions
hereinafter set forth.
SECTION 2
EMPLOYMENT PERIOD
2.01. The terms of Executive's employment under this Agreement (the
"Employment Period") shall commence on the date of this Agreement and shall
continue until June 27, 1999 and thereafter shall continue for successive three
year periods, subject to termination in accordance with the provisions of
Section 5.
SECTION 3
3.01. Generally. During the Employment Period, Executive (i) shall be
employed as Chief Executive Officer and Chairman, (ii) shall serve as a member
of the executive management committee of Employer, and (iii) shall devote his
full attention and expend his efforts, energies and skills on a full-time basis
to the business of Employer and other enterprises controlled by , or under
common control with Employer (collectively, the "Company"). Without limiting the
generality of the foregoing, Executive shall have all such duties and
responsibilities customarily undertaken and performed by persons in his position
in similar businesses to that of Employer. Executive's employment by Employer
shall constitute his exclusive employment during the Employment period. In no
event shall Executive serve as a director of any other business corporation or
as a general partner of any partnership except with the prior approval of the
Board of Directors of Employer (the "Board").
3.02. Reporting. Executive shall report directly to the Board. During the
Employment Period, Executive will be subject to all of the policies, rules and
regulations of which Executive is given notice applicable to senior executives
of Employer and will comply with all directions and instructions of the Board.
SECTION 4
COMPENSATION
4.01 Compensation, Generally. For all services rendered and required to be
rendered by covenants of, and restrictions imposed on, Executive under this
Agreement, Employer shall pay to Executive during and with respect to the
Employment Period, and Executive agrees to accept (in full payment) Base Salary
and Performance Bonus, all as more fully described on Exhibit A (collectively,
the "Compensation").
4.02 Other Benefits. During the Employment Period, Executive shall be
entitled to receive such benefits as are at least as favorable as those provided
by the Employer to Employer's other senior executives (other than those benefits
provided under or pursuant to separately negotiated individual employment
agreements or arrangements) under any pension or retirement plan, stock
purchase, stock option or stock ownership plan, disability plan or insurance,
group life insurance, medical insurance, or other similar plan or program of
Employer. Employer shall provide Executive with life insurance in such amount so
that the annual premium of such life insurance shall not exceed $20,000.
Executive shall also be entitled to a personal driver. Executive's Base Salary
shall constitute the compensation on the basis of which the amount of
Executive's benefits under any such plan or program shall be fixed and
determined.
4.03 Expense Reimbursement. Employer shall reimburse Executive for all
business expenses reasonably incurred by him in the performance of his duties
under this Agreement upon his presentation, not less frequently than monthly, of
signed, itemized accounts of such expenditures all in accordance with Employer's
procedures and policies as adopted and in effect from time to time and
applicable to its employees of comparable status.
4.04 Personal Expenses Allowance Employer shall provide Executive with an
allowance of $4,000 each month during the Employment Period to cover personal
expenses associated with Executive's ownership and operation of an automobile
and other personal expenses. This amount shall be reduced by payments made, if
any, by the Company under this Section.
4.05. Vacations. Executive shall be entitled to five weeks vacation each
year, which shall be taken at such time or times as shall not unreasonably
interfere with Executive's performance of his duties under this Agreement.
SECTION 5
TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT PERIOD
5.01. Termination Without Cause. At any time during the Employment Period,
by notice to the other, Executive or the Board may terminate Executive's
employment under this Agreement without cause. Such notice shall specify the
effective date of termination which shall not be less than 60 days after the
date of such notice.
5.02. By Employer: Cause. At any time during the Employment Period, by
notice to Executive, the Board may terminate Executive's employment under this
Agreement "for cause," effective immediately. Such notice shall specify the
cause for termination. For the purposes of this Section 5.02, "for cause" means:
(i) a breach by Executive of any of the material provisions of this
Agreement;
(ii) the commission by Executive of an act involving moral turpitude or
dishonesty, whether or not in connection with Executive's employment hereunder;
or
(iii) Executive shall have committed any act of fraud against the Employer
or engaged in any other willful misconduct in connection with his duties
hereunder;
(iv) Executive shall have been convicted of a felony (other than a felony
relating to motor vehicle laws); provided, however, that, in each case, an event
giving rise to "Cause" shall not be finally determined to have occurred unless
admitted to in writing by the Executive or set forth in a final determination of
an arbitrator as provided in Section 10.04 hereof. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, no Cause for termination shall be deemed to exist with respect to the
Executive's acts described in (i) through (iii) above unless the Board shall
have given prior written notice to the Executive specifying the Cause with
reasonable particularity and, within thirty (30) days after such notice, the
Executive shall not have cured or eliminated the problem or thing giving rise to
such Cause.
5.03. By Executive for Good Reason. Executive may, at any time during the
Employment Period by notice to the Board, terminate the Employment Period under
this Agreement "for good reason" effective immediately. For the purposes hereof,
"good reason" means:
(i) any material breach by Employer of any provision of this Agreement
which, if susceptible of being cured, is not cured within thirty days of
delivery of notice thereof to Employer by Executive;
(ii) the assignment to Executive by Employer of duties inconsistent with
Executive's position, responsibilities or status with Employer as in effect on
the date of this Agreement including, but not limited to, any significant
reduction in such position, duties, responsibilities or status, any change in
Executive's titles, offices or perquisites, as then in effect, or any removal of
Executive from or any failure to re-elect Executive to, any such positions,
except in connection with the term the greater of (1) ination of his employment
on account of his death, disability, or for cause;
(iii) a relocation by Employer of Executive's place of employment described
in Section 7.01 hereof;
(iv) any purported termination of Executive's employment for cause which is
not effected in accordance with the requirements of Section 5.2 hereof (and for
purposes of this Agreement no such purported termination shall be effective).
5.04 Disability. During the Employment Period, if, as a result of physical
or mental incapacity or infirmity (including alcoholism or drug addiction),
Executive shall be unable to perform his duties under this Agreement for:
(i) a continuous period of at least 120 days, or
(ii) periods aggregating at least 180 days during any period of 12
consecutive months (each a "Disability Period"), and at the end of the
Disability Period the Board of Directors shall have determined, in good faith,
that by reason of such physical or mental disability ("Disability") the
Executive shall be unable to perform the services required of him hereunder, the
Employer may terminate the Employment Period for Disability by delivery to
Executive of 60 days prior written notice of termination of the Employment
Period.
SECTION 6
TERMINATION COMPENSATION
6.01 Entitlement to Payment. (a) Subject to the provisions of Section 9.04,
if Executive's employment hereunder is terminated pursuant to Section 5.01,
5.03, 5.04 or 8.01 at any time hereafter, then Employer will pay to Executive
within thirty (30) days following termination an amount equal to the Base Salary
for three years following such termination. (The amount to be paid pursuant to
this Section 6.01 is referred to as the "Termination Compensation" and the
period for which such compensation is to be paid is referred to as the "Relevant
Period"). Upon such termination, Executive shall also be entitled to any accrued
but unpaid bonus compensation and all outstanding stock options under the stock
option plan shall be deemed to immediately vest. In addition, during the
Relevant Period, Executive shall be entitled to life insurance and medical
benefits and all other benefits, referred to in Section 4.02 and 4.03.
6.02. No Other Termination Compensation. Executive shall not be entitled to
any benefit or compensation following termination of his employment hereunder,
except as set forth in Section 6.01. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary
herein, upon, Executives's death, permanent disability or termination by the
Company without cause, the Company will comply with the applicable Sections of
the Stockholder's Agreement dated June 27, 1996.
6.03 Mitigation Executive shall not be required to mitigate the amount of
any payments or benefits provided for hereunder upon termination of Employment
by seeking employment with any other person, or otherwise, nor shall the amount
of any such payments or benefits be reduced by any compensation, benefit or
other amount earned by, accrued for or paid to Executive as the result of
Executive's employment by or consulting or other association with any other
person, provided, that any medical, dental or hospitalization insurance or
benefits provided to Executive with his employment by or consulting with an
unaffiliated person during such period shall be primary to the benefits to be
provided to Executive pursuant to this Agreement for the purposes of
coordination of benefits.
SECTION 7
LOCATION OF EXECUTIVE'S ACTIVITIES
7.01. Principal Place of Business. Executives's principal place of business
in the performance of his duties and obligations under this Agreement shall be
in the New York metropolitan area, which includes West Caldwell, New Jersey. For
so long as Employer's headquarters are located in the New York City metropolitan
area, Executive's principal place of business shall be located at such
headquarters.
7.02. Travel. Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 7.01, Executive
will engage in such travel and spend time in other places as may be necessary or
appropriate in furtherance of his duties hereunder.
SECTION 8
CHANGE IN CONTROL
8.01. Effect of Change in Control. If a Change in Control (as hereinafter
defined) shall occur, the Executive may terminate his employment hereunder and
such termination shall be deemed to be a termination by Employer without cause.
(a) As used in this Agreement, "Change in Control" means the occurrence
during the Term of any of the following events:
( i ) The sale to any purchaser of (a) all or substantially all of the
assets of the Employer or (B) capital stock representing more than 50% of the
stock of the Employer entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of
the Employer; or
( ii ) The merger or consolidation of the Employer with another corporation
if, immediately after such merger or consolidation, less than a majority of the
combined voting power of the then-outstanding securities entitled to vote
generally in the election of directors of the surviving or resulting corporation
in such merger or consolidation is held, directly or indirectly, in the
aggregate by the holders immediately prior to such transaction of the
outstanding securities of the Employer;
(iii) There is a report filed on Schedule 13D or Schedule 14D-1 (or any
successor schedule, form, or report or item therein), each promulgated pursuant
to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the "Exchange Act"),
disclosing that any person (as the term "person" is used in Section 13(d)(3) or
Section 14(d) (2) of the Exchange Act) has become the beneficial owner (as the
term "beneficial owner" is defined under Rule 13d-3 or any successor rule or
regulation promulgated under the Exchange Act) of securities representing 50% or
more of the combined voting power of the voting stock of Employer; or
( iv ) Employer files a report or proxy statement with the Securities and
Exchange Commission pursuant to the Exchange Act disclosing in response to Form
8-K or Schedule 14A (or any successor schedule, form, or report or item therein)
that a change in control of Employer has occurred or will occur in the future
pursuant to any then existing contract or transaction.
SECTION 9
EXCLUSIVITY OF SERVICES, CONFIDENTIAL
INFORMATION AND RESTRICTIVE COVENANTS
9.01. Exclusivity of Services. During the Employment Period and continuing
through the fifth anniversary of the date in which Executive ceases to be an
employee of the Company (the "Covenant Period"), Executive will not:
(i) Promote, participate or engage in any business on behalf of any Direct
Competitor of the Company, whether Executive is acting as owner, partner,
stockholder, employee, broker, agent, principal, trustee, corporate officer,
director, consultant or in any other capacity whatsoever; provided, however,
that this will not prevent Executive from holding for investment up to 1% of any
class of stock or other securities quoted or dealt in on a recognized stock
exchange or on Nasdaq. For purposes of this Section, a "Direct Competitor of the
Company" means (A) The Gap, Inc. or any Person under common control with The
Gap, Inc., (B) The Limited, Inc. or any Person under common control with The
Limited, Inc., (c) Gymboree or Baby Superstore or any Person under common
control with Gymboree or Baby Superstore, as the case may be, or (D) any Person
engaged in the sale of children's apparel and who derives more than fifty
percent of its gross revenues from the retail sales of children's apparel.
(ii) Directly or indirectly employ other than on behalf of the Company,
solicit or entice away any director, officer or employee of the Company or any
of its subsidiaries; or
(iii) Take any action to interfere, directly or indirectly, with the
goodwill of the Company or any of its subsidiaries, or induce or attempt to
induce with any Person doing business with the Company to cease doing business
with the Company.
9.02 Confidential Information During the Covenant Period, Executive will
not (except in furtherance of the Company's business or as required by law)
furnish confidential information relating to the business or affairs of the
Company, its subsidiaries or any Person having dealings therewith, or permit or
encourage the use of such confidential information by another. During the
Covenant Period, Executive will not use the name of the Company or its
subsidiaries in the conduct of any business activities (except in furtherance of
the Company's business) or for Executive's personal use without the prior
written consent of the Company.
9.03. Mutually Non-Disparagement. Neither Executive nor Employer will make
or authorize any public statement disparaging the other in its or his business
interests and affairs. Notwithstanding the foregoing, neither party shall be ( i
) required to make any statement that it or he believes to be false or
inaccurate, or (ii) restricted in connection with any litigation, arbitration or
similar proceeding or with respect to its response to any legal process.
9.04. Breaches of Provisions. If Executive breaches any of the provisions
of this Section 9 then, and in any such event, in addition to other remedies
available to Employer, Executive shall not be entitled to any Termination
Compensation, if any, made to him hereunder prior to Employer's discovery of
such breach.
SECTION 10
MISCELLANEOUS
10.01. Notices. Any notice, consent, or authorization required or permitted
to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing and sent to the party
for or to whom intended, at the address of such party set forth below, by
certified mail, postage paid, or at such other address as either party shall
designate by notice given to the other in the manner provided herein.
If to Employer: Attention: Steven Balasiano
Vice President & General Counsel
The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.
1 Dodge Drive
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
With Copies to: Stanley B. Silver
President & Chief Operating Officer
The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.
1 Dodge Drive
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
If to Executive: Ezra Dabah
19 Shore Drive
Great Neck, New York 11024
10.02. Taxes. Employer is authorized to withhold from payments made
hereunder to Executive such amounts for income tax, social security,
unemployment compensation and other judgement of Employer to comply with
applicable laws and regulations.
10.03. Governing Law. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed and
enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New York applicable to
agreements made and to be performed therein.
10.04. Arbitration. Any dispute or controversy arising under or in
connection with this Agreement shall be settled exclusively by arbitration in
New York, New York in accordance with the rules of the American Arbitration
Association then in effect. Judgment may be entered on the arbitration award in
any court having jurisdiction; provided, however, that Executive shall be
entitled to seek specific performance of his right to be paid until expiration
of the Employment Period during the pendency of any arbitration.
10.05. Headings. All descriptive headings in this Agreement are inserted
for convenience only and shall be disregarded in construing or applying any
provision of this Agreement.
10.06. Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, each
of which shall be deemed to be an original, but all of which together shall
constitute one and the same instrument.
10.07. Severability. If any provision of this Agreement or part thereof, is
held to be unenforceable, the remainder of such provisions of this Agreement, as
the case may be, shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect.
10.08. Entire Agreement and Integration. This Agreement contains the entire
agreement and understanding between Employer and Executive with respect to the
subject matter hereof. Such agreement supersedes any prior agreement between the
parties relating to the subject matter hereof.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of
the date first written above.
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
By: /s/ Seth Udasin
Asst. Sec.
EXHIBIT A
COMPENSATION
1. BASE SALARY: At the initial rate of $480,000 per year, payable in equal
installments not less frequently than monthly during each year of the Employment
Period. Base Salary shall be subject to annual review on each November, as the
Board may determine.
2. PERFORMANCE BONUS: Following each Bonus Period (as defined below),
Executive shall be entitled to receive a Performance Bonus based upon the
Earnings of Employer during such Bonus Period. The Performance Bonus for each
such Period will be payable within 90 days after the end of such period. The
amount of the Performance Bonus for each Bonus Period will be equal to a product
equal to (a) Employee's semi-annual Base Salary, times (b) 50%, times (c) the
Bonus Percentage (as hereinafter defined). The following provisions shall apply
to determinations relating to Performance Bonus.
"Bonus Percentage" shall mean, for each Bonus Period, a percentage for such
period that is based upon Earnings in accordance with a schedule adopted by the
Board for all senior executives prior to commencement of such period or as soon
thereafter as possible, except that the Bonus percentage shall be (a) not less
than 20% nor (b) more than 200% for any Bonus Period.
"Bonus Period" shall mean each of the two periods of approximately six
months duration within each fiscal year of the Employer, one beginning on the
first day of the fiscal year and ending on this Saturday on or nearest (whether
following or preceding) July 31, of the calender year in which it commenced, and
the other beginning on the Sunday following such Saturday and ending on the last
day of such fiscal year.
"Earnings" shall mean, for each Bonus Period, the net income before
interest and taxes of Employer for such period, but excluding extraordinary
items, as determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting
principals. The amount of Earnings shall be determined by Employer, with respect
to the Bonus Period ending on approximately July 31st of each year. Such
determination shall be delivered to Employee and shall be final and binding
unless within 20 days after delivery notice is given by Employee of his
objection to any specific aspect of such determination; any item not objected to
shall be final and binding. Employer and Employee shall then discuss any item
objected to and their written determination with respect to that item shall be
final and binding on Employer and Employee. If they are unable to reach a
written determination within 30 days after the notice of objection has been
given, the dispute shall be referred to Employer's independent accountants. The
accountants shall as soon as practicable thereafter determine the disposition of
any disputed item and shall set forth their determination in a written report to
be given to Employer and Employee. The determination by the independent
accountants of any disputed item (as set forth in their written report) shall be
final and binding on the parties. The amount of earnings shall be determined by
the independent accounting firm then retained by Employer as its independent
auditors, with respect to the Bonus Period ending on the last date of Employer's
fiscal year, and the determination of such firm shall be final and binding in
the absence of manifest error.
EXHIBIT 10.9
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT, dated as of June 27, 1996, between Stanley B. Silver
("Executive") and THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC., a Delaware
corporation ("Employer").
SECTION 1
EMPLOYMENT OF EXECUTIVE
1.01. Employer hereby agrees to employ Executive and Executive hereby
agrees to be and remain in the employ of Employer upon the terms and conditions
hereinafter set forth.
SECTION 2
EMPLOYMENT PERIOD
2.01. The terms of Executive's employment under this Agreement (the
"Employment Period") shall commence on the date of this Agreement and shall
continue unless terminated in accordance with the provisions of Section 5.
SECTION 3
3.01. Generally. During the Employment Period, Executive (i) shall be
employed as President and Chief Operating Officer, (ii) shall serve as a member
of the executive management committee of Employer, and (iii) shall devote his
full attention and expend his efforts, energies and skills on a full-time basis
to the business of Employer and other enterprises controlled by , or under
common control with Employer (collectively, the "Company"). Without limiting the
generality of the foregoing, Executive shall have all such duties and
responsibilities customarily undertaken and performed by persons in his position
in similar businesses to that of Employer. Executive's employment by Employer
shall constitute his exclusive employment during the Employment period. In no
event shall Executive serve as a director of any other business corporation or
as a general partner of any partnership except with the prior approval of the
Chief Executive Officer of Employer.
3.02. Reporting. Executive shall report directly to the Chief Executive
Officer of Employer. During the Employment Period, Executive will be subject to
all of the policies, rules and regulations of which Executive is given notice
applicable to senior executives of Employer and will comply with all directions
and instructions of the Chairman of the Board and the Chief Executive Officer.
SECTION 4
COMPENSATION
4.01 Compensation, Generally. For all services rendered and required to be
rendered by covenants of, and restrictions imposed on, Executive under this
Agreement, Employer shall pay to Executive during and with respect to the
Employment Period, and Executive agrees to accept (in full payment) Base Salary
and Performance Bonus, all as more fully described on Exhibit A (collectively,
the "Compensation").
4.02 Other Benefits. During the Employment Period, Executive shall be
entitled to receive such benefits as are at least as favorable as those provided
by the Employer to Employer's other senior executives (other than those benefits
provided under or pursuant to separately negotiated individual employment
agreements or arrangements) under any pension or retirement plan, stock
purchase, stock option or stock ownership plan, disability plan or insurance,
group life insurance, medical insurance, or other similar plan or program of
Employer. Employer shall provide Executive with life insurance in such amount so
that the annual premium relating to such life insurance shall not exceed
$20,000. Executive's Base Salary shall constitute the compensation on the basis
of which the amount of Executive's benefits under any such plan or program shall
be fixed and determined.
4.03 Expense Reimbursement. Employer shall reimburse Executive for all
business expenses (other than expenses of the type for which an allowance is
provided pursuant to the following sentence) reasonably incurred by him in the
performance of his duties under this Agreement upon his presentation, not less
frequently than monthly, of signed, itemized accounts of such expenditures all
in accordance with Employer's procedures and policies as adopted and in effect
from time to time and applicable to its employees of comparable status. Employer
shall also provide Executive with an allowance of $833.33 each month during the
Employment Period to cover expenses associated with Executive's ownership and
operation of an automobile in connection with the business conducted by him.
4.04. Vacations. Executive shall be entitled to four weeks vacation each
year, which shall be taken at such time or times as shall not unreasonably
interfere with Executive's performance of his duties under this Agreement.
SECTION 5
TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT PERIOD
5.01. Termination Without Cause. At any time during the Employment Period,
by notice to the other, Employer or Executive may terminate Executive's
employment under this Agreement without cause. Such notice shall specify the
effective date of termination which in the case of termination by Executive
shall not be less than 60 days after the date of such notice.
5.02. By Employer: Cause. At any time during the Employment Period, by
notice to Executive, Employer may terminate Executive's employment under this
Agreement "for cause," effective immediately. Such notice shall specify the
cause for termination. For the purposes of this Section 5.02, "for cause" means:
(i) a breach by Executive of any of the material provisions of this
Agreement that Executive fails to remedy or cease within 10 days after notice
thereof to Executive;
(ii) any conduct, action or behavior by Executive that has or may
reasonably by expected to have a material adverse effect on the reputation of
the Company or on Executive's reputation or that is not befitting of a senior
executive of the Company; or
(iii) the commission by Executive of an act involving moral turpitude or
dishonesty, whether or not in connection with Executive's employment hereunder;
or
(iv) Executive shall have committed any act of fraud against the Employer
or engaged in any other willful misconduct in connection with his duties
hereunder; or
(v) Executive shall have been convicted of a felony (other than a felony
relating to motor vehicle laws); provided, however, that, in each case, an event
giving rise to "Cause" shall not be finally determined to have occurred unless
admitted to in writing by the Executive or set forth in a final determination of
an arbitrator as provided in Section 10.04 hereof. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, no Cause for termination shall be deemed to exist with respect to the
Executive's acts described in clause (ii) above unless the Chief Executive
Officer shall have given prior written notice to the Executive specifying the
Cause with reasonable particularity and, within thirty (30) days after such
notice, the Executive shall not have cured or eliminated the problem or thing
giving rise to such Cause.
SECTION 6
TERMINATION COMPENSATION
6.01 Entitlement to Payment. (a) Subject to the provisions of Section 9.04,
if Executive's employment hereunder is terminated pursuant to Section 5.01, at
any time hereafter by the Employer, then Employer will pay to Executive an
amount equal to the Base Salary for two years following such termination. (The
amount to be paid pursuant to this Section 6.01 is referred to as the
"Termination Compensation" and the period for which such compensation is to be
paid is referred to as the ARelevant Period"). Such Termination Compensation
shall be paid to Executive in equal consecutive monthly installments during the
Relevant Period, with the first such installment paid on the first day of the
month next following the effective date of termination of Executive's employment
hereunder. Upon such termination, Executive shall also be entitled to any
accrued but unpaid bonus compensation. In addition, during the Relevant Period,
Executive shall be entitled to life insurance and medical benefits and all other
benefits, referred to in Section 4.02.
6.02. No Other Termination Compensation. Executive shall not be entitled to
any benefit or compensation following termination of his employment hereunder,
except as set forth in Section 6.01 and Section 8.01, if applicable.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, upon Executive's death,
permanent disability or termination by the Company without cause, the Company
will comply with the applicable terms of the Stockholder's Agreement dated June
27, 1996.
SECTION 7
LOCATION OF EXECUTIVE'S ACTIVITIES
7.01. Principal Place of Business. Executives's principal place of business
in the performance of his duties and obligations under this Agreement shall be
in the New York metropolitan area, which includes West Caldwell, New Jersey. For
so long as Employer's headquarters are located in the New York City metropolitan
area, Executive's principal place of business shall be located at such
headquarters. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, if
after a change of control or ownership of Employer as defined in Section 8,
Executive is required to perform his duties from a location other than the New
York City Metropolitan area, Executive may terminate his employment hereunder
and such termination shall be deemed to be a termination by Employer without
cause.
7.02. Travel. Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 7.01, Executive
will engage in such travel and spend time in other places as may be necessary or
appropriate in furtherance of his duties hereunder.
SECTION 8
CHANGE IN CONTROL
8.01. Effect of Change in Control. If a Change in Control (as hereinafter
defined) shall occur and Executive is terminated without cause, in addition to
the payments in Section 6.01, all outstanding stock options under the stock
option plan shall immediately vest.
(a) As used in this Agreement, "Change in Control" means the occurrence
during the Term of any of the following events:
(i) The sale to any purchaser of (a) all or substantially all of the assets
of the Employer or (B) capital stock representing more than 50% of the stock of
the Employer entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the
Employer; or
(ii) The merger of consolidation of the Employer with another corporation
if, immediately after such merger or consolidation, less than a majority of the
combined voting power of the then-outstanding securities entitled to vote
generally in the election of directors of the surviving or resulting corporation
in such merger or consolidation is held, directly ir indirectly, in the
aggregate by the holders immediately prior to such transaction of the
outstanding securities of the Employer; or
(iii) There is a report filed on Schedule 13D or Schedule 14D-1 (or any
successor schedule, form, or report or item therein), each promulgated pursuant
to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the "Exchange Act"),
disclosing that any person (as the term "person" is used in Section 13(d)(3) or
Section 14(d) (2) of the Exchange Act) has become the beneficial owner (as the
term "beneficial owner" is defined under Rule 13d-3 or any successor rule or
regulation promulgated under the Exchange Act) of securities representing 50% or
more of the combined voting power of the voting stock of Employer; or
( iv ) Employer files a report or proxy statement with the Securities and
Exchange Commission pursuant to the Exchange Act disclosing in response to Form
8-K or Schedule 14A (or any successor schedule, form, or report or item therein)
that a change in control of Employer has occurred or will occur in the future
pursuant to any then existing contract or transaction.
SECTION 9
EXCLUSIVITY OF SERVICES, CONFIDENTIAL
INFORMATION AND RESTRICTIVE COVENANTS
9.01. Exclusivity of Services. During the Employment Period and continuing
through the second anniversary of the date in which Executive ceases to be an
employee of the Company (the "Covenant Period"), Executive will not:
(i) Promote, participate or engage in any business on behalf of any Direct
Competitor of the Company, whether Executive is acting as owner, partner,
stockholder, employee, broker, agent, principal, trustee, corporate officer,
director, consultant or in any other capacity whatsoever; provided, however,
that this will not prevent Executive from holding for investment up to 1% of any
class of stock or other securities quoted or dealt in on a recognized stock
exchange or on Nasdaq. For purposes of this Section, a "Direct Competitor of the
Company" means (a) The Gap, Inc. or any Person under common control with The
Gap, Inc., (B) The Limited, Inc. or any Person under common control with The
Limited, Inc., (c) Gymboree or Baby Superstore or any Person under common
control with Gymboree or Baby Superstore, as the case may be, or (D) any Person
engaged in the sale of children's apparel and who derives more than fifty
percent of its gross revenues from the retail sales of children's apparel.
(ii) Directly or indirectly employ (other than on behalf of the Company),
solicit or entice away any director, officer or employee of the Company or any
of its subsidiaries; or
(iii) Take any action to interfere, directly or indirectly, with the
goodwill of the Company or any of its subsidiaries, or induce or attempt to
induce any Person doing business with the Company to cease doing business with
the Company.
9.02 Confidential Information During the Covenant Period Executive will not
(except in furthernace of the Company's business or as required by law) furnish
confidential information relating to the business or affairs of the Company, its
subsidiaries or any Person having dealings therewith, or permit or encourage the
use of such confidential information by another. During the Covenant Period,
Executive will not use the name of the Company or its subsidiaries in the
conduct of any business activities (except in furtherance of -the Company's
business) or for Executive's personal use without the prior written consent of
the Company.
9.03. Mutually Non-Disparagement. Neither Executive nor Employer will make
or authorize any public statement disparaging the other in its or his business
interests and affairs. Notwithstanding the foregoing, neither party shall be ( i
) required to make any statement that it or he believes to be false or
inaccurate, or (ii) restricted in connection with any litigation, arbitration or
similar proceeding or with respect to its response to any legal process.
9.04. Breaches of Provisions. If Executive breaches any of the provisions
of this Section 9 then, and in any such event, in addition to other remedies
available to Employer, Executive shall not be entitled to any Termination
Compensation, if any, made to him hereunder prior to Employer's discovery of
such breach.
SECTION 10
MISCELLANEOUS
10.01. Notices. Any notice, consent, or authorization required or permitted
to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing and sent to the party
for or to whom intended, at the address of such party set forth below, by
certified mail, postage paid, or at such other address as either party shall
designate by notice given to the other in the manner provided herein.
If to Employer: Attention: Steven Balasiano
Vice President & General Counsel
The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.
1 Dodge Drive
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
With Copies to: Ezra Dabah
CEO/ Chairman
The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.
1 Dodge Drive
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
If to Executive: Stanley Silver
7 Manchester Court
Morristown, New Jersey 07960
10.02. Taxes. Employer is authorized to withhold from payments made
hereunder to Executive such amounts for income tax, social security,
unemployment compensation and other judgement of Employer to comply with
applicable laws and regulations.
10.03. Governing Law. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed and
enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New York applicable to
agreements made and to be performed therein.
10.04. Headings. All descriptive headings in this Agreement are inserted
for convenience only and shall be disregarded in construing or applying any
provision of this Agreement.
10.05. Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, each
of which shall be deemed to be an original, but all of which together shall
constitute one and the same instrument.
10.06. Severability. If any provision of this Agreement or part thereof, is
held to be unenforceable, the remainder of such provisions of this Agreement, as
the case may be, shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect.
10.07. Entire Agreement and Integration. This Agreement contains the entire
agreement and understanding between Employer and Executive with respect to the
subject matter hereof. Such agreement supersedes any prior agreement between the
parties relating to the subject matter hereof.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of
the date first written above.
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
By: /s/ Seth Udasin
Asst. Sec.
EXHIBIT A
COMPENSATION
1. BASE SALARY: At the initial rate of $320,000 per year, payable in equal
installments not less frequently than monthly during each year of the Employment
Period. Base Salary shall be subject to annual review on each November, as the
Board may determine.
2. PERFORMANCE BONUS: Following each Bonus Period (as defined below),
Executive shall be entitled to receive a Performance Bonus based upon the
Earnings of Employer during such Bonus Period. The Performance Bonus for each
such Period will be payable within 90 days after the end of such period. The
amount of the Performance Bonus for each Bonus Period will be equal to a product
equal to (a) Employee's semi-annual Base Salary, times (b) 40%, times (c) the
Bonus Percentage (as hereinafter defined). The following provisions shall apply
to determinations relating to Performance Bonus.
"Bonus Percentage" shall mean, for each Bonus Period, a percentage for such
period that is determined based upon Earnings in accordance with a schedule
adopted by the Board for all senior executives prior to commencement of such
period or as soon thereafter as possible, except that the Bonus percentage shall
be (a) not less than 20% nor ( b ) more than 200% for any Bonus Period.
"Bonus Period" shall mean each of the two periods of approximately six
months duration within each fiscal year of the Employer, one beginning on the
first day of the fiscal year and ending on this Saturday on or nearest (whether
following or preceding) July 31, of the calender year in which it commenced, and
the other beginning on the Sunday following such Saturday and ending on the last
day of such fiscal year.
"Earnings" shall mean, for each Bonus Period, the net income before
interest and taxes of Employer for such period, but excluding extraordinary
items, as determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting
principles. The amount of Earnings shall be determined by Employer, with respect
to the Bonus Period ending on approximately July 31st of each year. Such
determination shall be delivered to Employee and shall be final and binding
unless within 20 days after delivery notice is given by Employee of his
objection to any specific aspect of such determination; any item not objected to
shall be final and binding. Employer and Employee shall then discuss any item
objected to and their written determination with respect to that item shall be
final and binding on Employer and Employee. If they are unable to reach a
written determination within 30 days after the notice of objection has been
given, the dispute shall be referred to Employer's independent accountants. The
accountants shall as soon as practicable thereafter determine the disposition of
any disputed item and shall set forth their determination in a written report to
be given to Employer and Employee. The determination by the independent
accountants of any disputed item (as set forth in their written report) shall be
final and binding on the parties. The amount of earnings shall be determined by
the independent accounting firm then retained by Employer as its independent
auditors, with respect to the Bonus Period ending on the last date of Employer's
fiscal year, and the determination of such firm shall be final and binding in
the absence of manifest error.
EXHIBIT 10.11
L E A S E A G R E E M E N T
BY AND BETWEEN:
SUBURBAN MALL V ASSOCIATES,
a New Jersey Partnership
"Landlord"
- and -
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.,
a Delaware Corporation,
"Tenant"
Premises: 1 Dodge Drive
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
DATED:
PREPARED BY: ROBERT S. BROWN, ESQ.
#13740-286
#380
August 10, 1993
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. LEASED PREMISES......................................................1
2. TERM OF LEASE........................................................2
3. RENT.................................................................2
4. PARKING AND USE OF EXTERIOR AREA.....................................3
5. USE..................................................................4
6. CONDITION OF LEASED PREMISES.........................................4
7. REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE..............................................4
8. UTILITIES............................................................6
9. TAXES................................................................6
10. INSURANCE............................................................7
11. SIGNS................................................................9
12. FIXTURES.............................................................9
13. BROKERAGE...........................................................10
14. FIRE AND CASUALTY...................................................10
15. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS, RULES AN REGULATIONS..........................11
16. INSPECTION BY LANDLORD..............................................13
17. DEFAULT BY TENANT...................................................14
18. LIABILITY OF TENANT FOR DEFICIENCY..................................16
19. NOTICES.............................................................17
20. NON-WAIVER BY LANDLORD..............................................17
21. RIGHT OF TENANT TO MAKE ALTERATIONS AND IMPROVEMENTS................17
22. NON-LIABILITY OF LANDLORD...........................................18
23. RESERVATION OF EASEMENT.............................................18
24. AIR, WATER AND GROUND POLLUTION.....................................19
25. STATEMENT OF ACCEPTANCE.............................................19
26. FORCE MAJEURE.......................................................19
27. STATEMENTS BY LANDLORD AND TENANT...................................20
28. CONDEMNATION........................................................20
29. REMEDIES............................................................21
30. QUIET ENJOYMENT.....................................................22
31. SURRENDER OF PREMISES...............................................22
32. INDEMNITY...........................................................22
33. LEASE CONSTRUCTION..................................................23
34. BIND AND INURE CLAUSE...............................................23
35. DEFINITIONS.........................................................23
36. DEFINITION OF TERM OF "LANDLORD"....................................23
37. COVENANTS OF FURTHER ASSURANCES.....................................24
38. COVENANT AGAINST LIENS..............................................24
39. SUBORDINATION.......................................................24
40. EXCULPATION OF LANDLORD.............................................25
41. LEASE TERMINATION CONTINGENCY.......................................25
42. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING...........................................25
43. GLASS...............................................................27
44. EXECUTION AND DELIVERY..............................................27
45. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS................................................27
46. TENANCY REVIEW......................................................27
47. OPTION TO RENEW.....................................................28
48. RIGHT OF FIRST REFUSAL................................................
SCHEDULE "A" - METES AND BOUND DESCRIPTION
SCHEDULE "B" - TENANT'S FLOOR PLAN
THIS AGREEMENT, made the 11th day of August 1993, by and between
SUBURBAN MALL V ASSOCIATES, a New Jersey Partnership, having an office at 14A
Worlds Fair Drive, Franklin Township, New Jersey 08873 (having a mailing address
at P.O. Box 5850, Somerset, New Jersey 08875) hereinafter called the "Landlord";
and THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC., a Delaware Corporation, having an
office at ___________________________ ___________________, hereinafter called
the "Tenant."
W I T N E S S E T H :
WHEREAS, the Landlord owns a building, containing 90,900 square feet
of gross rentable area, commonly known as 1 Dodge Drive, hereinafter referred to
as the "Building," which Building is located in the Borough of West Caldwell, in
the County of Essex and State of New Jersey, which lands and premises are more
particularly described by metes and bounds on Schedule "A" annexed hereto and
made a part hereof; and
WHEREAS, the Landlord intends to lease to Tenant a portion of the
Building, which portion contains approximately 73,571 square feet, outside
dimensions to center line of common wall, hereinafter referred to as the "Leased
Premises"; and
WHEREAS, the parties hereto wish to mutually define their rights,
duties and obligations in connection with the said lease,
NOW, THEREFORE, KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that for the rents
reserved, the mutual considerations herein and the parties mutually intending to
be legally bound hereby, the Landlord does demise, lease and let unto the Tenant
and the Tenant does rent and take from the Landlord the Leased Premises as
described in Paragraph #1, and the Landlord and Tenant do hereby mutually
covenant and agree as follows:
1. LEASED PREMISES
The Leased Premises shall consist of a portion of the Building, which
portion contains approximately 73,571 square feet, outside dimensions to center
line of common wall, together with all improvements constructed thereon for the
use of the Tenant, and all easements, improvements, tenements, appurtenances,
hereditament, fixtures and rights and privileges appurtenant thereto, and any
and all fixtures and equipment which are installed in said Building for the use
of the Tenant in its occupancy of the Leased Premises. The Leased Premises are
shown on a floor plan annexed hereto and made a part hereof as Schedule "B."
2. TERM OF LEASE
2.1 The Landlord leases unto the Tenant and the Tenant hires the
Leased Premises for the term of five (5) years and six (6) months, to commence
on October 1, 1993 (hereinafter called the "Commencement Date"), which term
shall expire on March 31, 1999.
2.2 Notwithstanding the Commencement Date hereunder, the Tenant shall
have the right to occupy the Leased Premises effective as of the date of
execution hereof for the purpose of installing its leasehold improvements
therein, provided that the approval of Tenant's use and occupancy of the Leased
Premises has been granted by the Borough of West Caldwell, as is hereinafter
required. During said period of occupancy prior to the Commencement Date, the
Tenant shall not be responsible to pay any installment of annual rent or
additional rent, except that Tenant shall be responsible for the cost of all
utility services allocable to the Leased Premises, in accordance with the
provisions of paragraph 8.1 hereof. All other terms and conditions of this Lease
Agreement shall be applicable to any such prior occupancy by the Tenant.
3. RENT
3.1 The Tenant covenants and agrees to pay annual rent as follows:
(a) Anything herein contained to the contrary
notwithstanding, it is expressly understood and agreed that the Tenant shall not
be responsible to pay any full or partial installment of annual rent during the
first six (6) months of the term of this lease. It is understood and agreed,
however, that all other terms and conditions of this lease shall apply during
said period, including Tenant's obligation for all additional rent and other
charges set forth herein.
(b) During the balance of the five (5) year and
six (6) month 1ease term, Tenant shall pay annual rent in the amount of THREE
HUNDRED TWELVE THOUSAND-SIX HUNDRED SEVENTY SIX AND 75/100 ($312,676.75) DOLLARS
(based upon the amount of $4.25 per square foot of the Leased Premises, per
annum), in equal installments of TWENTY SIX THOUSAND FIFTY SIX AND 40/100
($26,056.40) DOLLARS per month.
(c) All of the foregoing monthly payments shall
be made promptly in advance on the first day of each and every month during the
term of the lease without demand and without offset or deduction, together with
such additional rent and other charges required to be paid by Tenant as are
hereinafter set forth.
3.2 Simultaneously with the execution hereof, the Tenant has delivered
to the Landlord the first month's installment of annual rent payable hereunder.
3.3 Any installment of annual rent or additional rent accruing
hereunder, and any other sum payable hereunder by Tenant to Landlord which is
not paid prior to the fifth (5th) day of any lease month, shall bear a late
charge of ten (10%) per cent of such installment of annual rent or additional
rent, to be paid therewith, and the failure to pay such charge shall be a
default. Such late charge shall be deemed to be additional rent hereunder. It is
expressly understood and agreed that the foregoing late charge is not a penalty,
but agreed upon compensation to the Landlord for administrative costs incurred
by Landlord in connection with any such late payment. In addition, any payment
of annual rent or additional rent, which is not paid within thirty (30) days of
the date upon which it is due shall require the payment of interest at the rate
of one and one-half (1 1/2%) percent per month, calculated from the date that
such payment was due through the date that any such payment is actually made.
4. PARKING AND USE OF EXTERIOR AREA
4.1 The Tenant shall have the right to use up to 100 of the parking
spaces serving the Building of which the Leased Premises is a part on a
non-exclusive basis, in common with the other tenants thereof, and to use the
access driveways and allocated parking spaces for its business purposes and for
those of its agents, servants, employees or invitees. The Landlord reserves the
right to allocate designated parking spaces if Landlord chooses. The Landlord
and Tenant mutually agree that they will not block, hinder or otherwise obstruct
the access driveways and parking areas so as to impede the free flow of
vehicular traffic in and out of the Leased Premises. In connection with the use
of the loading platforms, if any, both Landlord and Tenant agree that they will
not use the same in connection with the conduct of their business so as to
unreasonably interfere with the use of the access driveways and parking areas.
4.2 The Tenant may not utilize any portion of the land outside of the
Leased Premises for outside storage of raw materials or finished products.
5. USE
The Tenant covenants and agrees to use and occupy the Leased Premises
for office and warehousing purposes only, which use by Tenant, however, is and
shall be expressly subject to all applicable zoning ordinances, rules and
regulations of any governmental instrumentalities, boards or bureaus having
jurisdiction thereof.
6. CONDITION OF LEASED PREMISES
It is expressly understood and agreed that the Tenant shall take the
Leased Premises and improvements as of the Commencement Date in an "as is"
condition, except that the Landlord hereby agrees that it shall deliver the
Leased Premises to the Tenant with all mechanical systems located therein in
good repair and operating condition.
7. REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE
7.1 The Tenant shall take good care of the Leased Premises and, at its
cost and expense, keep and maintain in good repair the interior of the Leased
Premises, including all non- structural repairs to the floor, the
air-conditioning and heating plant, the plumbing, pipes, sanitary sewer lines
and conduits, and fixtures belonging thereto; and shall replace all
air-conditioning, electrical, heating and plumbing plants, fixtures and systems,
including mechanical and working parts as may be required; and shall replace all
ballasts and fluorescent fixtures; and shall maintain interior water and sewer
pipes and connections, and shall generally maintain and repair the interior of
the Leased Premises, and shall, at the end or the expiration of the term,
deliver up the Leased Premises in good order and condition, damages by fire or
casualty, the elements and ordinary wear and tear excepted. The Tenant expressly
agrees that it shall enter into a periodic maintenance agreement with a
reputable heating, ventilating and air-conditioning contractor, which contract
shall provide for a minimum of two (2) inspections per year; in lieu of the
foregoing the Tenant shall have the right to utilize qualified employees for the
performance of such maintenance services as shall be approved by the Landlord,
which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. A copy of said
contract shall be forwarded to the Landlord prior to the Commencement Date and
thereafter on an annual basis, and copies of inspection reports shall be
delivered to the Landlord within ten (10) days of receipt thereof by Tenant. The
Tenant covenants and agrees that it shall not cause or permit any waste (other
than reasonable wear and tear), damage or disfigurement to the Leased Premises,
or any overloading of the floors of the Building, constituting part of the
Leased Premises. Tenant shall reimburse Landlord in connection with exterior
maintenance and repairs as hereinafter provided in Article 7.2.
7.2 The Tenant shall pay to the Landlord, monthly, as additional
rental, a sum equal to 81% of costs incurred by the Landlord for the
maintenance, repair and replacement of the following: (i) roof, gutters,
leaders, flashings, metal gravel stops and roof drains; (ii) parking lot,
driveways, walkways, exterior lighting; (iii) exterior sewer and utility lines;
(iv) lawns and shrubbery; (v) snow removal and general ground maintenance; (vi)
any signs serving the whole Building of which the Leased Premises are a part;
and (vii) standby sprinkler charges. Anything hereinabove contained in Article
7.1 or 7.2 to the contrary notwithstanding, it is expressly understood and
agreed that any replacement of any major capital item (including the roof, air
conditioning and heating plant, plumbing system, electrical system, exterior
sewer and utility lines, parking lot, driveways, walkways or exterior lighting)
or any major component thereof, shall be amortized over the useful life of any
such item which is replaced (not to exceed ten (10) years). The Tenant shall be
responsible to reimburse the Landlord for that portion of such amortized costs
which is allocable to the remaining term of this Lease. In the event of the
exercise of the Tenant of its Option to Renew as hereinafter contained in
Article 47, the Tenant shall at that time be responsible for the portion of such
amortized costs which is applicable to the option period. Any such costs which
are incurred by the Landlord shall be necessary, customary and reasonable for
the operation and maintenance of the Property in a first class manner, as befits
similar properties in the West Caldwell, New Jersey area. Notwithstanding the
above, the Landlord shall be responsible, at its sole cost and expense, for the
maintenance, repair and replacement of the exterior walls, structural steel and
foundation of the Building provided that any damage to the foregoing has not
been caused by the negligence or willful misconduct of the Tenant or Tenant's
agents, servants, employees or invitees, in which case such damage shall be
repaired by Landlord at Tenant's sole cost and expense.
7.3 During the first year of the lease term, the Landlord shall
estimate the cost of all of the repair, maintenance and replacement services
required pursuant to Article 7.2 above, as if the Building were 100% rented.
Landlord shall furnish such estimate (which will contain an itemized list of all
such estimated costs) to the Tenant, and Tenant shall pay its pro rata share
thereof equal to 81% each month of the lease term, together with the rent. At
the expiration of the first twelve months of the lease term, the Landlord shall
furnish to Tenant a breakdown, certified by the Landlord, as to the total cost
of maintenance, repair and replacement for the prior twelve months. In the event
Tenant's pro rata share shall be more than the aggregate paid by the Tenant
during the preceding twelve month period, Tenant shall pay to the Landlord, in
one lump sum, any difference in such obligation, said sum to be paid within
fifteen days after demand. In the event Tenant shall have overpaid its pro rata
share, any such overage shall be applied to the monthly maintenance, repair and
replacement charges prospectively due under the Lease. This procedure shall be
followed during each year of the lease term, and at the expiration of the lease,
any overage or underage shall be credited or paid after computation by the
Landlord, which obligation of Landlord and Tenant shall survive the expiration
of the lease term. Landlord hereby agrees that it shall deliver copies of
invoices justifying any statement delivered to the Tenant hereunder, upon
request.
8. UTILITIES
8.1 The Tenant shall, at its own cost and expense, pay all utility
meter and service charges, including gas, sewer, electric, water, standby
sprinkler charges, janitorial and garbage disposal services.
8.2 The Landlord is hereby granted the privilege of entering the
Leased Premises for the purpose of repairing any utility lines which serve the
Leased Premises. Any entry shall be upon reasonable notice except in the event
of emergency.
9. TAXES
9.1 The Tenant, in addition to the rent reserved, shall, during the
term of the lease, promptly pay to the Landlord, monthly, in advance, its
proportionate part of all real estate and personal property taxes assessed
against the land, Building and improvements of which the Leased Premises are a
part (the "Property"). Said obligation shall be prorated as of the commencement
and termination of the lease. In addition to the obligation to pay real estate
taxes as hereinabove set forth, the Tenant shall, during the term of this lease,
pay to the Landlord monthly, in advance, its proportionate part of any levy for
the installation of local improvements affecting the Property assessed by any
governmental body having jurisdiction thereof. The real estate tax obligation of
the Tenant shall include any tax or imposition for parking lot usage which may
be levied by any governmental body having jurisdiction thereof. The Tenant's
proportionate part of taxes and assessments is 81%.
9.2 The Landlord may contest any assessment or levy of taxes on the
Property. A contest conducted by the Landlord may include the Property and other
land and buildings owned by the Landlord.
9.3 If at any time during the term of this lease the method or scope
of taxation prevailing at the commencement of the lease term shall be altered,
modified or enlarged so as to cause the method of taxation to be changed, in
whole or in part, so that in substitution for the real estate taxes now assessed
there may be, in whole or in part, a capital levy or other imposition based on
the value of the Property, or the rents received therefrom, or some other form
of assessment based in whole or in part on some other valuation of the Property,
then and in such event, such substituted tax or imposition shall be payable and
discharged by the Tenant in the manner required pursuant to such law promulgated
which shall authorize such change in the scope of taxation, and as required by
the terms and conditions of the within lease.
9.4 Nothing in this lease contained shall require the Tenant to pay
any franchise, estate, inheritance, succession, capital levy or transfer tax of
the Landlord, or Federal Income Tax, State Income Tax, or excess profits or
revenue tax, unless such taxes are in substitution for real property taxes.
9.5 The Tenant shall pay to Landlord, monthly, as additional rent,
together with its rent to be paid pursuant to Article 3, one-twelfth of Tenant's
proportionate share of annual real estate taxes and assessments to be paid by
Tenant, as provided in Article 9.1 above. Landlord shall adjust Tenant's rent
payment from time to time based on annual tax requirements, and Landlord shall
furnish to Tenant, if requested, a computation and breakdown of Tenant's tax
obligation.
10. INSURANCE
10.1 The Tenant agrees to pay monthly, in advance, as additional rent,
its proportionate share (81%) of the annual insurance premium or premiums
charged to the Landlord for insurance coverage which insures the Property. The
insurance shall be for the full replacement value of all insurable improvements
with any customary extensions of coverage including, but not limited to,
vandalism, malicious mischief, sprinkler damage, flood insurance and
comprehensive liability. Tenant shall pay the full premium attributable to
casualty rent insurance, insuring the value of one (1) year's gross rental
obligation of Tenant hereunder, including taxes and insurance premiums. Any
increase in the premiums hereinabove referred to due to change in rating of the
Building of which the Leased Premises are a part, attributable to the use of the
Leased Premises by the Tenant shall be paid entirely by the Tenant. Landlord
shall certify annually, the annual cost of such insurance premiums, and shall
furnish to Tenant, if requested, a copy of all insurance premium bills for which
Tenant has been charged its pro rata share thereof.
10.2 The Tenant covenants and agrees that it will, at its sole cost
and expense, carry liability insurance covering the Leased Premises in the
minimum amount of ONE MILLION ($1,000,000.00) DOLLARS per accident for one (1)
person, THREE MILLION ($3,000,000.00) DOLLARS per accident for two (2) or more
persons, and a minimum amount of TWO HUNDRED FIFTY THOUSAND ($250,000.00)
DOLLARS for property damage, and the Tenant further covenants and agrees that it
will add as a party insured by such policy the interest of the Landlord and will
furnish Landlord with a certificate of said liability insurance prior to the
commencement of the term of this lease and thereafter on an annual basis.
10.3 It is expressly understood and agreed that all policies of
insurance shall contain a clause that the same shall not be cancelled except on
thirty (30) days' written notice to any and all parties in interest.
10.4 The parties hereto mutually covenant and agree that each party,
in connection with insurance policies required to be furnished in accordance
with the terms and conditions of this lease, or in connection with insurance
policies which they obtain insuring such insurable interest as Landlord or
Tenant may have in its own properties, whether personal or real, shall expressly
waive any right of subrogation on the part of the insurer against the Landlord
or Tenant as the same may be applicable, which right to the extent not
prohibited or violative of any such policy is hereby expressly waived, and
Landlord and Tenant each mutually waive all right of recovery against each
other, their agents, or employees for any loss, damage or injury of any nature
whatsoever to property or person for which either party is required by this
lease to carry insurance.
11. SIGNS
The Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, have the right and
privilege of using Tenant's proportionate share of the tombstone signage located
in the front of the Building of which the Leased Premises are a part, for the
purpose of identifying the Tenant. The said sign shall comply with the
applicable rules and regulations of the applicable governmental boards and
bureaus having jurisdiction thereof, and shall be approved by the Landlord,
which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. The erection of
such sign shall not cause any structural damage to the Building. It is expressly
understood and agreed that the Tenant shall not erect roof signs.
12. FIXTURES
The Tenant is given the right and privilege of installing and removing
property, machinery, equipment and fixtures in the Leased Premises during the
term of the lease subject to compliance with applicable rules and regulations of
governmental boards and bureaus having jurisdiction thereof at the cost and
expense of Tenant. However, if the Tenant is in default and moves out, or is
dispossessed, and fails to remove any property, machinery, equipment and
fixtures or other property prior to such dispossession or removal, then and in
that event, the said property, machinery, equipment and fixtures or other
property shall be deemed, at the option of the Landlord, to be abandoned; or in
lieu thereof, at the Landlord's option, the Landlord may remove such property
and charge the reasonable cost and expense of removal, storage and disposal to
the Tenant, together with an additional twenty one (21%) per cent of such costs
for Landlord's overhead and profit, which total costs shall be deemed to be
additional rent hereunder. The Tenant shall be liable for any damage which it
causes in the removal of said property from the Leased Premises.
13. BROKERAGE
The parties mutually represent to each other that RESOURCE REALTY OF
NEW JERSEY, INC. is the sole broker who negotiated and consummated the within
transaction, and that neither party dealt with any other broker in connection
with the within lease, it being understood and agreed that the Landlord shall be
responsible, at its sole cost and expense, to pay the real estate brokerage in
connection with this lease transaction. Landlord agrees to indemnify, defend and
save harmless Tenant in connection with the claims of any other real estate
broker claiming commissions in connection with the within transaction and
claiming authority from Landlord. Tenant agrees to indemnify, defend and save
harmless Landlord in connection with the claims of any other real estate broker
claiming commissions in connection with the within transaction and claiming
authority from Tenant.
14. FIRE AND CASUALTY
14.1 In case of any damage to the Building by fire or other casualty
occurring during the term or previous thereto, which renders the Leased Premises
wholly untenantable so that the same cannot be repaired within one hundred
eighty (180) days from the happening of such damage, then the term hereby
created shall, at the option of the Landlord, terminate from the date of such
damage. If the Landlord elects to terminate the lease, Landlord shall notify the
Tenant of such election within thirty (30) days of the happening of the fire or
casualty, and in such event the Tenant shall immediately surrender the Leased
Premises and shall pay annual rent and additional rent only to the time of such
damage and the Landlord may re-enter and re-possess the Leased Premises,
discharged from this lease. In the event the Landlord can restore the Leased
Premises within one hundred eighty (180) days, it shall advise the Tenant of
such fact, and the lease shall remain in full force and effect during the period
of Landlord's restoration, except that annual rent and additional rent shall
abate, upon the happening of fire or casualty, and while the repairs and
restorations are being made, but the rent shall recommence upon restoration of
the Leased Premises and delivery of the same by the Landlord to the Tenant.
Landlord agrees that it will undertake reconstruction and restoration of the
Leased Premises with due diligence and reasonable speed and dispatch, subject to
the terms and conditions of Article 26.
14.2 If the Building shall be damaged, but the damage is repairable
within one hundred eighty (180) days the Landlord agrees to repair the same with
due diligence and reasonable speed and dispatch subject to the terms and
conditions of Article 26. In such event, the rent accrued and accruing shall not
abate, except for that portion of the Leased Premises that has been rendered
untenantable and as to that portion the rent shall abate, based on equitable
adjustments.
14.3 The Tenant shall immediately notify the Landlord in case of fire
or other damage to the Leased Premises.
14.4 Notwithstanding anything contained in Article 14.1 or 14.2 above,
if such repairs are for any reason not completed within two hundred ten (210)
days, then the Tenant shall have the right to terminate this lease upon written
notice to the Landlord of such election, and in such event of termination
Landlord and Tenant shall thereupon be released of liability one to the other,
and the within lease shall be deemed null and void.
14.5 Rent, as referred to in this Article 14, is intended to include
annual rent, additional rent and all other lease charges required to be paid by
Tenant pursuant to this lease.
15. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS, RULES AND REGULATIONS
15.1 (i) The Tenant covenants and agrees that upon acceptance and
occupancy of the Leased Premises, it will, during the lease term, promptly, at
Tenant's cost and expense, execute and comply with all statutes, ordinances,
rules, orders, regulations and requirements of the Federal, State and Municipal
governments and of any and all their instrumentalities, departments and bureaus,
applicable to the Leased Premises, as the same may require correction,
prevention and abatement of nuisances, violations or other grievances, in, upon
or connected with the Leased Premises, and/or arising from the operations of the
Tenant therein.
(ii) The Tenant covenants and agrees, at its own
cost and expense, to comply with such regulations or requests as may be required
by the fire or liability insurance carriers providing insurance for the Leased
Premises, and will further comply with such other requirements that may be
promulgated by the Board of Fire Underwriters, in connection with the use and
occupancy by the Tenant of the Leased Premises in the conduct of its business.
(iii) The Tenant covenants and agrees that it will not
commit any nuisance, nor permit the emission of any objectionable
sound, noise or odors which would be violative of any applicable governmental
rule or regulation or would per se create a nuisance. The Tenant further
covenants and agrees that it will handle and dispose of all rubbish, garbage and
waste in connection with the Tenant's operations in the Leased Premises in order
to keep the premises in an orderly condition and in order to avoid unreasonable
emission of dirt, fumes, odors or debris which may constitute a nuisance or
induce pests or vermin.
15.2 In case the Tenant shall fail or neglect to comply with the
aforesaid statutes, ordinances, rules, orders, regulations and requirements or
any of them, or in case the Tenant shall neglect or fail to make any necessary
repairs, then the Landlord or the Landlord's agents may after ten (10) days'
notice (except for emergency repairs, which may be made immediately) enter the
Leased Premises and make said repairs and comply with any and all of the said
statutes, ordinances, rules, orders, regulations or requirements, at the cost
and expense of the Tenant and in case of the Tenant's failure to pay therefor,
the said cost and expense shall be added to the next month's rent and be due and
payable as such, or the Landlord may deduct the same from the balance of any sum
remaining in the Landlord's hands. This provision is in addition to the right of
the Landlord to terminate this lease by reason of any default on the part of the
Tenant, subject to the rights of the Tenant as hereinabove mentioned in the
manner as in this lease otherwise provided.
15.3 Without limiting anything hereinabove contained in this Article
15, Tenant expressly covenants and agrees to fully comply with the provisions of
the New Jersey Industrial Site Remediation Act (N.J.S.A. 13:1K-6, et seq.)
hereinafter referred to as "ISRA", and all regulations promulgated thereto (or
under it predecessor statute, the Environmental Cleanup Responsibility Act, if
applicable) prior to the expiration or earlier termination of the within lease,
or at any time that any action of the Tenant triggers the applicability of ISRA.
In particular, the Tenant agrees that it shall comply with the provisions of
ISRA in the event of any "closing, terminating or transferring" of Tenant's
operations, as defined by and in accordance with the regulations which have been
promulgated pursuant to ISRA. In the event evidence of such compliance is not
delivered to the Landlord prior to surrender of the Leased Premises by the
Tenant to the Landlord, it is understood and agreed that the Tenant shall be
liable to pay to the Landlord an amount equal to one and one-half (1-1/2) times
the annual rent then in effect, prorated on a monthly basis, together with all
applicable additional rent from the date of such surrender until such time as
evidence of compliance with ISRA has been delivered to the Landlord, and
together with any costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in enforcing Tenant's
obligations under this Article 15.3. Evidence of compliance, as used herein,
shall mean a "letter Of non-applicability" issued by the New Jersey Department
of Environmental Protection and Energy, hereinafter referred to as "NJDEPE", or
an approved "negative declaration" or a "remedial action workplan" which has
been fully implemented and approved by NJDEPE. Evidence of compliance shall be
delivered to the Landlord, together with copies of all submissions made to, and
received from, the NJDEPE, including all environmental reports, test results and
other supporting documentation. In addition to the above, Tenant hereby agrees
that it shall cooperate with Landlord in the event of the termination or
expiration of any other lease affecting the Property, or a transfer of any
portion of the property indicated on Schedule "A", or any interest therein,
which triggers the provisions of ISRA, it being understood that Landlord shall
be responsible to comply with ISRA in any such instance. In such case, Tenant
agrees that it shall fully cooperate with Landlord in connection with any
information or documentation which may be requested by the NJDEPE, at no cost to
Tenant. In the event that any remediation of the Property is required in
connection with the conduct by Tenant of its business at the Leased Premises,
Tenant expressly covenants and agrees that it shall be responsible for that
portion of said remediation which is attributable to the Tenant's use and
occupancy thereof. Tenant hereby represents and warrants that its Standard
Industrial Classification No. is , and that Tenant shall not generate,
manufacture, refine, transport, treat, store, handle or dispose of "hazardous
substances" as the same are defined under ISRA and the regulations promulgated
pursuant thereto, except in accordance with all applicable statutes, laws,
rules, regulations and requirements of applicable governmental entities having
jurisdiction. Tenant hereby agrees that it shall promptly inform Landlord of any
change in its SIC number or the nature of the business to be conducted in the
Leased Premises. The within covenants shall survive the expiration or earlier
termination of the lease term.
16. INSPECTION BY LANDLORD
The Tenant agrees that the said Landlord's agents, and other
representatives, shall have the right, during normal business hours, to enter
into and upon the Leased Premises, or any part thereof, with 24 hour prior oral
notice at all reasonable hours for the purpose of examining the same, or for
exhibiting the same to prospective tenants [within the last six (6) months of
the term of this lease or at any time during which the Tenant is in default
under the terms and conditions of this lease] and purchasers (at all times) in
the presence of a representative of Tenant except in the event of emergency) or
making such repairs or alterations therein as may be necessary for the safety
and preservation thereof, without unduly or unreasonably disturbing the
operations of the Tenant (except in the event of emergency).
17. DEFAULT BY TENANT
17.1 Each of the following shall be deemed a default by Tenant and a
breach of this lease:
(1) (i) filing of a petition by the Tenant for
adjudication as a bankrupt, or for reorganization, or for an
arrangement under any federal or state statute, except in a Chapter 11
Bankruptcy where the rent and additional rent stipulated herein is
being paid and the terms of the lease are being complied with;
(ii) dissolution or liquidation of the Tenant;
(iii) appointment of a permanent receiver or a
permanent trustee of all or substantially all of the property of the
Tenant, if such appointment shall not be vacated within one hundred
twenty (120) days, provided the rent and additional rent stipulated
herein is being paid and the terms of the lease are being complied
with, during said one hundred twenty (12O) day period;
(iv) taking possession of the property of
the Tenant by a governmental officer or agency pursuant to statutory
authority for dissolution, rehabilitation, reorganization or
liquidation of the Tenant if such taking of possession shall not be
vacated within one hundred twenty (12O) days, provided the rent and
additional rent stipulated herein is being paid and the terms of the
lease are being complied with, during said one hundred twenty (120)
day period;
(v) making by the Tenant of an assignment
for the benefit of creditors;
(vi) abandonment, desertion or vacation of
the Leased Premises by the Tenant for a period in excess
of thirty (30) days.
If any event mentioned in this subdivision (1) shall
occur, Landlord may thereupon or at any time thereafter elect to cancel
this lease by ten (10) days' notice to the Tenant and this lease shall
terminate on the day in such notice specified with the same force and
effect as if that date were the date herein fixed for the expiration of
the term of the lease.
(2) (i) Default in the payment of the rent or
additional rent herein reserved or any part thereof for a period of
seven (7) days after the same is due and payable as in this lease
required.
(ii) A default in the performance of any
other covenant or condition of this lease on the part of the Tenant to
be performed for a period of-thirty (30) days after notice. For
purposes of this subdivision (2) (ii) hereof, no default on the part of
Tenant in performance of work required to be performed or acts to be
done or conditions to be modified shall be deemed to exist if steps
shall have been commenced by Tenant diligently after notice to rectify
the same and shall be prosecuted to completion with reasonable
diligence, and if the Landlord is indemnified against loss or liability
arising from the default.
17.2 In case of any such default under Article 17.1 (2), at any time
following the expiration of the respective grace periods above mentioned,
Landlord may serve a notice upon the Tenant electing to terminate this lease
upon a specified date not less than seven (7) days after the date of serving
such notice and this lease shall then expire on the date so specified as if that
date had been originally fixed as the expiration date of the term herein
granted; however, a default under Article 17.1 (2), hereof shall be deemed
waived if such default is made good before the date specified for termination in
the notice of termination served on the Tenant.
17.3 In case this lease shall be terminated as hereinbefore provided,
or by summary proceedings or otherwise, Landlord or its agents may, immediately
or any time thereafter, re-enter and resume possession of the Leased Premises or
such part thereof, and remove all persons and property therefrom, either by
summary proceedings or by a suitable action or proceeding at law, without being
liable for any damages therefor, unless caused by the negligence or intentional
misconduct of the Landlord or Landlord's agents, servants or employees. No
re-entry by landlord shall be deemed an acceptance of a surrender of this lease.
17.4 In case this lease shall be terminated as hereinafter provided,
or by summary proceedings or otherwise, Landlord may, in its own name and in its
own behalf, relet the whole or any portion of the Leased Premises, for any
period equal to or greater or less than the remainder of the then current terms,
for any sum which it may deem reasonable, to any tenant which it may deem
suitable and satisfactory, and for any use and purpose which it may deem
appropriate, and in connection with any such lease Landlord may make such
changes in the character of the improvements on the Leased Premises as Landlord
may determine to be appropriate or helpful in effecting such lease and may grant
concessions or free rent. Landlord hereby agrees that it shall use reasonable
efforts to relet the Leased Premises so as to mitigate the damages otherwise
payable by the Tenant hereunder. Landlord shall not in any event be required to
pay Tenant any surplus of any sums received by Landlord on a reletting of the
Leased Premises in excess of the rent reserved in this Lease.
17.5 (1) In case this lease be terminated by summary proceedings or
otherwise, as provided in this Article 17, and whether or not the Leased
Premises be relet, Landlord shall be entitled to recover from the Tenant, the
following:
(i) a sum equal to all reasonable expenses,
if any, including reasonable counsel fees, incurred by Landlord in
recovering possession of the Leased Premises, and all reasonable costs
and charges for the care of the Leased Premises while vacant, which
damages shall be due and payable by Tenant to Landlord at such time or
times as such expenses shall have been incurred by Landlord; and
(ii) a sum equal to all damages set forth in
this Article 17 and in Article 18.
(2) Without any previous notice or demand,
separate actions may be maintained by Landlord against Tenant from time to time
to recover any damages which, at the commencement of any such action, have then
or theretofore become due and payable to the Landlord under this Article 17 and
subsections hereof without waiting until the end of the then current term.
(3) All sums which Tenant has agreed to pay by
way of adjustments to rent or equitable adjustments in utility charges shall be
deemed rent reserved in this lease within the meaning of this Article 17 and
subsections hereof.
18. LIABILITY OF TENANT FOR DEFICIENCY
In the event that the relation of the Landlord and Tenant may cease or
terminate by reason of the default by the Tenant and the re-entry of the
Landlord as permitted by the terms and conditions contained in this lease or by
the ejectment of the Tenant by summary proceedings or other judicial
proceedings, or after the abandonment of the Leased Premises by the Tenant, it
is hereby agreed that the Tenant shall remain liable to pay in monthly payments
the rent which shall accrue subsequent to the re-entry by the Landlord, and the
Tenant expressly agrees to pay as damages for the breach of the covenants herein
contained the difference between the rent reserved and the rent collected and
received, if any, by the Landlord, during the remainder of the unexpired term,
as the amount of such difference or deficiency shall from time to time be
ascertained.
19. NOTICES
19.1 All notices required or permitted to be given to the Landlord
shall be given by certified mail, return receipt requested, at the address
hereinbefore set forth on the first page of this lease, and/or such other place
as the Landlord may designate in writing.
19.2 All notices required or permitted to be given to the Tenant shall
be given by certified mail, return receipt requested, at the address
hereinbefore set forth on the first page of this lease, and/or such other place
as the Tenant may designate in writing, with a copy to Donald B. Ross, Jr.,
Esq., Whipple, Ross & Hirsch, 9 Campus Drive, Parsippany, New Jersey 07054.
20. NON-WAIVER BY LANDLORD
The failure of the Landlord or Tenant to insist upon strict
performance of any of the covenants or conditions of this lease, or to exercise
any option of the Landlord or Tenant (except for Tenant's option to renew, as
hereinafter set forth, which must be exercised strictly in accordance with its
terms) herein conferred in any one or more instances, shall not be construed as
a waiver by the Landlord or Tenant of any of its rights or remedies in this
Lease, and shall not be construed as a waiver, relinquishment or failure of any
such covenants, conditions, or options, but the same shall be and remain in full
force and effect.
21. RIGHT OF TENANT TO MAKE ALTERATIONS AND IMPROVEMENTS
21.1 The Tenant may make alterations, additions or improvements to the
Leased Premises only with the prior written consent of the Landlord, which
consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, provided such
alterations, additions or improvements do not lessen the value of the Leased
Premises. Notwithstanding the above, the Landlord's consent shall not be
required in connection with non-structural alterations costing less than SEVEN
THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED AND 00/100 ($7,500.00) DOLLARS or for the installation of
normal decorations. Any consent which Landlord may give shall be conditioned
upon Tenant furnishing to Landlord, detailed plans and specifications with
respect to any such changes, to be approved by Landlord in writing. As a
condition of such consent, Landlord reserves the right to require Tenant to
remove, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, any such alterations or additions
prior to the expiration of the lease term, it being understood that Landlord
shall make such election at the time that Landlord gives its consent to the
making of any such alteration or addition. If Landlord does not require such
removal, any such alterations or additions shall be deemed to be part of the
realty upon installation. Landlord and Tenant hereby agree that they shall
conduct a walkthrough inspection of the Leased Premises at least ninety (90)
days prior to the expiration date of this lease, at which time Landlord shall
determine which alterations and improvements will need to be removed by the
Tenant at Tenant's sole cost and expense, and which shall remain. All such
alterations, additions or improvements shall be only in conformity with
applicable governmental and insurance company requirements and regulations
applicable to the Leased Premises. Tenant shall hold and save Landlord harmless
and indemnify Landlord against any claim for damage or injury in connection with
any of the foregoing work which Tenant may make as hereinabove provided.
21.2 Nothing herein contained shall be construed as a consent on the
part of the Landlord to subject the estate of the Landlord to liability under
the Mechanic's Lien Law of the State of New Jersey, it being expressly
understood that the Landlord's estate shall not be subject to such liability.
22. NON-LIABILITY OF LANDLORD
22.1 It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the parties
to this agreement that the Tenant shall assume all risk of damage to its
property, equipment and fixtures occurring in or about the Leased Premises,
whatever the cause of such damage or casualty.
22.2 It is expressly understood and agreed that in any event, the
Landlord shall not be liable for any damage or injury to property or person
caused by or resulting from steam, electricity, gas, water, rain, ice or snow,
or any leak or flow from or into any part of said building, or from any damage
or injury resulting or arising from any other cause or happening whatsoever,
except for the negligence or intentional misconduct of the Landlord or
Landlord's agents, servants or employees.
23. RESERVATION OF EASEMENT
The Landlord reserves the right, easement and privilege, upon
reasonable prior written notice to the Tenant to enter on the Leased Premises in
order to install, at its own cost and expense, any storm drains and sewers
and/or utility lines in connection therewith as may be required by the Landlord.
It is understood and agreed that if such work as may be required by Landlord
requires an installation which may displace any paving, lawn, seeded area or
shrubs the Landlord, shall, at its own cost and expense, restore said paving,
lawn, seeded area or shrubs. The Landlord covenants that the foregoing work
shall not unreasonably interfere with the normal operation of Tenant's business,
and the Landlord shall indemnify and save the Tenant harmless in connection with
such installations.
24. AIR, WATER AND GROUND POLLUTION
The Tenant expressly covenants and agrees to indemnify, defend, and
save the Landlord harmless against any claim, damage, liability, costs,
penalties, or fines which the Landlord may suffer as a result of air, water or
ground pollution caused by the Tenant in its use of the Leased Premises. The
Tenant covenants and agrees to notify the Landlord immediately of any claim or
notice served upon it with respect to any such claim the Tenant is causing
water, air or ground pollution; and the Tenant, in any event, will take
immediate steps to halt, remedy or cure any pollution of air, water or ground
caused by the Tenant by its use of the Leased Premises. Landlord hereby agrees
that it shall indemnify, defend and save harmless the Tenant from and against
any and all claims or liabilities incurred in connection with the environmental
condition of the Property existing as of the Commencement Date hereunder, or
which later caused by the Landlord. The within covenants shall survive the
expiration or earlier termination of this lease.
25. STATEMENT OF ACCEPTANCE
Upon the delivery of the Leased Premises to the Tenant, pursuant to
the terms and conditions of this lease, the Tenant covenants and agrees that it
will furnish to the Landlord a statement that it accepts the Leased Premises and
agrees to pay rent from the date of acceptance, subject to the terms and
conditions of the lease as herein contained, which statement may be in
recordable form if required by the Landlord, and which statement shall set forth
the Commencement Date and the date of expiration of the lease term.
26. FORCE MAJEURE
Except for the obligation of the Tenant to pay rent and other charges
as in this lease provided, the period of time during which the Landlord or
Tenant is prevented from performing any act required to be performed under this
lease by reason of fire, catastrophe, strikes, lockouts, civil commotion, acts
of God or the public enemy, government prohibitions or preemptions, embargoes,
inability to obtain material or labor by reason of governmental regulations or
prohibitions, the act or default of the other party, or other events beyond the
reasonable control of Landlord or Tenant, as the case may be, shall be added to
the time for performance of such act.
27. STATEMENTS BY LANDLORD AND TENANT
Landlord and Tenant agree at any time and from time to time upon not
less than ten (10) days' prior notice from the other to execute, acknowledge and
deliver to the party requesting same, a statement in writing, certifying that
this lease is unmodified and in full force and effect (or if there have been
modifications, that the same is in full force and effect as modified and stating
the modifications) that it is not in default (or if claimed to be in default,
stating the amount and nature of the default) and specifying the dates to which
the basic rent and other charges have been paid in advance, if any; it being
intended that any such statement delivered pursuant to this Article may be
relied upon as to the facts contained therein.
28. CONDEMNATION
28.1 If due to the condemnation or taking or seizure by any authority
having the right of eminent domain, (i) more than fifteen (15%) percent of the
Leased Premises is taken or rendered untenantable, or (ii) in the event that
more than twenty-five (25%) percent of the ground is taken (including the
parking areas, but exclusive of front, side and rear set back areas), or (iii)
if access to the Leased Premises be denied, which taking in the manner
hereinabove referred to and in excess of the foregoing percentage amounts shall
unreasonably or unduly interfere with the use of the Building, ground area,
parking area, or deny access to these premises, then and in either of such
events as hereinabove provided, the lease term created shall, at the option of
the Tenant, terminate, cease and become null and void from the date when the
authority exercising the power of eminent domain takes or interferes with the
use of the Building on the Leased Premises, its use of the ground area, parking
area, or area of access to the Leased Premises. The Tenant shall only be
responsible for the payment of rent until the time of surrender. In any event,
no part of the Landlord's condemnation award shall belong to or be claimed by
the Tenant. Without diminishing Landlord's award, the Tenant shall have the
right to make a claim against the condemning authority for such independent
claim which it may have and as may be allowed by law, for Tenant's property,
equipment and fixtures and for the costs and damages due to relocating, moving
and other similar costs and charges directly incurred by the Tenant and
resulting from such condemnation.
28.2 In the event of any partial taking which would not be cause for
termination of the within lease or in the event of any partial taking in excess
of the percentages provided in Article 28.1, and in which event the Tenant shall
elect to retain the balance of the Leased Premises remaining after such taking,
then and in either event, the rent shall abate in an amount mutually to be
agreed upon between the Landlord and Tenant based on the relationship that the
character of the property prior to the taking bears to the property which shall
remain after such condemnation. In any event, no part of the Landlord's
condemnation award shall belong to or be claimed by the Tenant. However, the
Landlord shall, to the extent permitted by applicable law and as the same may be
practicable on the site of the Leased Premises, at the Landlord's sole cost and
expense, promptly make such repairs and alterations in order to restore the
Building and/or improvements to usable condition to the extent of the
condemnation award.
29. REMEDIES
29.1 The rights and remedies given to the Landlord and Tenant in this
lease are distinct, separate and cumulative remedies, and no one of them,
whether or not exercised by the Landlord or Tenant, shall be deemed to be in
exclusion of any of the others.
29.2 In addition to any other legal remedies for violation or breach
by or on the part of the Landlord or Tenant or by any undertenant or by anyone
holding or claiming under the Tenant or any one of them, of the restrictions,
agreements or covenants of this lease on the part of the Landlord or Tenant to
be performed or fulfilled, such violation or breach shall be restrainable by
injunction at the suit of the Landlord or Tenant, as applicable.
29.3 No receipt of money by the Landlord from any receiver, trustee or
custodian or debtors in possession shall reinstate, continue or extend the term
of this lease or affect any notice theretofore given to the Tenant, or to any
such receiver, trustee, custodian or debtor in possession, or operate as a
waiver or estoppel of the right of the Landlord to recover possession of the
Leased Premises for any of the causes therein enumerated by any lawful remedy;
and the failure of the Landlord or Tenant to enforce any covenant or condition
by reason of its breach by the other party shall not be deemed to void or affect
the right of the Landlord or Tenant to enforce the same covenant or condition on
the occasion of any subsequent default or breach.
30. QUIET ENJOYMENT
The Landlord further covenants that the Tenant, on paying the rental
and performing the covenants and conditions contained in this Lease, shall and
may peaceably and quietly have, hold and enjoy the Leased Premises for the term
aforesaid.
31. SURRENDER OF PREMISES
On the last day, or earlier permitted termination of the lease term,
Tenant shall quit and surrender the Leased Premises in good and orderly
condition and repair (reasonable wear and tear, and damage by fire or other
casualty excepted) and shall deliver and surrender the Leased Premises to the
Landlord peaceably, together with all alterations, additions and improvements
in, to or on the Leased Premises made by Tenant as permitted under the lease.
The Landlord reserves the right, however, to require the Tenant at its cost and
expense to remove any alterations or improvements installed by the Tenant, which
covenant shall survive the surrender and the delivery of the Leased Premises as
provided hereunder. Prior to the expiration of the lease term the Tenant shall
remove all of its property, fixtures, equipment and trade fixtures from the
Leased Premises. All property not removed by Tenant shall be deemed abandoned by
Tenant, and Landlord reserves the right to charge the reasonable cost of such
removal to the Tenant, which obligation shall survive the lease termination and
surrender hereinabove provided. If the Leased Premises be not surrendered at the
end of the lease term, Tenant shall indemnify Landlord against loss or liability
resulting from delay by Tenant in surrendering the Leased Premises.
32. INDEMNITY
Anything in this lease to the contrary notwithstanding, and without
limiting the Tenant' 8 obligation to provide insurance pursuant to Article 10
hereunder but subject to the provisions of Article 10.4, the Tenant covenants
and agrees that it will indemnify, defend and save harmless the Landlord against
and from all liabilities, obligations, damages, penalties, claims, costs,
charges and expenses, including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees,
which may be imposed upon or incurred by Landlord by reason of any of the
following occurring during the term of this lease:
(i) Any matter, cause or thing arising out of
Tenant's use, occupancy, control or management of the
Leased Premises and any part thereof;
(ii) Any negligence on the part of the Tenant or
any of its agents, contractors, servants, employees,
licensees or invitees;
(iii) Any accident, injury, damage to any person or
property occurring in, or about the Leased Premises;
(iv) Any failure on the part of Tenant to perform or comply with
any of the covenants, agreements, terms or conditions contained in this
lease on its part to be performed or complied with.
(v) Subject to the exception set forth in Article 22.1 hereof, the
foregoing shall not require indemnity by Tenant in the event of damage
or injury occasioned by the negligence or acts of commission or
omission of the Landlord, its agents, servants or employees.
Landlord shall promptly notify Tenant of any such claim asserted against it and
shall promptly send to Tenant copies of all papers or legal process served upon
it in connection with any action or proceeding brought against Landlord by
reason of any such claim.
33. LEASE CONSTRUCTION
This lease shall be construed pursuant to the laws of the State of New
Jersey.
34. BIND AND INURE CLAUSE
The terms, covenants and conditions of the within lease shall be
binding upon and inure to the benefit of each of the parties hereto and their
respective successors and assigns.
35. DEFINITIONS
The neuter gender, when used herein and in the acknowledgment
hereafter set forth, shall include all persons and corporations, and words used
in the singular shall include words in the plural where the text of the
instrument so requires.
36. DEFINITION OF TERM OF "LANDLORD"
When the term "Landlord" is used in this lease it shall be construed
to mean and include only the owner of the title to the Building containing the
Leased Premises. Upon the transfer by the Landlord of the title, the Landlord
shall advise the Tenant in writing by certified mail, return receipt requested,
of the name of the Landlord's transferee. In such event, the Landlord shall be
automatically freed and relieved from and after the date of such transfer of
title of all personal liability with respect to the performance of any of the
covenants and obligations on the part of the Landlord herein contained to be
performed, provided any such transfer and conveyance by the Landlord is
expressly subject to the assumption by the grantee or transferee of the
obligations of the Landlord to be performed pursuant to the terms and conditions
of the within lease.
37. COVENANTS OF FURTHER ASSURANCES
If, in connection with obtaining financing for the improvements on the
Leased Premises, the Mortgage Lender shall request reasonable modifications in
this lease as a condition to such financing, Tenant will not unreasonably
withhold, delay or refuse its consent thereto, provided that such modifications
do not in Tenant's reasonable judgment increase the obligations of Tenant
hereunder or materially adversely affect the leasehold interest hereby created
or Tenant's use and enjoyment of the Leased Premises.
38. COVENANT AGAINST LIENS
Tenant agrees that it shall not encumber, or suffer or permit to be
encumbered, the Leased Premises or the fee thereof by any lien, charge or
encumbrance, and Tenant shall have no authority to mortgage or hypothecate this
lease in any way whatsoever. Any violation of this Article shall be considered a
breach of this lease.
39. SUBORDINATION
This lease shall be subject and subordinate at all times to the lien
of any mortgages or ground leases or other encumbrances now or hereafter placed
on the land and Building and Leased Premises without the necessity of any
further instrument or act on the part of Tenant to effectuate such
subordination, but Tenant covenants and agrees to execute and deliver upon
demand such further instrument or instruments evidencing such subordination of
the lease to the lien of any such mortgage or ground lease or other encumbrances
as shall be desired by a mortgagee or proposed mortgagee or by any person.
Tenant appoints Landlord the attorney in fact of the Tenant irrevocably, to
execute and deliver any such instrument or instruments for and in the name of
Tenant. Landlord hereby agrees that it shall use its best efforts to obtain from
its current mortgagee a subordination, non-disturbance and attornment agreement
for the benefit of Tenant. Landlord shall obtain such an agreement from any
future mortgagee, as a condition of the subordination hereinabove required. Any
such subordination, non-disturbance and attornment agreement which shall be
obtained for the Tenant's benefit shall be written on any such mortgagee's
customary form.
40. EXCULPATION OF LANDLORD
Neither Landlord nor its principals shall have any personal obligation
for payment of any indebtedness or for the performance of any obligation under
this lease but the payment of the indebtedness and the performance of
obligations expressed herein may be enforced only against the Leased Premises,
and the rents, issues and profits thereof, and the Tenant agrees that no
deficiency judgment or other judgment for money damages shall in any event be
entered by it against the Landlord or its principals personally in any action;
provided, however, that the provisions of this paragraph shall in no way affect
Tenant's other remedies for the payment of any indebtedness or for the
enforcement of Landlord's covenants under this lease.
41. LEASE TERMINATION CONTINGENCY
42.1 The within lease agreement is subject to and conditioned upon the
Tenant entering into an agreement terminating its existing lease for other
premises, which agreement shall be entered into on or before August 15, 1993. In
the event, the Tenant has not entered into said agreement by August 15, 1993,
thereafter the within lease agreement may be cancelled by either Landlord or
Tenant upon written notice one to the other.
42. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
42.1 Tenant shall neither assign this lease nor sublet all or any
portion of the Leased Premises without Landlord's prior consent, which consent
shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, subject to Landlord's rights
hereinafter provided in Article 42.4.
42.2 Any request by Tenant for Landlord's consent to an assignment of
the lease shall state the proposed assignee's address and be accompanied by a
profit and loss and balance statements of the proposed assignee for the prior
three (3) years, as well as duplicate original of the instrument of assignment
(wherein the assignee assumes, jointly and severally with Tenant, the
performance of Tenant's obligations hereunder).
42.3 Any request by Tenant for Landlord's consent to a sublease shall
state the proposed subtenant's address and be accompanied by profit and loss and
balance statements of the proposed subtenant for the prior three (3) years, as
well as a duplicate original of the instrument of sublease (wherein Tenant and
the proposed subtenant agree that such sublease is subject to the lease and such
subtenant agrees that, if the lease is terminated because of Tenant's default,
such subtenant shall, at Landlord's option, attorn to Landlord).
42.4 Any request by Tenant for Landlord's consent to an assignment of
the lease or a sublease of all or substantially all of the Leased Premises shall
clearly set forth the proposed terms of such proposed assignment or sublease and
shall constitute Tenant's offer to cancel the lease. Landlord may accept such
offer by notice to Tenant within ninety (90) days after Landlord's receipt
thereof, in which event, the lease shall terminate as of the end of the month
following the month in which such notice is sent (with the same effect as if
such date were the date fixed herein for the natural expiration of the term),
annual rent and additional rent shall be apportioned to such date, Tenant shall
surrender the Leased Premises on such date as herein provided, and subject to
payment of required lease adjustments, the parties shall thereafter have no
further liability one to the other. If Landlord fails to send such notice,
Tenant, within twenty (20) days after the expiration of such ninety (90) day
period, may assign the lease or sublet all or substantially all of the Leased
Premises to the proposed assignee or subtenant and upon the terms specified in
such request, subject to the Landlord's right of approval of the assignee or
subtenant as hereinabove set forth. In any event, Tenant shall pay to Landlord,
as additional rent, amounts received by Tenant from the assignee or subtenant in
excess of the annual rent and additional rent payable by Tenant hereunder.
42.5 In the event of a permitted assignment, Landlord may collect
annual rent and additional rent directly from the assignee. In the event of a
permitted sublease, Landlord may, if Tenant defaults hereunder, collect annual
rent and additional rent directly from the subtenant. In either such event,
Landlord may apply any amounts so collected to the annual rent and additional
rent hereunder without thereby waiving any provisions hereof or releasing Tenant
from liability for the performance of its obligations hereunder.
42.6 Landlord's consent to any assignment or sublease hereunder shall
not be deemed a consent to any further proposed assignment or sublease by Tenant
or any one claiming under or through the Tenant, except in accordance with this
Article 43.
42.7 It is expressly understood and agreed that Tenant's Option to
Renew, as hereinafter set forth in Article 48, shall be personal to Tenant only,
and may not be exercised by any permitted assignee or subtenant hereunder. It is
understood and agreed that Tenant's Option to Renew shall be null and void in
the event that fifty (50%) percent or more of the Leased Premises have been
sublet by the Tenant prior to the date set for the exercise by Tenant of the
Option to Renew hereinafter set forth.
43. GLASS
The Tenant expressly covenants and agrees to replace any broken glass
in the windows or other apertures of the Leased Premises which may become
damaged or destroyed at its cost and expense, unless such damage is caused by
the negligence or intentional misconduct of the Landlord or Landlord's agents,
servants or employees.
44. EXECUTION AND DELIVERY
The submission of the within lease by Landlord to Tenant for review
and approval shall not be deemed an option to lease, an offer to lease, or a
reservation of the Leased Premises in favor of Tenant, it being intended that no
rights or obligations shall be created by Landlord or Tenant until the execution
and delivery of the within lease by Landlord and Tenant, one to the other.
45. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
The Tenant agrees, at the request of the Landlord, to be made not more
than once during any lease year, to furnish its latest current income and
balance statements, certified to by an officer of the corporation. It being
understood and agreed that the Landlord shall utilize said statements solely for
the purpose of obtaining financing for the Property.
46. TENANCY REVIEW
The within Lease Agreement is conditioned upon and subject to the
approval of the Tenant's use and occupancy of the Leased Premises by the Borough
of West Caldwell. In the event said approval is not obtained, the within Lease
Agreement shall be deemed to be null and void.
47. OPTION TO RENEW
Provided the Tenant is not in default pursuant to the terms and
conditions of this lease, the Tenant is hereby given the right and privilege to
renew the within lease, for one (1) five (5) year period, to commence at the end
of the initial term of this lease, which renewal shall be upon the same terms
and conditions as in this lease contained, except as follows:
(1) During the five (5) year renewal term, there shall be paid
annually the minimum base rent of THREE HUNDRED TWELVE THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED
SEVENTY SIX AND 75/100 ($312,676.75) DOLLARS, hereinafter referred to as the
"Original Base Rent". The Original Base Rent shall be increased, if applicable,
in the event of an increase in the Cost of Living Index based on application of
the Cost of Living formula which is hereinafter defined as follows:
At the inception of the five (5) year renewal term, there
shall be compared the "All Items" Index figures for the New
York-Northeastern New Jersey average of the "Consumers Price
Index for All Urban Consumers" (revised CPI-U) (1982-84 equal
to 100) published by the Bureau of Labor Statistics of the
U.S. Department of Labor (in this paragraph hereinafter
referred to as the "Index") for the date which is three (3)
months prior to the date of execution of this lease with the
month which is three (3) months prior to the first month of
the five (5) year renewal term. If there is an increase in the
Index for the month which is three months prior to the first
month of the five (5) year renewal period compared to the
applicable Index for the date which is three (3) months prior
to the date of execution of this lease, ninety (90) percent of
said increase in Index figures shall be used to determine the
applicable percentage of increase which shall be the basis for
determining rent increase over the Original Base Rent in
accordance with the formula hereinbefore set forth, and as
shown in the following example:
EXAMPLE: If the Index figure for the month which is
three (3) months prior to date of execution
of this lease is 100 (the denominator) and
the Index figure for the month which is
three (3) months prior to first month of
the five (5) year renewal term is 130, 90%
of the increase in the Index figures will
produce an increase of 27%.
(130-100) X .90
100
Applying the formula, 27% of $312,676.75 is
equal to $84,422.72. Adding said sum of
$75,331.25 to the Original Base Rent of
$312,676.75 produces an annual renewal rent
of $397,099.47 payable in equal monthly
installments of $33,091.62.
In the event the rent payment for the first month(s) of the five (5) year
renewal term shall have been paid prior to the determination of any applicable
rent increase in excess of the Original Base Rent payable for the five (5) year
renewal term, any increase for months already elapsed after commencement of the
five (5) year renewal term shall then be added to the next monthly rent payment
then becoming due and payable.
(2) Anything herein contained to the contrary notwithstanding, it is
expressly understood and agreed that the minimum rent during the five (5) year
renewal period shall not be less than THREE HUNDRED SEVENTY FIVE THOUSAND TWO
HUNDRED TWELVE AND 10/100 ($375,212.10) DOLLARS per annum.
(3) It is understood and agreed that should the applicable Index
figure not be published for any particular month when the same shall be
applicable under the terms of this lease, the last published figure prior to
that date shall be used, but in no event shall such figure be retroactive for a
period in excess of three (3) months. In the event that the applicable Index
figure is discontinued by way of publication with respect to the entire Index,
then and in that event, the parties shall agree on an equivalent and substituted
Cost of Living Index to be applied in the same manner as in this lease provided.
In the event the parties cannot mutually agree as to the equivalent substituted
Index, then and in that event the question should be submitted for arbitration
to the American Arbitration Association.
(4) The right, option, and privilege of the Tenant to renew this lease
as hereinabove set forth is expressly conditioned upon the Tenant delivering to
the Landlord, in writing, by certified mail, return receipt requested, six (6)
months' prior notice of its intention to renew, which notice shall be given to
the Landlord by the Tenant no later than six (6) months prior to the date fixed
for termination of the original term of this lease.
(5) If the base year (1982-84 equal to 100) hereinabove referred to
with respect to the "Index" shall be changed after the execution of this lease,
appropriate adjustments based on such new Index shall be made so as to have a
proper application of the Cost of Living formula.
(6) The obligation to pay the rent as adjusted pursuant to the Cost of
Living formula hereinabove provided shall be in addition to the obligation to
pay all additional rent and other charges required by the terms and conditions
of the lease.
48. RIGHT OF FIRST REFUSAL
It is understood and agreed that the tenant shall have a right of
right of first refusal to lease any vacant space in the Building which right of
first refusal shall be exercised as is hereinafter set forth. When Landlord has
received a bona fide offer to lease any such vacant space in the Building,
Landlord shall forward such offer to the Tenant, by certified mail, return
receipt requested. Tenant shall then have a period of ten (10) business days
within which to accept Landlord's offer to lease said space to the Tenant, which
election by Tenant shall be made by written notice to Landlord within said ten
(10) business day period. In the event Tenant elects not to lease said space, or
fails to notify Landlord of its election within said ten (10) business day
period, Landlord shall then be free to lease said balance of space to the third
party offeree free and clear of Tenant's rights under this Article. If Tenant
elects to take such balance of space, Tenant shall enter into an amendment to
this lease agreement incorporating the balance of space into the premises leased
hereunder within thirty (30) days after Landlord's written notice to Tenant,
upon the same terms and conditions as were contained in the offer forwarded by
Landlord to Tenant.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have hereunto set their hands and
seals or caused these presents to be signed by its proper corporate officers and
caused its proper corporate seal to be hereunto affixed, the day and year first
above written.
WITNESS: SUBURBAN MALL V ASSOCIATES
BY: /s/ Herbert Punia (L.S.)
Herbert Punia, Partner
ATTEST: THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
BY: /s/ Stanley Silver
STATE OF NEW JERSEY )
) SS.:
COUNTY OF MORRIS )
BE IT REMEMBERED, that on this 11th day of AUGUST 1993, before me, the
subscriber, HERBERT PUNIA personally appeared HERBERT PUNIA, Partner of SUBURBAN
MALL V ASSOCIATES, a New Jersey Partnership, who, I am satisfied, is the
Landlord mentioned in the within Instrument, and thereupon he acknowledged that
he signed, sealed and delivered the same as his act and deed, for the uses and
purposes therein expressed.
/s/ Andrea Nitti
STATE OF NEW JERSEY )
) SS.:
COUNTY OF MORRIS )
BE IT REMEMBERED, that on this 11th day of AUGUST 1993, before me, the
subscriber, STANLEY B. SILVER, personally appeared ______________, who, I am
satisfied, is the person who signed the within Instrument as E.O.P. and C.O.O.
of THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC., a Delaware Corporation, the Tenant
named therein, and he thereupon acknowledged that the said instrument made by
the corporation and sealed with its corporate seal, was signed and sealed with
the corporate seal and delivered by him as such officer, and is the voluntary
act and deed of the corporation, made by virtue of authority from its Board of
Directors.
/s/ Andrea Nitti
FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE
BY AND BETWEEN:
SUBURBAN MALL V ASSOCIATES,
a New Jersey Partnership,
"Landlord"
-and-
THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.,
a Delaware Corporation,
"Tenant"
DATED: 0CTOBER 21, 1994
LAW OFFICES
EPSTEIN, EPSTEIN, BROWN & BOSEK
A Professional Corporation
245 Green Village Road
P.O. Box 901
Chatham Township, NJ 07928-0901
#13740-286
#446
October 18, 1994
FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE, made this 21st day of OCTOBER, 1994,
between SUBURBAN MALL V ASSOCIATES, a New Jersey Partnership, having an office
at 14A Worlds Fair Drive, Franklin Township, New Jersey 08873 (having a mailing
address at P.O. Box 5850, Somerset, New Jersey 08875), hereinafter called the
"Landlord"; and THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC., a Delaware
Corporation, having an office at 1 Dodge Drive, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006,
hereinafter called the "Tenant. "
W I T N E S S E T H:-
WHEREAS, the Landlord owns a building, containing 90,900 square feet
of gross rentable area, commonly known as 1 Dodge Drive, hereinafter referred to
as the "Building," which Building is located in the Borough of West Caldwell, in
the County of Essex and State of New Jersey; and
WHEREAS, the Landlord and Tenant have heretofore entered into a
certain lease agreement dated August 11, 1993, hereinafter called the "Lease,"
pursuant to which Tenant has leased 73,571 square feet of space in the Building,
hereinafter called the "Original Leased Premises," all in accordance with the
terms and conditions of the Lease; and
WHEREAS, the Landlord has agreed to provide and lease to Tenant the
remaining space in the Building, containing 17,329 square feet, outside
dimensions to center line of common wall, hereinafter called the "Additional
Leased Premises," as the Additional Leased Premises shall be delivered by
Landlord to Tenant in the Building hereinabove referred to in accordance with
the terms and conditions hereinafter provided; and
WHEREAS, the Landlord and Tenant by this First Amendment to Lease wish
to modify, supplement and amend the terms and conditions of the Lease to provide
for additional rent and other Lease obligations as the same shall be required
and attributable to the Additional Leased Premises,
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the sum of ONE ($1.00) DOLLAR and
other good and valuable consideration, the parties hereto covenant and agree as
follows:
1. The revised Leased Premises shall consist of the 73,571 square feet
of Original Leased Premises, together with the Additional Leased Premises
containing 17,329 square feet of space, which total leased space, consisting of
the entire Building, equals 90,900 square feet, and Article 1 of the Lease is
hereby modified accordingly.
2. The Lease term under the Lease as to the Additional Leased Premises
shall commence on or about November 1, 1994, subject to the provisions of
paragraph 4 hereof, hereinafter called the "Additional Commencement Date, " and
the Lease term as to the revised Leased Premises shall expire on March 31, 1999,
hereinafter called the "Expiration Date."
3. Commencing on the Additional Commencement Date and continuing
through the Expiration Date, Tenant shall pay annual rent in the amount of THREE
HUNDRED EIGHTY SIX THOUSAND THREE HUNDRED TWENTY FIVE AND 00/100 ($386,325.00)
DOLLARS per annum, (based upon the amount of $4.25 per square foot), in equal
installments of THIRTY TWO THOUSAND ONE HUNDRED NINETY THREE AND 75/100
($32,193.75) DOLLARS per month. Tenant shall pay, in addition to the annual rent
hereinabove provided, all other charges as in the Lease required and as may be
attributable to the Leased Premises. Notwithstanding the above, the Tenant shall
not pay any increase in annual rent over that set forth in Article 3 of the
Lease for any period prior to January 1, 1995, in the event the Additional
Commencement Date occurs before said date. All other terms and conditions of the
Lease shall apply to any such period following the Additional Commencement Date
which is prior to January 1, 1995.
4. It is expressly understood and agreed that the Tenant shall take
the Additional Leased Premises and improvements as of the Additional
Commencement Date in an "as is" condition, except that the Landlord shall
deliver the Additional Leased Premises to the Tenant with all mechanical systems
located therein in good repair and operating condition. Tenant shall, however,
be responsible, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, to obtain all permits and
approvals required for the Tenant's use and occupancy of the Additional Leased
Premises, whether the same takes the form of a certificate of occupancy, a
temporary certificate of occupancy or a certificate of approval. Upon issuance
of any such approvals, the Additional Commencement Date shall occur. Effective
as of February 1, 1995, in the event the aforementioned permits and approvals
necessary for Tenant's occupancy are not granted to Tenant, the within First
Amendment to Lease may be canceled by Landlord or Tenant upon written notice to
the other party.
5. Effective on the Additional Commencement Date, Article 4 of the
Lease entitled "Parking and Use of Exterior Area" shall be amended to provide
that Tenant shall be entitled to use all of the parking spaces serving the
Building.
6. Effective as of the Additional Commencement Date, Tenant's pro rata
share for additional rent and other charges provided in the Lease as applicable
to taxes, repairs, insurance and other Lease obligations shall be revised from
81% to 100% wherever applicable, which revision and readjustment is attributable
to the incorporation of the Additional Leased Premises in and to the Original
Leased Premises as herein referred to.
7. Article 47 entitled "Option to Renew" is hereby modified,
supplemented and amended in full, as follows:
"47. OPTION TO RENEW
Provided the Tenant is not in default pursuant to the terms and
conditions of this lease, the Tenant is hereby given the right and privilege to
renew the within lease, for one (1) five (5) year period, to commence at the end
of the initial term of this lease, which renewal shall be upon the same terms
and conditions as in this lease contained, except as follows:
(1) During the five (5) year renewal term, there shall be paid
annually the minimum base rent of THREE HUNDRED EIGHTY SIX THOUSAND THREE
HUNDRED TWENTY FIVE AND 00/100 ($386,325.00) DOLLARS, hereinafter referred to as
the "Original Base Rent." The original Base Rent shall be increased, if
applicable, in the event of an increase in the Cost of Living Index based on
application of the Cost of Living formula which is hereinafter defined as
follows:
At the inception of the five (5) year renewal term,
there shall be compared the "All Items" Index figures
for the New York-Northeastern New Jersey average of
the "Consumers Price Index for All Urban Consumers"
(revised CPI-U) (1982-84 equal to 100) published by
the Bureau of Labor Statistics of the U.S. Department
of Labor (in this paragraph hereinafter referred to
as the "Index") for the date which is three (3)
months prior to the date of execution of this lease
with the month which is three (3) months prior to the
first month of the five (5) year renewal term.
If there is an increase in the Index for the month
which is three months prior to the first month of the
five (5) year renewal period compared to the
applicable Index for the date which is three (3)
months prior to the date of execution of this lease,
ninety (90%) percent of said increase in Index
figures shall be used to determine the applicable
percentage of increase which shall be the basis for
determining rent increase over the Original Base Rent
in accordance with the formula hereinbefore set
forth, and as shown in the following example:
EXAMPLE: If the Index figure for the month which
is three (3) months prior to date of
execution of this lease is 100 (the
denominator) and the Index figure for
the month which is three (3) months
prior to first month of the five (5)
year renewal term is 130, 90% of the
increase in the Index figures will
produce an increase of 27%.
(130-100) X .90
100
Applying the formula, 27% of $386,325.00
is equal to $84,422.72. Adding said
sum of $84,422.72 to the Original Base
Rent of $386,325.00 produces an annual
renewal rent of $470,747.72 payable in
equal monthly installments of
$39,228.98.
In the event the rent payment for the first month(s) of the five (5)
year renewal term shall have been paid prior to the determination of any
applicable rent increase in excess of the Original Base Rent payable for the
five (5) year renewal term, any increase for months already elapsed after
commencement of the five (5) year renewal term shall then be added to the next
monthly rent payment then becoming due and payable.
(2) Anything herein contained to the contrary notwithstanding, it
is expressly understood and agreed that the minimum rent during the five (5)
year renewal period shall not be less than FOUR HUNDRED SIXTY THREE THOUSAND
FIVE HUNDRED NINETY AND 00/100 ($463,590.00) DOLLARS per annum.
(3) It is understood and agreed that should the applicable Index
figure not be published for any particular month when the same shall be
applicable under the terms of this lease, the last published figure prior to
that date shall be used, but in no event shall such figure be retroactive for a
period in excess of three (3) months. In the event that the applicable Index
figure is discontinued by way of publication with respect to the entire Index,
then and in that event, the parties shall agree on an equivalent and substituted
Cost of Living Index to be applied in the same manner as in this lease provided.
In the event the parties cannot mutually agree as to the equivalent substituted
Index, then and in that event the question should be submitted for arbitration
to the American Arbitration Association.
(4) The right, option, and privilege of the Tenant to renew this
lease as hereinabove set forth is expressly conditioned upon the Tenant
delivering to the Landlord, in writing, by certified mail, return receipt
requested, six (6) months' prior notice of its intention to renew, which notice
shall be given to the Landlord by the Tenant no later than six (6) months prior
to the date fixed for termination of the original term of this lease.
(5) If the base year (1982-84 equal to 100) hereinabove referred
to with respect to the "Index" shall be changed after the execution of this
lease, appropriate adjustments based on such new Index shall be made so as to
have a proper application of the Cost of Living formula.
(6) The obligation to pay the rent as adjusted pursuant to the
Cost of Living formula hereinabove provided shall be in addition to the
obligation to pay all additional rent and other charges required by the terms
and conditions of the lease."
8. The parties mutually represent to each other that RESOURCE REALTY
OF NEW JERSEY, INC. is the sole broker who negotiated and consummated the within
transaction, and that neither party dealt with any other broker in connection
with the within First Amendment to Lease, it being understood and agreed that
the Landlord shall be responsible, at its sole cost and expense, to pay the real
estate brokerage in connection with this transaction. Landlord agrees to
indemnify, defend and save harmless Tenant in connection with the claims of any
other real estate broker claiming commissions in connection with the within
transaction and claiming authority from Landlord. Tenant agrees to indemnify,
defend and save harmless Landlord in connection with the claims of any other
real estate broker claiming commissions in connection with the within
transaction and claiming authority from Tenant.
9. Except as in this First Amendment to Lease provided, all other
terms and conditions of the Lease shall remain in full force and effect and
shall be applicable to the Additional Leased Premises upon the Additional
Commencement Date.
10. This Agreement shall be binding on the parties hereto, their
heirs, successors and assigns.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have hereunto set their hands and
seals or cause these presents to be signed by its proper corporate officers and
caused its proper corporate seal to be hereunto affixed, the day and year first
above written.
WITNESS: SUBURBAN MALL V ASSOCIATES
/s/ Dianne Dykstra BY: /s/ Herbert Punia (L.S.)
Herbert Punia, Partner
ATTEST: THE CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC.
/s/ Sal Pepitone BY: /s/ Stanley Silver
STATE OF NEW JERSEY )
) SS.:
COUNTY OF SOMERSET )
BE IT REMEMBERED, that on this 2lst day of OCTOBER 1994, before
me, the subscriber, SONDRA A. STEINBERG personally appeared HERBERT PUNIA,
Partner of SUBURBAN MALL V ASSOCIATES, a New Jersey Partnership, who, I am
satisfied, is the Landlord mentioned in the within Instrument, and thereupon he
acknowledged that he signed, sealed and delivered the same as his act and deed,
for the uses and purposes therein expressed.
/s/ Sondra A. Steinberg
STATE OF )
) SS.:
COUNTY OF )
BE IT REMEMBERED, that on this 19th day of OCTOBER 1994, before
me, the subscriber, DIANNE DYKSTRA, personally appeared STANLEY SILVER, who, I
am satisfied, is the person who signed the within Instrument as C.O.O. of THE
CHILDREN'S PLACE RETAIL STORES, INC., a Delaware Corporation, the Tenant named
therein, and he thereupon acknowledged that the said instrument made by the
corporation and sealed with its corporate seal, was signed and sealed with the
corporate seal and delivered by him as such officer, and is the voluntary act
and deed of the corporation, made by virtue of authority from its Board of
Directors.
/s/ Sondra A. Steinberg
EXHIBIT 23.1
CONSENT OF ARTHUR ANDERSEN LLP
After the stock split of the Company described in Note 15 to the
Company's Financial Statements is effected, we expect to be in a position to
render the following consent.
/s/ ARTHUR ANDERSEN LLP
New York, New York
July 17, 1997
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS
To The Children's Place Retail Stores, Inc.:
As independent public accountants, we hereby consent to the use of our report
dated _______, 1997 (and to all references to our Firm) included in or made a
part of this Registration Statement on Form S-1.
New York, New York
_________, 1997
5
1,000
YEAR YEAR
FEB-01-1997 MAY-03-1997
FEB-01-1997 MAY-03-1997
3,422 765
0 0
890 1,545
0 0
14,425 14,828
27,688 26,484
32,382 36,708
12,083 13,292
64,479 65,934
15,737 16,234
0 0
0 0
0 0
1,281 1,281
26,017 27,028
67,479 65,934
143,838 39,203
143,838 39,203
89,786 25,185
36,750 10,167
879 100
0 0
2,884 828
9,522 1,690
(20,919) 679
30,441 1,011
0 0
0 0
0 0
30,441 1,011
0 0
0 0